JP2021049295A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: While a first specific performance from among plural kinds of performances is executed when an operation part is operated before a specific timing within an operation effective period, a second specific performance from among the plural kinds of performances is executed when the operation part is operated after the specific timing within an operation effective period. A predetermined display part displays an image for showing the operation effective period and the specific timing, and may display a first specific image for suggesting execution of the first specific performance or may not display the first specific image as an image displayed on the display part within the operation effective period, and may display a second specific image for suggesting execution of the second specific performance or may not display the second specific image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 141

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, there is a game machine in which a symbol is variablely displayed by a display means and a predetermined game value is given when the display result becomes a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, it has been proposed to execute a button effect requesting a player to operate a button in a period until a display result is displayed by the display means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2019-115451

However, if the configuration is the same as the conventional one, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in a game interest.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

The present invention
A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of starting conditions and gives profits based on the results of the lottery.
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period generating means for generating an operation valid period capable of accepting an operation on the operation unit, and an operation valid period generating means.
Based on the result of the lottery, when the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period, it is provided with an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of effects.
It is characterized in that one of a plurality of types of specific effects is executed according to the operation timing within the operation valid period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing which cut at the eye line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing which cut | cut by the aer line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the part of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame. (C) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate in the present embodiment product and the conventional product. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in a state where is moved to an ascending position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the effect operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detectors in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is the right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (b) is the transparent outer layer while leaving the inner layer as it is in (a). It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in this state. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the production operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100A viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of the 2nd Embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the right rear. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the left rear. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 114 (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of (a). ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) and looked at from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. It is a bottom view which shows the part after the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is a view of the board unit of (a) from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a sectional view. It is sectional drawing which cut at the sea line in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 127 and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where the game ball is distributed by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 137. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 137. It is explanatory drawing which shows the position of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece from the front of the game board. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and the game panel, and (b) is the rear cell and the cell fixing piece viewed from the front component and the game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a four-view view of the cell fixing piece, (b) is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the crune in the center distribution unit of the center accessory as seen from the front, (b) is a plan view of the crune of (a), and (c) is the soso in (b). It is a cross-sectional view cut by a line. (A) is an explanatory view showing a part of the center distribution unit in the center accessory of the game board partially in a perspective view, and (b) is a partial view of the part of the center distribution unit in the center accessory of the game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows in the plan view. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a crune of an embodiment different from that of FIG. 149, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a crune of a further different embodiment, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution unit of a further different embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening / closing unit, the first winning opening opening / closing unit, the second winning opening opening / closing unit, and the V distribution unit in the attacker unit, and (b) is an attacker unit. It is a perspective view of the 2nd start opening opening / closing unit, the 1st big winning opening opening / closing unit, the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing unit, and the V distribution unit seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front by disassembling the second starting port opening / closing unit, and (b) is disassembling the second starting port opening / closing unit as viewed from behind. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening / closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (b) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening / closing unit when the second starting port is open. It is a figure, (c) is an explanatory view which shows the state of each configuration of the 2nd start opening opening / closing unit when the 2nd start opening is closed, and (d) is the 2nd start opening open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of each structure of the 2nd start opening opening / closing unit at the time. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory, which is viewed from the front by disassembling the first prize opening opening / closing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first winning opening opening / closing unit, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the first prize opening opening / closing unit when the first prize opening is closed, and (b) is when the first prize opening is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of each configuration of the 1st prize opening opening opening and closing unit of. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory, which is viewed from the front by disassembling the second prize opening opening / closing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the second winning opening opening / closing unit, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. .. (A) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the V distribution unit, the V winning opening sensor, the loss opening sensor, and the lower right ball path of the center, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. (A) is a perspective view showing the mounting state of the opening / closing unit of different embodiments, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. In the attacker unit of the center accessory, the relationship between the attacker front plate, the second starting port sensor, the second major winning opening sensor, the V winning opening sensor, the loss opening sensor, the attacker base plate, and the lower right ball passage of the center is shown in a perspective view. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section by applying a door body of a different embodiment to the first grand prize opening opening / closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory, and (b) shows (a) in a plan view. It is explanatory drawing. (A) is a perspective view seen from the rear in a state where wiring is omitted in the vicinity of the attacker unit in the center accessory, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the binding pedestal disassembled in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the center base of a main body unit, the attacker base plate of an attacker unit, and a binding pedestal in a center accessory. It is a six-sided view of the unity pedestal. (A) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from above and front, (b) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from above and rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from below and front. .. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a main part of the center accessory in a state where a plurality of wires are bundled with a binding band on a binding pedestal, and (b) is a state in which the binding pedestal is separated in (a). It is an exploded perspective view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of an embodiment different from the binding pedestal of FIG. 168, and (b) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of a further different embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the use state of the wiring locking part on the rear surface of a game board by the perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit of a game board into a production unit, a mounting supporter, and a back box and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit of a game board into a production unit, a mounting supporter, and a back box and looked at from the back. (A) is a six-view view of the mounting supporter in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view showing a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of FIG. 175, and (b) is a perspective view of a main part of a mounting supporter having a different shape of a main body in the mounting supporter of (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the main part of the mounting supporter of the embodiment different from the mounting supporter of (a) by the perspective view seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of a mounting supporter having a form different from that of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175 as viewed from the front left, (b) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a), and (c) is a front view of (a). It is a perspective view of the mounting supporter viewed from the front right, and (d) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) viewed from the back. It is an enlarged view of the part of the mounting supporter as a main part with the back box made transparent, and is a perspective view of the back unit seen from the back. (A) is a photograph of one mounting supporter in FIG. 175 in the back unit as viewed from behind, and (b) is a photograph of the mounting supporter in FIG. 177 in the back unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from behind. (A) is a front view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left effect unit cut along the saucer line in (a). It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the back front left production unit in the back unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back front left production unit in the back unit and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the unit base side, the back rear upper decorative body and the back rear lower decorative body in the back rear effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the back by disassembling the unit base side, the back rear upper decorative body and the back rear lower decorative body in the back rear effect unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear upper decorative body disassembled in the back-rear effect unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear upper decorative body disassembled and viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is an explanatory view showing the locking mechanism in the locked position state in the back rear upper decorative body in a perspective view, and (b) is a perspective view showing the locking mechanism in the unlocked position state in the back rear upper decorative body. It is explanatory drawing. Is an exploded perspective view of the back and rear lower decorative body of the back and rear effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear lower decorative body of the back rear effect unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is explanatory drawing which shows the wiring arrangement on the rear surface of the back-rear lower decorative body of a back-rear effect unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotating decorative body in the back rear lower decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is a disassembled first rotating decorative body in the back rear lower decorative body and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the back-rear upper decorative body was moved to the drop position. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state that the back-rear upper decorative body and the back-rear lower decorative body are moved to the central position. (A) is a front view of the game board showing the display screen of the effect display device in a blacked out state, and (b) is the display screen of the effect display device and the back front left of the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship with the decorative sheet. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back upper right decorative body, the back right middle decorative body, and the back right lower decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back rear left decorative body of the back rear left production unit in the back unit is moved to the first appearance position. It is a front view of the front view of the game board which shows the state that the back rear left decorative body of the back rear left production unit in the back unit is moved to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back-rear upper decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is dropped from the evacuation position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back-rear upper decorative body and the back-rear lower decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit are moved to the center position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a flowchart of vibration alarm processing in a game board. It is a front view of the door frame of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the door frame of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd Embodiment from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd Embodiment from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd Embodiment from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment disassembled into a door frame top ad unit and others and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a side sectional view of the upper part of the door frame of the second embodiment, and (b) is an exploded side sectional view showing the door frame top ad unit and others in (a). (A) is an exploded perspective view of a main part of the door frame of the second embodiment as viewed from behind by disassembling the right side panel and the right side decorative sheet from the door frame right side unit, and (b) is the right side panel. Is a perspective view seen from the left rear. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 217. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 218. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit symbol determination table (B), and a small hit symbol determination table (C). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process (step S235A). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button effect execution process. (A) is a table showing an example of a button effect determination pattern, and (B) is a table showing an example of a button effect execution pattern. This is a concrete example of the effect when the button effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the madness effect execution processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a time chart which shows an example at the time of execution of a madness effect and a mute effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting state of a door frame at the time of execution of a madness effect and a mute effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing at the time of entering a ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting part on the game area at the time of execution of a suggestion effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 including a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310 and the setting change board, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100 are arranged behind the game panel 1100. It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and can display a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. It includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first lower starting opening 2003, a first upper starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, and a second major winning opening (payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) are given. It is equipped with a mouth 2007, a V winning mouth 2008, and a losing mouth 2009. Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. General winning opening 2001, gate 2002, first lower starting opening 2003, first upper starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, loss opening 2009) ) Is provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B has the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, and the second in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 195 so that the player can be accepted or passed through the large winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, loss opening 2009) or the like.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the start port display unit 2110 and the back front. The upper effect unit 3200, the back front left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, the back rear effect unit 3600, and the like can be used to perform light emission effect and movable effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 11a on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b from the rear side to the right. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to be ventilated through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is caused by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is obliquely upward and forward. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the directing sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached at a position to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front view and inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing forward the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, which penetrate the front and rear of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and a door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 makes the door frame 3 hingeable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the front, and (d) is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state which was rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation of the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably attached to the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side of the second cam member 135, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about their respective rotation axes. are doing. Further, each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is provided at a position where the first arm 136 is attached at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state in which a shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked in an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Therefore, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 of the cylinder lock 130 are centered on rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the right portion, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by rotating the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In contrast to the large force acting on the second arm 137, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. Is proportional to the distance between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) is in any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked well.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 apart from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees with respect to the first arm 136. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, by locating the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead point by either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the gear may rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 203) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, etc. is performed, the ball launcher 540 launches (hits) the ball. Due to the momentum of the illegal game ball B, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the upper piece 148a and the lower piece are inserted. It can be cut by the V-shaped narrowed portion formed by the 148b, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the arrow in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disc-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in each counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is turned.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted behind the spokes 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am trying to do it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative substrate 184 has two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, the set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the front handle lens 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decorative substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. It includes an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a tubular front tubular portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends forward and backward, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a toward the front. 291b of the inner wall portion extending to the inside, a tubular rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter capable of inserting the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 through the middle wall portion 291b, and the inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d which are projected inward and extend back and forth in the circumferential direction and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portion 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange portion 291e in the radial direction. The handle cover base 291 is provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. A U-shaped guide portion is formed by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and the inner portion 292 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and control 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b, which has a short outer peripheral edge extending rearward. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having an inner diameter of the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction (here, four). The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 with the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a front lens of the steering wheel 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) at the rear end side of the guide portion 196a between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291 and the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety of thrusting a hand (finger) into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily positioned by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visibly closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c are provided, the handle in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger. When the handle 195 is operated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the operation of the handle 195 can be given to the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transferred to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , You can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the amount of operation of the steering wheel, entertain the player, and make it harder for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 and the handle 195 The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc. are not damaged, and the handle unit 180 can be made less likely to be damaged. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play without hesitation. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is lower than the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate the handle cover unit 290 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 so as to face downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel of an automobile is operated by the portion 195c, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b are gripped by a finger, and the steering wheel cover unit is straddled over the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of driving various game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by a finger so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on and projects forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It has.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A unit relay board unit 330 is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which is provided with the effect operation unit 301 and is provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit base 315, so that the effect operation unit 300 can project upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310. It is provided with an effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, its bottom surface is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact (rolls), the game ball B is brought into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the main part, (c) is the table which compared the number of game balls stored in the lower plate in this Example product and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50B, the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed in a tubular shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is extended diagonally to the left front. It is tilted to. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 is a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and the upper plate 201 The game ball B inside is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide unit 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (left part of the lower plate 202). is there. As shown in FIG. 50A, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms the inner wall on the left side facing the inner wall on the right side where the ball extraction guide path 241c is open in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a tubular shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (rear end of the lower plate 202) at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. There is a distance (gap) that can be circulated. As a result, when the game ball B circulating from the upper plate 201 to the ball pulling-out guiding portion 241c comes into contact with the ball guiding portion 213 from the right side, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guiding portion 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), since the lower plate ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as the conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball removal guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while bouncing to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of the game ball B (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 50 (b)) is concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202, and the right side of the lower plate 202 is stored. When the game ball B concentrated in the area blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B is not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side, so that the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 is activated and the lower plate 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B that has been distributed through the ball pulling guiding portion 241c is guided to the left region in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B released to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored throughout the lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

Then, as a proof of the above-mentioned action and effect, the inventors of the present application store the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product in the lower plate 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game balls B was performed 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50 (c), the lower plate 202 (the product of the present embodiment) of the present embodiment has a larger number of stored game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that the game ball B could be stored about 40% more than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forwardly bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the rented game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine, adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and so on.

The ball lending operation unit 220 is provided on a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, sound, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time by simplifying the above.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball pulling portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operating receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the advance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A dish left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. A dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the left side unit 420 of the door frame in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical dish right decorative body 276 that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decorative body 276 and has translucency. It includes a dish 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. , A step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front lower side. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end. It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310 and an effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the outside on the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the production operation unit 350, and the sudden output of the production operation unit 350. It is provided with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is provided with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the lower side of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has translucency, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 on the plate base unit 210 on the rear side. The front and lower parts of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper part is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The effect operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a has a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, the disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and is arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 is composed of a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a tubular tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat plate-shaped downward extending piece 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be luminescent and decorated in a state of being.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a penetrating vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b penetrating vertically at the center, and projecting from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operating unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a signal having a plurality of stages may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the effect operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

In the above description, the button body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. As a result, the contact detector 352 made of punching metal becomes difficult to see through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 has translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit elevating mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the effect operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns that are symmetrically arranged and have the lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation base 315 and the upper end penetrating the operation base 315 and the button base 354 and extending upward. The guide shaft 362 and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively, and a pair of elevating springs 365 for urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotation shaft projects upward, and the rotation shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, which is engaged with the elevating drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. The elevating cam drive gear member 370, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam for raising and lowering the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is equipped with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascent and descent of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, an elevating detection sensor 374, and a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that projects downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower projecting portion into contact with the upper projecting portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the elevating spring 365 (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projecting portion into contact with the lower end of the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operating unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operating unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 lowers the effect detection sensor 373 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button base 354 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and thereby means the elevating cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front and rear, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 are in agreement with each other, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, it meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operating unit 350 is raised by the protruding output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third of the remaining cam portions 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

In this raised position, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the effect operation unit 350 pushes the elevating spring 365. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 as it moves downward against the urging force of the. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the descending position, the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 moved the elevating unsprung holding member 385 downward to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward becomes weak, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It becomes weaker, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, so that the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described, but the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is an elevating cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lower position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 watch in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position higher than the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first lower start port 2003). (Depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004 and the second start port 2005), by making the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 different, the degree of expectation for the game Can be suggested to the player.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward. The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and is rotatably supported by inserting a central shaft 366, and an adjusting screw. It is provided with a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365.

The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a so that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b penetrating up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 penetrating the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjusting screw 384 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes small (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Then, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is raised most. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the projectile output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the projecting output adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating unsprung mass holding member by the projecting output adjustment drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being further compressed, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 from being damaged.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects the effect operation unit 350 so as to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protruding output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, a special lottery is made according to the gaming state (for example, by accepting the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, or the second starting port 2005). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the button body 351 (according to the lottery result of the symbol), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion output of the effect operating unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lift spring 365 by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative substrate of the effect operation unit, the decorative substrate outside the button, and the decorative substrate inside the button in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button is arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The effect operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, a light emission effect that the light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), the effecting operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised. It can be of great interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed with the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may make the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker so that the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 causes the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the fingers and the like of the player, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and makes the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is projected with a strong projectile output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player with the projecting sound. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect that causes the same pressing operation as the pressing button. Alternatively, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect of contacting the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation). The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is described above by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevates and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is projected halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring 365 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The urging force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present the production, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for the production by providing. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 or the game. By dividing the stage where a person's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the elevating unsprung holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect operating unit 350 is set to the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, it is possible to entertain the player with various productions and make the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer periphery of the effect operation unit is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decorative substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lower position to the upper position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body are changed. Both right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detector right 390R is electrostatically charged. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like by any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact detection body 393 can detect the contact, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "a switch by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "a switch by another electronic circuit", and "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detector 393a is provided and the second contact detector 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 to project the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the production operation unit 300 or the like, and the production is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detector 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detector 393b detects the player's fingers or the like, the movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped, and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward and returned to the initial state only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61A, the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is shaped like a star to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side base 421 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light of the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is outer. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LED 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422 b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LED 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7 to 9 from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the door frame left. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide shaft member 429 on the lower left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly projected. It can be luminescent and decorated in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame. The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side base 431 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It includes a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. It includes a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted so as to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the door frame right side base 431 is curved to the rear side when the rear end side extends vertically over the entire height and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with decorative holes 438a and decorative holes 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LED 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems, which are 3 systems for 1 group on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and LEDs. Two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 sets, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 sets, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 sets, and 2 in the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LED 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground wire), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a tubular holding cylinder 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shafts 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a. , Formed of transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the right side left side decoration 438 of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, and forms an upright. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, which makes it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decoration 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. It is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the counter-shaped door frame can be luminescently decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the front side first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being luminescent and decorated. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescently decorated. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a box-shaped speaker box in which the top center speaker and the top side speaker are mounted diagonally downward and forward, and a door frame top decoration so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker. The top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the body 453, the door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and the upper side of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top top plate 468, which is attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the door frame, is provided.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high frequencies of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. Is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates By appropriately emitting light from the LED, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical production operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as being operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire effect of the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 makes the player participation type production entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71A, when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, those in which a circular or radial pattern is formed are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are each transmitted. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decoration. In this way, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, and the appearance can be changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmission rates on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame, and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is prevented from being seen through from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see by the outer layer 3b having low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) on the surface of the inner layer 3a In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be light-emitting decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be beautifully displayed for the game. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be made different, and by changing the decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multi-color molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. Therefore, the luminescent decoration in the decorative body depends on the color of the light emitted by the LED. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the gaming state, the player can be given a chance or a change in the driving operation (for example, "right-handed") due to a change in the decoration of the decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner in the front view, in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation of the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to the steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, from the center to the lower left two, the left two, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 in the lower right and 2 in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative substrate 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative substrate 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the dish left decorative substrate 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, which will be described later. (The illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third LED 432c divided into two sets in the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 3rd LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different in shape in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on their respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is a dot shape that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The luminescent effect that shines in the spot can make the player "haha".

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative substrate 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top, the left decorative substrate of the door frame top By appropriately emitting light from the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated, or the light can be emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is irradiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting with high brightness and brightness as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 a. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that project forward (the front ends that project forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness makes it possible to direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame emit spot light, high-brightness spot light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is provided. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322, 4 are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and 6 on the inner circumference are 3 sets of 2 each in the circumferential direction, and 3 on the middle circumference. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a chain line at one point, and four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. There are 7 groups in total, 3 groups of 3 each, and 2 groups of 9 on the outer circumference, 3 each near both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 or 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301 or light emission in which the light is concentrated in the center is emitted. It is possible to show the player a production or a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of one and the other in the left-right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame can be light-emitting decorated (surface-emitting), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from their front end (front end surface). Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portions corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot-emitting) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a. A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescent and decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame is luminescently decorated in dots, or the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame can be luminescent and decorated in a dot shape, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right lower decorative substrate 433 are separated are symmetrical with each other, and in each case, Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects with a high effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the above are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially in dots, and emits bright dots in dots. The light-emitting effect can strongly attract the player's interest, and the light-emitting effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, using the door frame 3 as an example, the identification of various decorative substrates on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am trying to do it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the decorative body and the like in the front can be luminescent and decorated, and the front (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown in shades of shade in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided with the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), a decorative substrate having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected forward on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, the decorative substrate can be surely prepared as much as necessary, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 by eliminating the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Door frame action effect]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired portion is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 are appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, more production means (for example, movable decorations, light emitting decorations, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, and the number of production means can be increased to provide the player with more various effects. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detector 393 is provided in each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detector 393 provided in the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. In comparison with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts is increased. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the wiring of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detector 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be easily embodied.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detector 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detector 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the button body can be detected via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected by using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit are raised and lowered. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. Therefore, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 use the effect operation unit 350 as a non-contact operation unit or the non-contact operation unit 350. It can function as a contact operation unit. Then, since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating it from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is the contact detector 352 (button body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with a player-participatory production, which reduces the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in the approaching or non-contacting state can be reduced, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detector 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detector 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, since the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the production.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decorative substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing, the contact detector made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit The 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player-participation-type production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, and the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be produced. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detector 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detector 352 (effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the effect is produced. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detector 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. Then, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. The urging force can be increased, and when the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operating unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the production operation unit 350 can be projected with various sudden outputs, the variation of the production by physical force can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the production operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the effect operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to raise the expectation for the hobby and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 is a press operation unit 303 capable of a press operation, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player is made to press the effect operation unit 350 to perform a game. A player can participate in the person-participation type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, it is possible for a player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) so that the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed at any time. Then, when the player-participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without informing the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operating unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily produced.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit 350 in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can move to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or contacts. Since the change in the capacitance of the detector 352 can be detected, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button inner decorative board A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function like the effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, it is provided with an effect operation unit 350 capable of allowing the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detector 352 capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and the operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can motivate the player to participate in the player-participation-type production, making it easier to participate in the player-participation-type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the player less likely to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of advancing / retreating the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is made incapable of advancing / retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the production operation unit 350 without permission, which makes the production by the production operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. When the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 are brought into close contact with each other, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is provided. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is subjected to a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light shining on the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is moved to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or brought into contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or contacts the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different depending on the distance to and from, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed, and a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and by making the vapor deposition film thicker to have a metallic luster, it looks like a part of decoration. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by an effect presenting means such as a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a button inner decorative substrate 364, a protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect display device 1600. 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397, etc.) Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the slingshot machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can give a strong impact to the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of differentiating from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 and the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, at first glance, some players may present the effect. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like to make contact. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily cleaned.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil stamping is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn early by touching it, and it is possible to enhance the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. A contact detector 395 or the like can be formed by a suitable material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by approaching or contacting the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or comes into contact with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

Further, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives a feeling of operation. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to approach or bring the contact detector 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry into the detection area such as a finger, the game is played through the button main body 351 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that irradiates a person with light, effect that vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and projects upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. Further, at this time, since the player is given effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, with the player's fingers or the like touching the button body 351 and pressing the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detector The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily impart effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is provided with a main body frame upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89A is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball pulling movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down quickly.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to abut the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. The back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600 are mounted.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and is mainly arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j and the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m is a flat plate from a position as low as 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends like a rectangle. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed so as to match, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (to the right in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of the second embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 107A is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107B is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front. Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A is rotatably attached so that the upstream end side extends back and forth and around the axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A and the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A can be used. Place it near the terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which the electric wires are connected, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rails and the like]
Subsequently, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113A is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. 114 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and FIG. 114 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail and the like of (a) from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail or the like of the third embodiment includes the tank rail or the like of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 535, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopping member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configuration as described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend to the left and right of the payout base 551 and the ball tank 552 which is box-shaped and is open upward. It is provided with a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the portion and which is open upward and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream) so that dust, dirt, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided in portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d opens downward and rearward of the tank rail 553 and extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, the ball clogging generated at the site can be eliminated through the opening 553d. Further, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the opening 553d through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is to the left of the ball tank 552, and closes above the predetermined range from the right end to the left of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The second rail cover 555 that closes upward from the portion spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 in the tank rail 554 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. A ball rectifying member 556 provided at a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 555, and the first rail cover 554. It is provided with a protective cover 559 that straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from the middle of the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. ..

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114A and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the upper game balls B are arranged. When trying to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is distributed in two upper and lower stages in the tank rail 553, the upper game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a. By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent an attempt to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the game ball B on the lower stage side moves to the downstream side first, and the game ball B on the upper stage side moves to the rear side, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one stage. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper stage side presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and the game on the upper stage side due to its own weight. The ball B can be pressed downward, and the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a) swings in the vertical direction to promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper stage side to the lower stage side and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion (a portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream) in 553.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side of the above, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left side, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the ball rectifying member 556 and the ball rectifying member 556 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. In the guide plate portion 559d, a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the front end of the guide plate portion 559d and the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from the outside when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. To confirm the operation of the ball rectifying member 556, a thin rod is inserted into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to bring it into contact from below, or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is passed through the opening 553d and the operator's finger. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by pressing the ball B or the like and lifting it through the game ball B.

Further, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason to the left by the guide plate portion 559d and discharge it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Further, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom of the. More specifically, when dust or dirt adheres to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifies the ball B inside by touching the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and via the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken, dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B and the like can be removed. Then, dust and dirt dropped from the game ball B and the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, since the portion where the front-rear direction of the tank rail 553 extends to the left at a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558a. When the electric wire connected to the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556 cannot be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to the 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, sufficiently exerting the rectifying action, and in the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, when an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 for some reason and the tip of the electric wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, the computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. You will not be able to receive it, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has invaded behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, and thus it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, the game ball B is after the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or short circuit by contacting various electric wires and wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of the Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119 (a) is a front view of a substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 123 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku Ku line in (a), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the cake line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) behind the door frame.

The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out-ball passage 663 and the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guidance unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and guides it to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball pulling guide unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball pulling out passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball pulling out passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guidance portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging or the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies in a row while meandering greatly in the left-right direction, the downward guiding section 663c that guides the game ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying section 663b downward, and the downward guiding section 663c. It is open downward and has an out ball discharge port 663d that discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is on the same surface as the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guidance portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the downward guidance portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guidance portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. The lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately contacts the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed therethrough. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed into a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball extraction lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to remove the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side from the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the ball pulling discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a to enter the general winning opening 2001, the first lower start opening 2003, the first upper start opening 2004, and the second start. The number of game balls B that are accepted and discharged from the game board 5 by the winning openings such as the opening 2005, the first winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, the loss opening 2009), and the game It is the sum of the number of game balls B that are received in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 and discharged from the game board 5 without being accepted in any of the winning openings after being driven into the area 5a. It is the number of game balls B (number of launched balls) driven into the game area 5a.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "Payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board). , Connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), so it is possible to respond to the problem at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing a directing device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b meandering in the out-ball passage 663 is provided, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball-extracting discharge passage 665, whereby the game ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball removal discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from the 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B driven into the area 5a to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Ball Discharge in a Substrate Unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection / discharging passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is the out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and open downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guidance portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 detects the main body portion 668a which extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the side opposite to the proximal end side of the main body portion 668a. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, which is opposite to the out-sphere rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened under the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the present embodiment, in the state where the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object indicated by the alternate long and short dash line (for example, the outer frame 2). There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside and inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that was interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). It is largely applied to the end side of the base unit 660), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, it is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 127 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 129 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along a coco line in (a), and (c) is a searcher line in (a). It is a cut sectional view, and FIG. 130 is a sectional view cut along the sieve line in FIG. 129 (a).

FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127.

Since the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is the same as the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710 and other configurations, the above substrate unit 620 and the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are described here. The same components as those of the substrate unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-mentioned board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball B can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B in circulation in the first ball path 701, and the game ball in circulation in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects B, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and after each of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 in the game board 5 circulates through the first ball path 701, and in the game board 5, the general winning port 2001 and the first lower start port The game ball B accepted in 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, loss opening 2009) is the second ball. It is configured to circulate through route 702. That is, the out sphere is configured to circulate through the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere circulates through the second sphere path 702, and the number of all out spheres can be counted by the first sphere sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, the general winning opening 2001, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, and the second major winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008) of the game board 5 , Lost mouth 2009), etc., when cheating is performed on the winning opening (winning opening sensor), the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704. It is possible to detect fraudulent activity against the winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. A power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface and a ball ejection passage 705 is provided between the rear base 712 and the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 and the like are provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 housed therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball pulling passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and the whole is opened rearward. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side in the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens forward. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide unit 712a and the second discharge guide unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b is open to the rear with respect to the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the front base 711, which is the elimination port 711b, and are left. They are arranged in order from to the right. The outlet of the ball-extracting passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (FIG. 128 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball pulling passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located at a portion to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713e extending to the left from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713j and from the left end of the lower wall portion upper 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The middle wall part 713k that is exposed, the eaves part 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall part 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf part 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has a hanging wall portion 713 m extending from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713 m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j. The lower portion of the lower wall portion 713n between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. It has a notch 713q of. Each notch portion 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the substrate unit 700. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the parts between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cable extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extends to the left from the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t to the left of the middle wall portion 713k. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height at which one game ball B can pass. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the eliminating port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the eliminating port 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten by the tool. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing the ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Is penetrated from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool is further inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 701 and second). There is a risk that the game board 5 provided above may be cheated by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern not only in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip It can prevent movement and prevent further insertion of fraudulent tools (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

In the parts of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower wall on which the notch portion 713q is not provided are located below and to the left and right of them. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout part 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part concerned. No fraudulent activity is committed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downward through the cutout portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see FIG. 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It projects to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open in a state in which the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward to make it vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the release port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted from the release port 711b into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 701 or first). It is possible to prevent the insertion into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is at risk of contact (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The open security cover 714 will come into contact with the contact risk from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the contact risk from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the contact risky object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the contact risk object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball pulling passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712a. (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guidance unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are formed from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d to the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, the sensor is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to pull out the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball pulling passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) where the game ball B on the side is collected.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q, dust is passed through the cutout portion 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball is clogged with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower part of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is passed through. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714 around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the outer frame 2 is to be closed, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructive rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of illegal tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure a space for the configuration, and by providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining for the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board). , Connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), so it is possible to respond to the problem at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball pulling passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the out ball circulates in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates in the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may circulate on the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 regardless of the safe ball and the out ball may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding the security cover 714 back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through one of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the back. It is a figure. FIG. 141 is a front view of a game board showing the inside of a game area in which a game ball is distributed by cutting a table unit in parallel with the surface of the game panel. FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 137, and FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 137.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, and a first lower starting port that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, and the V winning opening 2008 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a first lower starting opening 2003, a first upper starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. , And a game to entertain the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the second prize opening 2007 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a, and vibration that detects vibration that acts on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). It includes a sensor 1040 (see FIG. 203 and the like). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and supports the rear cell 1130 and the rear cell 1130 that decorate the inside of the game area 5a on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The game content played by driving the cell fixing piece 1140, the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 203 and the like) for controlling the above.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is further equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be used.

An effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 which are open at all times and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. A gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B, a first lower starting port 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received, and an upper warp passage. The first upper start port 2004 in which the game ball B distributed by the center distribution unit 2520 through 2513 is received, and the game is played according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. To the second starting port 2005 that allows the ball B to be accepted, and to the first special symbol or the second starting port 2005 that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004. The first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 and the second big winning opening 2007 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B It is provided with a V winning opening 2008 in which the game ball B received and distributed by the V distribution unit 2660 is received. Further, the game board 5 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream side in the game area 5a, is always open so that the game ball B can be received, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning the received game ball B. The out port 2020 and the out port 2020 in the game area 5a are provided upstream of the out port 2020, and the game ball B is always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the received game ball B is outside the game area 5a without being returned. It is provided with a sub-out port 2021 for discharging. The out port 2020 is composed of two, a left out port 2020a and a right out port 2020b, with the first lower start port 2003 in between. Further, the sub-out port 2021 includes a left sub-out port 2021a provided to the left of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and a right sub-out port 2021b provided to the right of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. It is composed of two parts.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first lower start port 2003 and an out port 2020, and a start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has three general winning openings 2001 and the left sub-out port 2021a, and the side unit 2200 on the left side of the front view. The side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a are provided, and one general winning opening 2001, gate 2002, first upper starting opening 2004, first It is provided with a starting port 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, a second large winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a right sub-out opening 2021b.

The center accessory 2500 is provided in a frame-shaped main body unit 2510 having a gate 2002 and a first upper start port 2004, and at the lower right of the main body unit 2510, and is provided with one general winning opening 2001 and a second start. It includes a mouth 2005, a first prize opening 2006, a second prize opening 2007, a V prize opening 2008, and an attacker unit 2600 having a right sub-out opening 2021b.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped box-shaped back wall that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has an open front, and a vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). The back box 3010 having the opening 3010a, the lock slider 3020 to which the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 arranged behind the effect display device 1600. It includes a back board unit 3040, which is attached to the rear wall.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front upper effect unit 3200 provided along the upper side, the back front left effect unit 3300 provided along the left side near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 slightly rearward from the front end. The back right effect unit 3400 provided along the right side and the back front left effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 and the back rear left effect provided in the upper left corner near the rear end in the back box 3010. It includes a unit 3500 and a back-rear effect unit 3600 provided near the rear end in the back box 3010.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a plurality of mounting supporters 3050 for mounting the back-back effect unit 3600 on the back box 3010, and a mounting supporter 3060 for mounting the back-right effect unit 3400 on the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The out port 1008 is closed from the front by the start port unit 2100.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. Has been done. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

In the panel plate 1110, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is the left side and the left side excluding the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each protruding forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It includes two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can reduce the visibility. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Rear cell]
The rear cell 1130 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is an explanatory view showing the positions of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece from the front of the game board. FIG. 147 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece disassembled from the front component and the game panel and viewed from the front, and FIG. 147 (b) shows the rear cell and the cell fixed from the front component and the game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled one piece and looked at from the back. FIG. 148 (a) is a four-view view of the cell fixing piece, FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (c) is a perspective view of the cell fixing piece viewed from the back. The rear cell 1130 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and is for decorating the inside of the game area 5a.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100, and has a film-shaped rear cell 1130 and a rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern. Is provided with a cell fixing piece 1140 that movably supports (attaches) the panel plate 1110 within a predetermined range.

As shown by shading in FIG. 146, the rear cell 1130 is provided in the game area 5a (inside the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 in the front view) behind the area in which the game ball B circulates. .. Specifically, the rear cell 1130 is an area between the inner rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500, from the middle of the upper right guide passage group 2541 in the center accessory 2500 in the vertical direction to the vertical direction of the lower right guide passage group 2542. It is provided behind three areas, an area up to the middle and an area from the left to the bottom of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500.

The rear cell 1130 has a portion of the panel plate 1110 that projects into the opening 1112. Specifically, the rear cell 1130 provided near the gate 2002 has a portion protruding into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the front view, and the portion projects at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. The guide passage group 2542 is decorated from the rear.

The rear cell 1130 is provided with a plurality of support holes 1131 having a shape such that a round hole having a diameter larger than the width of the long hole is provided in the center of the long hole having both ends in the longitudinal direction having a semicircular arc shape. The rear cell 1130 is supported by the panel plate 1110 by attaching the cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel plate 1110 through the support hole 1131 from the rear. Further, the rear cell 1130 is provided with an opening 1132 through which a sensor, a game ball B, or the like can pass, at a predetermined position.

The support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 is provided at a position that is difficult to see from the front when assembled on the game board 5. Specifically, it is provided in a portion behind the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500. As a result, even if the panel plate 1110 and the center accessory 2500 are transparent, the rear part is difficult to see due to the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and the like, so that the support hole 1131 and the cell fixing piece 1140 can be made difficult to see. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 148, the cell fixing piece 1140 penetrates the rectangular and flat plate-shaped main body piece 1141, the protrusion 1142 that protrudes shortly in a columnar shape at the center of the main body piece 1141, and the protrusion 1142 and the main body piece 1141. It has a mounting hole 1143 that is formed, and a pair of positioning pins 1144 that project in a columnar shape from both sides of the main body piece 1141 with a protrusion 1142 in between. The cell fixing piece 1140 is transparently formed so as to be inconspicuous when assembled on the game board 5.

The main body piece 1141 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is formed in a size that substantially covers the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130. The protrusion 1142 is half the diameter of the central round hole in the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 and protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130.

The mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided coaxially with the protrusion 1142, and a countersunk counterbore is provided on the side opposite to the protrusion 1142. The mounting hole 1143 is for mounting the cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel plate 1110, and the countersunk head mounting screw is inserted through the mounting hole 1143. The positioning pin 1144 protrudes from the main body piece 1141 in the same direction as the protrusion 1142 and longer than the protrusion 1142. The positioning pin 1144 can be inserted into the positioning hole 1110b provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 to position the cell fixing piece 1140 at a predetermined position.

The rear cell 1130 is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and a pair of positioning pins 1144 of the cell fixing piece 1140 pass through the support hole 1131 from the rear, and correspond to the panel plate 1110. It is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b. As a result, the cell fixing piece 1140 is positioned at a predetermined position of the panel plate 1110, and the mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is positioned coaxially with the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the cell fixing piece 1140 can be attached to the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 1143 from the rear of the cell fixing piece 1140 and tightening. ..

The rear cell 1130 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and a predetermined pattern is printed on the rear cell 1130. The material of the rear cell 1130 includes "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", and "polyethylene resin". , "Polystyrene resin", "Impact resistant polystyrene resin", "Polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

In a state where the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a gap larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130 is formed between the main body piece 1141 and the panel plate 1110 by the protrusion 1142. Further, a gap is also formed between the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 and the protrusion 1142 and the pair of positioning pins 1144 (see FIGS. 147 and 148). Therefore, the rear cell 1130 is movably supported behind the panel plate 1110 within a predetermined range. That is, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with a predetermined amount of rattling. As a result, it is possible to simplify the time and effort required to attach the rear cell 1130 and reduce the amount of the rear cell 1130 used as compared with the case where the panel plate 1110 is attached to the entire surface. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is provided as a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of rear cells 1130 that can be taken from the resin sheet can be increased as compared with the conventional cell attached to the panel plate. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with rattling via the cell fixing piece 1140, even if the rear cell 1130 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., it is still attached to the panel plate 1110. The difference in expansion and contraction can be absorbed by rattling. As a result, even if the rear cell 1130 contracts with respect to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to prevent the rear cell 1130 from wrinkling or cracking, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the rear cell 1130 is maintained. be able to.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by the mounting screw via the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110, so that the rear cell 1130 has a different pattern. By replacing it, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications, models, or designs of the pachinko machine 1, suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and have a more decorative effect. By exchanging with the rear cell 1130 having a high pattern, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110, the distance from the player to the rear cell 1130 is longer than in the case where the rear cell 1130 is provided on the front side of the panel plate 1110. , The feeling of oppression on the player can be reduced.

Further, it is desirable that the rear cell 1130 has translucency, and the pattern of the rear cell 1130 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110 (rear cell 1130). It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and the light emitting decoration of the rear cell 1130 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by using the attachment screw via the cell fixing piece 1140, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the rear cell 1130 is used. May be sandwiched between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

[5-4. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are all received. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140, 142, 143 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 203) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not they have been tampered with or the illicit IC is mounted). Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first lower starting port sensor 2101, a first upper starting port sensor 2524, a gate sensor 2501, a second starting port sensor 2601, and a first large prize. Mouth sensor 3002, 2nd big winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, starting opening solenoid 2632, 1st attacker solenoid 2642, 2nd attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, center distribution drive It is connected to a motor 2525, a magnetic sensor 1030, a vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

[5-6. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a lottery result of a normal symbol, a lottery result of a special symbol, and the like. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is composed of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004. A symbol display, a first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and a second start port. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2005, and a hold related to the acceptance of the game ball B in the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with a second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that display (number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 203).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, although the details will be described later. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 projects rearward from the binding band CT tightened to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. ..

[5-8. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 142 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Although the details will be described later, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and is installed in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. In the effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are formed from diagonally behind the back box 3010. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601, move the lower fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the lower fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and slide the lock slider 3020 to the left in the rear view. By letting it, it is attached to the back box 3010.

Further, the effect display device 1600 has a plurality of wiring locking portions 1603 provided on the rear surface. The wiring locking portion 1603 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the member (unit base) forming the rear surface of the effect display device 1600, and then extends in the left-right direction along the rear surface, and is formed in an L-shape. ing. The wiring locking portion 1603 has a claw-shaped hook portion 1603a projecting toward the rear surface side of the unit base at its tip, and a ridge portion 1603b projecting shortly forward from each of the two sides in the longitudinal direction. (See Figure 172). The tip of the wiring locking portion 1603 is formed obliquely so that the surface (front surface) facing the rear surface side of the unit base is positioned rearward toward the tip including the hook portion 1603a. This makes it easy to insert the wiring EC from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 1603 between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base. Further, the wiring locking portion 1603 has a U-shaped cross section due to the two ridge portions 1603b, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. In the present embodiment, the member (rear case) provided with the wiring locking portion 1603 in the effect display device 1600 is transparently formed. Therefore, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the like are also transparent.

The plurality of wiring locking portions 1603 in the effect display device 1600 are provided on both the left and right sides of the portion where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and on the left side (right side when viewed from the rear), two are separated vertically and on the right side (right side). There is one on each side (on the left side when viewed from the back). Each wiring locking portion 1603 is provided so as to extend outward in the left-right direction.

Further, the effect display device 1600 has a penetrating portion 1604 penetrating back and forth at a portion of the unit base where the wiring locking portion 1603 is provided (see FIG. 172). When the wiring EC is locked between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base by the penetrating portion 1604, the wiring EC bends in the penetrating portion 1604 and is applied to the wiring EC from the wiring locking portion 1603. The pressure can be released.

[5-9. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. A gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B, a first lower starting port 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received, and a center accessory 2500. The first upper start port 2004, which enters the upper warp passage 2513 and receives the game ball B distributed by the center distribution unit 2520, and a lottery of ordinary symbols drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. The first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result, and the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004. (2) The first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007, which enable the acceptance of the game ball B according to the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting opening 2005, and the second major winning The game ball B received in the opening 2007 is provided with a V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 in which the game ball B is distributed and accepted by the V distribution unit 2660.

Further, the table unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B driven into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. Further, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2501 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a first lower start port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003, and the first lower start port sensor 2101. The first upper start port sensor 2524 that detects the game ball B received in the first upper start port 2004, the second start port sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2005, and the second The second large winning opening sensor 2602 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2007, the V winning opening sensor 2603 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008, and the loss opening 2009 are accepted. It is provided with a loss opening sensor 2604 that detects the game ball B, and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects an illegal magnetism acting in the game area 5a.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged in the game area 5a near the right end of the front view and above the center in the vertical direction. The first lower start port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The first upper starting port 2004 is arranged in the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 at the upper right of the first lower starting port 2003. The second starting port 2005 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first big winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the first lower starting opening 2003 and below the first upper starting opening 2004 in the game area 5a. The second prize opening 2007 is located at the upper right of the first prize opening 2006 and below the second start opening 2005. The V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 are arranged below the second major winning opening 2007. The V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 are lined up on the left and right.

The out port 2020 is composed of two out ports 2020a and a right out port 2020b, and is arranged below the left and right sides of the first lower start port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. The sub-out port 2021 is composed of two left sub-out ports 2021a and a right sub-out port 2021b. The left sub-out port 2021a is arranged to the left of the three general winning openings 2001 on the left side, and the right sub-out port 2021. 2021b is arranged at the lower right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a first lower start port 2003 and an out port 2020, and a start port unit. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and has three general winning openings 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a, and the side unit 2200 slightly above the left side of the front view. It is equipped with a side upper left unit 2300 provided in.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is provided at the gate 2002, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first winning opening 2006, and the second. It further includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, a losing opening 2009, and a right sub-out opening 2021b.

[5-9a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139, 141 and the like. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first lower start port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted, and a game that is always open so that the game ball B can be received. It has an out port 2020 for discharging the ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning the ball B. Further, the start port unit 2100 has a first lower start port sensor 2101 that detects a game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 (see FIG. 203).

The out port 2020 is provided at a position lower than the first lower start port 2003. The out port 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 includes a left out port 2020a provided on the left side of the first lower starting port 2003 and a right out port 2020b provided on the right side of the first lower starting port 2003. have. The left out port 2020a and the right out port 2020b are provided at symmetrical positions with the first lower starting port 2003 in between. The first lower starting port 2003 opens upward with a width that allows one game ball B to pass through. The left out port 2020a and the right out port 2020b are each opened upward with a width equivalent to two game balls B, and are provided at the lowest positions in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided so that the height difference between the first lower starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting port and the out port in the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, the player can be made to think that the first lower start port 2003 is provided below the conventional first start port, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear relatively wide. it can.

The start port unit 2100 has a start port display unit 2110 that is provided below the first lower start port 2003 and can display a predetermined pattern. The start port display unit 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. The start port display unit 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. The start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, and the out port 1008 is closed from the front by the start port display unit 2110, making the out port 1008 invisible from the player side. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the out port 2020 is the lowermost end of the game area 5a.

In the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the first lower start port 2003 is located directly under the central discharge portion 2514a in the stage 2514 of the center accessory 2500, and is discharged from the central discharge portion 2514a. The game ball B can be accepted with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 is detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101 and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is handed over and discharged downward.

The game ball B received in the out port 2020 (left out port 2020a and right out port 2020b) is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then back. It is discharged downward from the ball guidance unit 3100.

[5-9b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139, 141 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B, and one sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a) that is always open to accept the game ball B. It has.

The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general winning opening 2001 is opened with the size (width) of one game ball B. A sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a) is provided on the left side of the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The left sub-out port 2021a is opened with the size (width) of one game ball B.

Further, the side unit 2200 has a shelf portion 2201 that is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side than the general winning opening 2001 on the far right side. The shelf portion 2201 extends to the right to the vicinity of the right end of the left out port 2020a in the starting port unit 2100. That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf portion 2201, it is received by the left out port 2020a.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

Further, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the left sub-out port 2021a to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged downward.

[5-9c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139, 141 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-9d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139, 141 to 145, and 149 to 171. FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective view of the crune in the center distribution unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, (b) is a plan view of the crune of (a), and (c) is a perspective view of the crune in (b). -It is a cross-sectional view cut along the line. FIG. 150 (a) is an explanatory view showing a part of the center distribution unit in the center accessory of the game board partially in a perspective view, and FIG. 150 (b) shows the part of the center distribution unit in the center accessory of the game board. It is explanatory drawing partially shown in the plan view. FIG. 151 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a crune of an embodiment different from that of FIG. 149, FIG. 151 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a crune of a further different embodiment, and FIG. 151 (c) is a distribution of a further different embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the unit.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape.

Although the details of the center accessory 2500 will be described later, one general winning opening 2001 that is always open so that the game ball B can be accepted, a gate 2002 through which the game ball B can pass, and the game ball B can be accepted. The first upper start port 2004 that is always open, the second start port 2005 that opens and closes the game ball B so as to be acceptable according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first Lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005. Only the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 that open and close the game ball B so as to be accepted according to the result, and the V winning opening that only the game ball B accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 can be accepted. It is equipped with 2008.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 can accept the game ball B in the game area 5a and the loss opening 2009 in which the game ball B that was not accepted in the V winning opening 2008 after being accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 is accepted. It is provided with a right sub-out port 2021b (sub-out port 2021) that is always open and discharges to the outside of the game area 5a without giving a predetermined privilege by accepting the game ball B.

The center accessory 2500 includes a main body unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and an attacker unit 2600 attached to the lower right outside of the main body unit 2510. The main body unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper start port 2004. The attacker unit 2600 has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, a loss opening 2009, and a right sub-out opening 2021b. There is.

Further, the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of binding pedestals 2550 attached to the main body unit 2510 and the attacker unit 2600. The binding pedestal 2550 will be described in detail later, but the binding pedestal 2550 has an annular band holding portion 2552, and a plurality of wiring ECs are bundled by a binding band CT passing through the band holding portion 2552. The wiring EC can be supported (held) by the center accessory 2500 in a bundled state.

[5-9d-1. Main unit]
The main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main body unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper start port 2004. The main body unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a lower warp passage 2512 capable of guiding the game ball B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame, respectively. The upper warp passage 2513, the stage 2514 provided at the lower side in the frame of the center base 2511, and the stage 2514 that rolls the game ball B that has passed through the lower warp passage 2512 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The game ball B provided above the stage 2514 in the frame of the center base 2511 and circulated through the upper warp passage 2513 is shaken to either the first upper start port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 (not shown). It is equipped with a center distribution unit 2520 for dividing.

The center base 2511 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and contacting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a peripheral wall portion. It has a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511c protruding from the inner circumference of the 2511a. The peripheral wall portion 2511a, in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Further, in the state where the peripheral wall portion 2511a is assembled on the game board 5, the front end excluding the frame-shaped (annular) lower side portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. That is, in the center base 2511, the flange portion 2511b extends outward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the lower side portion of the frame shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from invading the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 by the peripheral wall portion 2511a in the state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c project from the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2511c (flange portion 2511b) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2511c are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. Further, the support portion 2511c is also provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2511a. Further, the support portion 2511c has an end portion protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2511a or in a straight line so that the support portion 2511c is inconspicuous. The support portion 2511c has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2511a within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2511c to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

The lower warp passage 2512 opens so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface (flange portion 2511b) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). ing. The lower warp passage 2512 can guide the entered game ball B to the stage 2514.

The upper warp passage 2513 is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a on the front side of the flange portion 2511b and above the lower warp passage 2512. The upper warp passage 2513 can guide the approaching game ball B to the center distribution unit 2520.

The stage 2514 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first lower start port 2003 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In the state, the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so as to be slightly higher than both the left and right sides. In this stage 2514, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2514a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2514b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

The stage 2514 is assembled on the game board 5, and the raised portion (central discharge portion 2514a) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first lower start port 2003 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2514a at the center of the stage 2514, it is received by the first lower start port 2003 with an extremely high probability.

The center distribution unit 2520 has a dish-shaped crune 2530 that swivels the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, and a second that guides the game ball B released from the crune 2530 to the right. At the right side of the first taxiway 2521, the distribution ball discharge port 2526 recessed downward on the right side of the first taxiway 2521, and the distribution ball discharge port 2526, the game ball B is guided to the right and the right end (downstream). The second taxiway 2522, which has the first upper start port 2004 open at the end), and the first taxiway 2521, which is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward in the front-rear direction above the distribution ball discharge port 2526. It has a flat plate-shaped center distribution piece 2523 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second taxiway 2522.

The center distribution unit 2520 can distribute the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 to either the first upper start port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the main body unit 2510 is provided on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a, and is an upper right guide passage composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. It has a group 2541 and a lower right guide passage group 2542 which is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541 and is composed of a plurality of passages (here, two) through which the game ball B can circulate. Between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, there is a portion where the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is exposed, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are located in the portion. ) Is planted.

The upper right guide passage group 2541 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and is located on the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the right side of the upper right first guide passage 2541a away from the peripheral wall portion 2511a. It is composed of the upper right second guide passage 2541b provided. The left side wall of the upper right second guide passage 2541b is formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The entrance of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the entrance of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are adjacent to each other on the left and right at the same height. The upper right first guide passage 2541a and the upper right second guide passage 2541b extend downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. In the upper right guide passage group 2541, the upper right second guide passage 2541b is formed longer than the upper right first guide passage 2541a.

The lower right guide passage group 2542 is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541, and is provided on the left side of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right first guide passage 2542a, which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2511a. It is composed of the lower right second guide passage 2542b. The left lower wall of the lower right second guide passage 2542b is formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the entrance of the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right.

The entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B, and the gate 2002 is provided so as to be in contact with the left wall. That is, the lower right first guide passage 2542a has two entrances, an entrance passing through the left gate 2002 and an entrance not passing through the right gate 2002, and one entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a. The gate 2002 is provided directly below between the exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b. The width of the lower right first guide passage 2542a in the left-right direction is narrowed below the gate 2002, and the width is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B and extends downward.

The entrance of the lower right second guide passage 2542b is provided adjacent to the left side of the gate 2002, and is formed in a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. The lower right second guide passage 2542b extends downward with a substantially constant width. The exit of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the exit of the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right at the same height.

With the center accessory 2500 assembled on the game board 5, the upper right guide passage group 2541 extends downward from the vicinity of the upper end of the game area 5a to a height of about 4/5 of the total height of the game area 5a. ing. The lower right guide passage group 2542 extends downward from a position slightly higher than 2/3 of the total height of the game area 5a to a position slightly lower than 1/2 of the total height of the game area 5a. The upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542 are formed so that the right end side is along the right rail 1005.

In the upper right first guide passage 2541a of the upper right guide passage group 2541, the right end of the entrance is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and the game ball B in contact with the abutting portion 1006. Most of them are formed so as to enter the first guide passage 2541a on the upper right. The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right first guide passage 2541a is more likely to enter the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 than the game ball B that has circulated through the upper right second guide passage 2541b.

The exit of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is offset to the left of the right rail 1005. The game ball B circulating through the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is likely to flow down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 of the attacker unit 2600. Further, the game ball B circulating through the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is discharged to the central mouth 2605 and the right mouth 2606 provided on the right side of the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 of the attacker unit 2600. There is a high possibility that

The main body unit 2510 has one binding pedestal 2550 attached to the rear side of the center base 2511, which will be described in detail later (see FIGS. 166 to 170 and the like). The binding pedestal 2550 has an annular band holding portion 2552, and by bundling a plurality of wiring ECs by a binding band CT passing through the band holding portion 2552, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the center base 2511 in a state where the plurality of wiring ECs are bundled. Can be supported.

[5-9d-1a. Center distribution unit]
The center distribution unit 2520 in the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in more detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The center distribution unit 2520 has a dish-shaped crune 2530 that swivels the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, and a second that guides the game ball B released from the crune 2530 to the right. At the right side of the first taxiway 2521, the distribution ball discharge port 2526 recessed downward on the right side of the first taxiway 2521, and the distribution ball discharge port 2526, the game ball B is guided to the right and the right end (downstream). The second taxiway 2522, which has the first upper start port 2004 open at the end), and the second taxiway 2522, which is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward in the front-rear direction above the distribution ball discharge port 2526, can be moved forward from the first taxiway 2521. It has a flat plate-shaped center distribution piece 2523 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second taxiway 2522.

The distribution ball discharge port 2526 and the center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520 are located directly above the stage 2514 (approximately the center in the left-right direction), and have a left-right length of 60 mm to 70 mm (here, 65 mm). ) Is formed. The center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520 advances and retreats in a predetermined pattern by the center distribution drive motor 2525 (see FIG. 203). The center distribution piece 2523 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the center distribution piece 2523 moves forward, the front end of the center distribution piece 2523 makes it difficult to bite the game ball B, and even if it is bitten, the friction is reduced, so that the bite is as small as possible. are doing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the center distribution unit 2520 is guided to the right by the distribution ball sensor 2527 that detects the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 and the center distribution piece 2523. The first upper start port sensor 2524 for detecting the game ball B received in the first upper start port 2004 through the second taxiway 2522 and the center distribution piece 2523 guide the player to the second taxiway 2522. It has a distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 for detecting the game ball B received in the distribution ball discharge port 2526 without being able to perform the function. The distribution sphere sensor 2527 and the distribution sphere discharge sensor 2528 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203).

The center distribution unit 2520 guides the game ball B, which is distributed through the upper warp passage 2513 and is detected by the distribution ball sensor 2527 and released from the crune 2530, with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). The game ball B that can be distributed to the road 2522 side and distributed to the second taxiway 2522 is received by the first upper start port 2004. The game ball B received in the first upper starting port 2004 is detected by the first upper starting port sensor 2524 (see FIGS. 150 (b) and 203), and then the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the ball and is discharged downward via the back ball guidance unit 3100. As a result, is the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 from within the game area 5a distributed to the second taxiway 2522 (first upper start port 2004) side by the center distribution piece 2523 that advances and retreats at a constant rhythm? Depending on whether or not it is possible, the player can be thrilled. At this time, in the crune 2530 provided upstream of the center distribution piece 2523, the game ball B turns to some extent and then is discharged to the first taxiway 2521, so that it can be seen that the game balls move forward and backward. Depending on whether or not the game ball B is released from the crune 2530 at the timing when the center distribution piece 2523 can project forward and guide (sort) the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004. The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained in multiple stages.

On the other hand, in the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B that has fallen to the distribution ball discharge port 2526 is detected by the distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 and then handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged downward via the back ball guidance unit 3100.

The crune 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 is transparently formed. This crune 2530 has a dish-shaped rolling surface portion 2531 that is supplied with the game ball B that has passed through the upper warp passage 2513 and is recessed so that the center is lowered, and only one game ball B at the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. It has a passage port 2532 that penetrates with a size that allows it to pass through, and a peripheral wall portion 2533 that extends upward from the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531.

The rolling surface portion 2531 of the crune 2530 has a central surface portion 2531a extending so as to extend outward from the center and a central surface portion 2531a extending outward from the outer peripheral edge of the central surface portion 2531a. , A peripheral surface portion 2531b having a larger angle from the horizontal than the central surface portion 2531a. In the present embodiment, the central surface portion 2531a of the rolling surface portion 2531 is inclined at an angle of 4 degrees with respect to the horizontal. On the other hand, the peripheral surface portion 2531b is inclined at an angle of 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The rolling surface portion 2531 is located between the game ball B and the peripheral wall portion 2533 when the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b is in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b. It is formed so as to have a fixed amount of gap (see FIG. 149 (c)). In other words, the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b is provided so as to be located at a distance longer than the radius of the game ball B from the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 toward the center. The distance (horizontal distance) from the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 shall be within the range of 3/5 to 5/5 of the diameter of the game ball B. Is desirable.

As shown in FIG. 149, the passage port 2532 of the Kroon 2530 has an inner peripheral shape of a square, that is, a non-circular shape. The passage port 2532 penetrates into an inscribed circle square slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. The passage port 2532 is provided so that its diagonal line extends in the front-rear direction. Further, the passage port 2532 is formed so as to become smaller toward the lower side, so that the game ball B can be easily discharged directly below.

The peripheral wall portion 2533 extends upward above the diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 is prevented from jumping out from the rolling surface portion 2531.

In the crune 2530 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulating through the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied from the left to the right near the outer peripheral edge of the rear portion of the rolling surface portion 2531. Due to its momentum, the game ball B supplied to the croon 2530 turns clockwise on the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 while contacting the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533, and its rolling speed. As the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B decreases, the turning radius gradually decreases so as to go down the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and the peripheral wall portion 2533 moves away from the inner peripheral surface toward the center. It will be.

Then, when the turning game ball B reaches the central surface portion 2531a from the peripheral surface portion 2531b, the inclination angle of the central surface portion 2531a is sufficiently looser (smaller) than the inclination angle of the peripheral surface portion 2531b, so that the game ball B rolls. Due to the centrifugal force acting by the velocity, the game ball B turns for a while in a state of being in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b. After that, when the rolling speed of the game ball B further decreases, the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B further decreases, so that the turning radius gradually decreases so as to go down the central surface portion 2531a, and the center. It will enter the passage port 2532 provided in the center of the surface portion 2531a and fall into the lower first taxiway 2521.

More specifically, the game ball B supplied to the Kroon 2530 does not turn many times in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 because the inclination angle of the peripheral surface portion 2531b is large and steep. Most of them turn in a state of being in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b without being in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533. At this time, since the crune 2530 (peripheral wall portion 2533) is made transparent, the game ball B can be made to appear as if it is turning while being in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533. It does not give a sense of discomfort to the person.

By the way, in the crune in the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball B turns while being in contact with the peripheral wall portion. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is hit and a force is applied in the front-rear direction, the rolling direction of the game ball B is changed through the peripheral wall portion. It is possible to change from the turning direction to the direction of the central passage port, and since the player can see that the desired timing, specifically, the center distribution piece 2523 is moving back and forth. There is a problem that a fraudulent act of invading the game ball B into the passing port is performed at the timing when the center distribution piece 2523 protrudes forward and the game ball B can be distributed to the first upper start port 2004. On the other hand, according to the Kroon 2530 of the present embodiment, the game ball B can be swiveled at a position away from the peripheral wall portion 2533 due to the inclination of the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531. At the timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen to be present, protrudes forward and can distribute the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause abnormal vibration, impact, etc. Is not transmitted to the game ball B via the peripheral wall portion 2533, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is prevented from being changed to the direction of the passage port 2532. can do.

Further, abnormal vibration, impact, etc. caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 also act on the rolling surface portion 2531, but the contact point with the rolling surface portion 2531 (peripheral surface portion 2531b) in the game ball B is a game. Since it is located sufficiently below the center of gravity of the ball B, the peripheral surface portion 2531b moves relative to the lower side of the game ball B due to the force acting due to the abnormal vibration or impact, and the peripheral surface portion The rolling direction of the game ball B is not changed even through the 2531b.

For this reason, abnormal vibrations, impacts, and the like that hit or shake the pachinko machine 1 act on the gaming ball B that is rolling on the rolling surface portion 2531 via the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and the rolling direction thereof. Since it is possible to avoid being changed, the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen to move forward and backward, protrudes forward and distributes the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken at a possible timing to cause an abnormal vibration or impact, the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed toward the passage port 2532 due to the abnormal vibration or impact. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that are illegally intruded into the passage port 2532, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the crune 2530 of the present embodiment has the following excellent features because the inner peripheral shape of the passage port 2532 provided at the center of the rolling surface portion 2531 is a non-circular square. It can exert an action effect. More specifically, if the inner circumference of the passage port in the crune is circular as in a conventional pachinko machine, the game ball B will pass through depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B with respect to the passing port. It may swirl around the edge of the car more than necessary. Then, while the game ball B is turning around at the edge of the passage port, the pachinko machine is hit or shaken to apply abnormal vibration or impact, thereby delaying the entry of the game ball B into the passage port. It becomes possible to accelerate or accelerate. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is hit at the timing when the game ball B is guided to the second taxiway 2522 (first upper start port 2004) by the center distribution piece 2523 which can be seen to move forward and backward. By applying abnormal vibration, impact, or the like by shaking or shaking, there is a risk that the game ball B will invade the passage port and a fraudulent act will be achieved. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed from the island equipment. Therefore, from the player side in front of the pachinko machine 1. , It is easy to apply a force to the pachinko machine 1 in the rearward direction (front-back direction) rather than in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Therefore, illegal abnormal vibrations and shocks that hit or shake the game machine mainly act in the front-rear direction.

In response to the above problems, in the present embodiment, the passage port 2532 of the crune 2530 has an inner peripheral shape of a non-circular square, and the diagonal extending direction faces the front-rear direction. Since it is provided, the game ball B that is turning while gradually reducing the turning radius on the rolling surface portion 2531 first comes into contact with any of the four corners of the passage port 2532, and the corner is reached. The rolling speed of the game ball B can be greatly attenuated by the contact, and the game ball B can be quickly entered into the passage port 2532. Further, since the inner circumference of the passage port 2532 is square, even if the game ball B rolls along one side of the passage port 2532, the extension direction is 90 degrees different from the next side at the end of the side. Since they come into contact with each other, a reaction force acts on the game ball B in the direction opposite to the rolling direction, and the game ball B does not turn around at the edge of the passage port 2532. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is moved at a timing when the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen to move forward and backward, protrudes forward and can distribute the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004. Even if an attempt is made to illegally invade the passage port 2532 by hitting or shaking it to cause abnormal vibration or impact, when the game ball B comes into contact with the passage port 2532, it immediately enters the passage port 2532, which is illegal. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of performing an act, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, since the diagonal line of the passing port 2532 is directed in the front-rear direction, each side constituting the peripheral edge of the passing port 2532 is extended in a direction (oblique direction) intersecting with the left-right direction. Therefore, compared to the case where the edge (side) of the passage port extends in the left-right direction, the game ball B and the passage port 2532 due to abnormal vibration or impact in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken. The relative movement distance between the edges (sides) can be shortened, and the effects of abnormal vibration, impact, and the like can be reduced. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to enter the passage port 2532, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause an abnormal vibration, impact, or the like, so that the timing at which the game ball B enters the passage port 2532 can be determined. Even if an attempt is made to make adjustments by delaying or accelerating, the influence of the abnormal vibration or impact on the game ball B can be reduced, and the achievement of fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Further, since the diagonal extension direction of the square passage port 2532 is directed in the front-rear direction in the crune 2530, the shape of the passage port 2532 can be better understood when viewed from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It can be easily shown. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the Kroon 2530 (rolling surface portion 2531) having a passage port 2532 having a non-circular shape (here, it looks like a rhombus), which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the game machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 is shown to be inclined linearly in the cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the radius is larger than the radius of the game ball B. It may be inclined in the shape of an arc, or it may be inclined in the shape of a polygonal line. Also by this, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rolling surface portion 2531 is provided with the peripheral surface portion 2531b having an inclination angle different from that of the central surface portion 2531a so that the game ball B can roll in a state where it is difficult to contact the peripheral wall portion 2533. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a ridge portion that protrudes from the rolling surface portion 2531 at a height at which the game ball B can get over may be provided, or the outer peripheral side of the rolling surface portion 2531 may be provided. A step portion formed in a stepped shape may be provided so as to be high, or a groove portion recessed in the rolling surface portion 2531 so as to be high on the outer peripheral side may be provided. Also by this, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the non-circular passage port 2532 of the crune 2530 is shown to have a square inner circumference, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 151 (a), it is not limited to this. The inner peripheral shape of the passage port 2532 may be a star shape. In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as above, this book has a star-shaped crune 2530 with a passage port 2532, which has never been seen in conventional pachinko machines, for players. The pachinko machine 1 can be shown, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game ball B circulating in the Kroon 2530 can be raised, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. be able to. The inner circumference of the passage port 2532 includes "triangle", "square", "pentagon", "hexagon", "polygon", "oval", "diamond", and "heart". , "Clover shape", "Spade shape", "Indefinite shape", etc. may be a non-circular shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, only one passage port 2532 is provided on the rolling surface portion 2531 of the crune 2530, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 151 (b), rolling A plurality of (four in this case) passage ports 2532 may be provided on the moving surface portion 2531. When a plurality of passage ports 2532 are provided, the player may be given different benefits depending on the passage ports 2532 into which the game ball B enters. In the embodiment of FIG. 151 (b), the inner peripheral shapes of the four passage ports 2532 are different from each other, such as a diamond shape, a heart shape, a clover shape, and a spade shape. Also, in addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above, the player can be thrilled and thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the passage port 2532 having a desired shape. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish-shaped crune 2530 in the center distribution unit 2520 provided with the non-circular passage port 2532 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 151 (c) shows. A non-circular winning opening and a losing opening may be provided on the flat rolling surface portion of the distribution unit 2800 as shown. More specifically, the distribution unit 2800 has a flat plate-shaped rolling surface portion 2803 which is inclined so as to be lowered forward and has loss openings 2802 on both the left and right sides of one winning opening 2801 near the front end. The guide surface portion 2804 that guides the game ball B released forward from the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803 to the outside in either the left-right direction, and the rear ends are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the guide surface portion 2804 and the rolling surface portion 2803. A side surface portion 2805 that coincides with the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803 and is inclined so that the front end is located below the downstream end of the guiding surface portion 2804, and a side surface portion 2805 provided near the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803. It has a central rotating body 2806 and a lateral rotating body 2807 provided near the front end of the side surface portion 2805, respectively.

Further, the distribution unit 2800 is a peripheral edge of a region composed of a weir portion 2808 protruding upward from both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803, a rolling surface portion 2803, an induction surface portion 2804, and two side surface portions 2805. It has a peripheral wall portion 2809 that extends upward above the diameter of the game ball B. The weir portion 2808 suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2809 prevents the game ball B from falling off from the distribution unit 2800.

The peripheral wall portion 2809 has an outer shape in a plan view, which is semicircular on the rear end side and has a length in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the diameter of the semicircle. The length of the peripheral wall portion 2809 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the central rotating body 2806. In other words, the diameter of the central rotating body 2806 is 0.4 times the length of the peripheral wall portion 2809 in the front-rear direction. Further, the diameter of the central rotating body 2806 is about 4 times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the peripheral wall portion 2809 in the front-rear direction is about 10.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. .. The length (width) of the rolling surface portion 2803 in the left-right direction is about 5 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the length (depth) in the front-rear direction is 5 to 7 times the diameter of the game ball B. Is.

The rolling surface portion 2803 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the central rotating body 2806 and the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end side of the rolling surface portion 2803 extends to a portion ahead of the center of the central rotating body 2806, and both the left and right sides are bent obliquely toward the central rotating body 2806. The rolling surface portion 2803 is only inclined in the front-rear direction and is horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803, loss openings 2802 are opened on both the left and right sides with a winning opening 2801 in the center in the left-right direction in between. The winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are square holes having the same size and a square inner circumference, and the diagonal lines extend in the front-rear direction.

The central rotating body 2806 is provided with a plurality of disc-shaped protrusions protruding upward. The central rotating body 2806 is constantly rotating at a constant speed in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view.

The lateral rotating body 2807 is constantly rotating at a speed faster than that of the central rotating body 2806. In the lateral rotating body 2807, one projecting piece protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction, and the game ball B can be driven into the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805 by the projecting piece. The lateral rotating body 2807 on the left side is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, and the horizontal rotating body 2807 on the right side is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view.

In the distribution unit 2800 of the present embodiment, the central rotating body 2806 rotates at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the lateral rotating body 2807 rotates at a speed of 625 rpm, which is much higher than that of the central rotating body 2806. As described above, since the rotation speed of the laterally rotating body 2807 is high, even if the laterally rotating body 2807 is provided with a detection piece to detect the presence or absence of rotation, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. is there. More specifically, the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece. Therefore, for example, if the detection piece, the rotation cycle, and the sensor detection cycle are the same, the detection is performed. Since it may not be possible to detect a piece at all, it is necessary to make the detection cycle of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation cycle of the detection piece. When the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation cycle is further shortened, the detection cycle of the sensor also needs to be shortened. However, when the detection cycle of the sensor is shortened, signals are frequently exchanged between the sensor and the control unit. This increases the load on the control unit and increases the risk of runaway and malfunction due to overload.

On the other hand, the present embodiment has a detection reduction gear (not shown) in which the rotation of the lateral rotating body 2807 from the rotation shaft is decelerated (for example, decelerated to 250 rpm) and transmitted. A detection piece is provided in the reduction gear for detection, and rotation is detected by a sensor. As a result, the rotation speed of the detection piece for detecting the rotation of the laterally rotating body 2807 becomes slower, so that the rotation can be reliably detected by the sensor, and the presence or absence of the rotation of the laterally rotating body 2807 can be determined. .. Further, since the rotation speed of the detection piece is slowed down, it is not necessary to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle in the sensor, the detection cycle can be set to an appropriate level, and the increase in the load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the distribution unit 2800, for example, the game ball B received in the predetermined variable winning opening is supplied to the vicinity of the right end of the guide surface portion 2804. The game ball B supplied near the right end of the guide surface portion 2804 is rolled to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface portion 2805 and then repelled by the lateral rotating body 2807 rotating near the front end of the side surface portion 2805. .. Then, the game ball B bounced backward enters the rolling surface portion 2803 from the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805 through the central rotating body 2806, and rolls forward due to the inclination of the rolling surface portion 2803. .. Then, it is accepted by either the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 provided near the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803, or enters the guiding surface portion 2804 through the side thereof. The game ball B that has entered the guide surface portion 2804 from the rolling surface portion 2803 will roll to any of the side surface portions 2805 on both the left and right sides according to the entered portion. The game ball B that has rolled from the guide surface portion 2804 to the left side surface portion 2805 is repelled by the rotating lateral rotating body 2807 in the same manner as the movement on the side surface portion 2805 on the right, and after the side surface portion 2805. It will enter the rolling surface portion 2803 from the end side through the central rotating body 2806.

As described above, in the distribution unit 2800, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2803 rolls the rolling surface portion 2803 from either the left or right side surface portion 2805 through the central rotating body 2806. After the movement, the guide surface portion 2804 repeatedly sends the game ball B to either the left or right side surface portion 2805 until the game ball B is accepted by either the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802.

By the way, when the inner shape of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 provided on the rolling surface portion 2803 is circular, depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B with respect to the passing opening or the like. The game ball B may be kicked by the passing port (lip-out in golf terminology) and roll in a direction away from the passing port. Then, if the game ball B kicked by the passing opening (winning opening 2801) enters another passing opening (loss opening 2802) and the game ball B is thought to have entered the winning opening 2801, the winning opening 2801 There is a risk that he will be kicked by the player and enter the next loss mouth 2802, disappointing the player and degrading his interest. Further, due to such a phenomenon, the probability of receiving the game ball B to the winning opening 2801 (winning probability) in the rolling surface portion 2803 (distribution unit 2800) becomes large, and the receiving probability to the winning opening 2801 becomes unstable. This may give the player a sense of distrust, or make it difficult to provide a pachinko machine with the same performance.

In the present embodiment, since the inner peripheral shape of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is a non-circular square, when the game ball B comes into contact with the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the game ball B is promptly made. The game ball B will not be accepted by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 and will not be accepted by another losing opening 2802 or the winning opening 2801. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being kicked and accepted by the adjacent winning openings 2801 and the loss opening 2802. Therefore, the game ball B unnecessarily enters the loss opening 2802 and the player It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the acceptance of the game ball B into the winning opening 2801 unscheduled and reduce the variation in the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the winning opening 2801, which gives the player a sense of distrust. In addition to being able to avoid this, it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance of acceptance probability to the winning opening 2801.

Further, since the inner peripheral shape of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is made into a non-circular square and the diagonal line is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction, the peripheral edges of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are provided. Since each of the constituent sides extends in a direction that intersects the left-right direction (diagonal direction), the edges (sides) of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 extend in the left-right direction. Compared to the case, the relative movement distance between the game ball B due to abnormal vibration or impact in the front-back direction such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 and the edge (side) of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 is determined. It can be shortened and the influence of abnormal vibration, impact, etc. can be reduced. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause an abnormal vibration or impact when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2801, the influence of the abnormal vibration or impact can be reduced. , It is possible to prevent the achievement of fraudulent acts of illegally winning the game ball B to the winning opening 2801.

Further, since the weir portion 2808 provided along both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803 is projected upward shorter than the radius of the game ball B, the game ball B is formed on the rolling surface portion 2803 by the weir portion 2808. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause an abnormal vibration or impact in the left-right direction while in contact with the game ball B, the contact point with the weir portion 2808 of the game ball B is sufficiently larger than the center of gravity of the game ball B. Since it is located below, the weir portion 2808 moves relative to the bottom of the game ball B due to the force acting by the abnormal vibration, impact, etc., and the weir portion 2808 passes through the weir portion 2808 and moves relative to the game ball B. The rolling direction of is not changed from the front direction to the left and right direction. Therefore, abnormal vibration, impact, or the like that hits or shakes the pachinko machine 1 acts on the game ball B that is rolling on the rolling surface portion 2803 via the weir portion 2808, and the rolling direction is changed. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball from being thrown away, the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed toward the winning opening 2801 due to the abnormal vibration or impact, and the illegal act of being illegally accepted into the winning opening 2801 is prevented. This can reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the diagonal extension direction of the squares of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is directed in the front-rear direction, the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are viewed from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. The shape of the can be seen more easily. Therefore, distribution having a rolling surface portion 2803 provided with a winning opening 2801 and a losing opening 2802 having a non-circular shape (here, it looks like a rhombus), which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. Since the unit 2800 can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine to play. Can be easily selected, and the game with the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the non-circular winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 have the same shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner peripheral shape of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is not limited to this. May have different shapes from each other, and the winning opening 2801 can be made more conspicuous.

[5-9d-2. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 152 to 164 and the like. FIG. 152 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening / closing unit, the first winning opening opening / closing unit, the second winning opening opening / closing unit, and the V distribution unit in the attacker unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective view. It is a perspective view of the 2nd start opening opening / closing unit, the 1st big winning opening opening / closing unit, the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing unit, and the V distribution unit in the attacker unit seen from the back.

FIG. 156 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front by disassembling the second starting port opening / closing unit, and FIG. 156 (b) disassembles the second starting port opening / closing unit and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 157 (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening / closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and FIG. 157 (b) is a second starting port opening / closing unit when the second starting port is open. (C) is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration of the second starting port opening / closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration of the second starting port opening / closing unit, and (d) is the opening of the second starting port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of each configuration of the 2nd start opening opening / closing unit at the time of operation.

FIG. 158 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory, which is viewed from the front by disassembling the first prize opening opening / closing unit, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the first prize opening opening / closing unit when the first prize opening is closed, and FIG. 159 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the first prize opening opening / closing unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of each configuration of the 1st prize opening opening opening and closing unit at the time of being.

FIG. 160 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory, which is viewed from the front by disassembling the second prize opening opening / closing unit, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view seen from. FIG. 161 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Is. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the V distribution unit, the V winning opening sensor, the loss opening sensor, and the lower right ball path of the center, and FIG. Is. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view showing mounting states of opening / closing units of different embodiments, and FIG. 163 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner.

The attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, a loss opening 2009, and a right sub-out opening. It has 2021b. The attacker unit 2600 has a second start port sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2005 and a second big prize opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2007. It has 2602, a V winning opening sensor 2603 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening sensor 2604 that detects the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009.

The attacker unit 2600 is attached to the center base 2511 of the main body unit 2510, and is provided on the flat plate-shaped attacker base plate 2610 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and on the front side of the attacker base plate 2610. (2) Starting port 2005, 1st big winning opening 2006, 2nd big winning opening 2007, V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009, right sub-out opening 2021b, and the flow path of the game ball B are formed, and the 2nd starting port is formed. It includes a mouth sensor 2601, a second large winning mouth sensor 2602, a V winning mouth sensor 2603, and an attacker front plate 2620 holding the front end side of the loss mouth sensor 2604.

Further, the attacker unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, respectively, and the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 that opens / closes the second starting port 2005 and the first large winning opening 2006 that opens / closes. The large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, the second large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650 that opens / closes the second large winning opening 2007, and the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 are placed in the V winning opening 2008 or the loss opening 2009. It is provided with a V distribution unit 2660 that distributes to any of them.

Further, the attacker unit 2600 is held in front of the attacker base plate 2610 on the rear side of the attacker front plate 2620, and a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the second starting port 2005 are mounted on the upper surface. The second start opening decorative board 2671, the first large winning opening decorative board 2672 on which a plurality of LEDs for light-emitting decoration of the first special winning opening 2006 are mounted on the upper surface, and the second large winning opening 2007 are light-emitting decoration The second large winning opening decoration board 2673 in which a plurality of LEDs for making the LED are mounted on the upper surface, and the V winning opening in which a plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the V winning opening 2008 and the loss opening 2009 are mounted on the upper surface. It includes a decorative substrate 2674 and.

Further, the attacker unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 and guides the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 downward to the center upper right ball path 2675 and the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610. The lower right ball path 2676 of the center that guides the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 to the rear and holds the rear end side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604. , Is equipped.

The center upper right ball path 2675 of the attacker unit 2600 is received by the second starting port 2005, detected by the second starting port sensor 2601 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and then guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 to attack the attacker. The game ball B that has passed through the first opening 2611a of the base plate 2610 enters. After being guided downward, the game ball B that has entered the center upper right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610 and handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100.

The center right lower ball path 2676 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided above the two passage portions 2676a extending in the front-rear direction and adjacent to the left and right, and the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the two passage portions 2676a. The loss port sensor 2604 has a sensor contact portion 2676b that can be contacted. The two passage portions 2676a are inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The sensor contact portion 2676b is brought into contact with the rear portions of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 to move the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 in the left-right direction, downward, and rearward. Can be regulated.

Further, the center right lower ball path 2676 further has an annular band holding portion 2676c, which protrudes rearward so that the binding band CT can be inserted, behind the sensor contact portion 2676b. By using the band holding portion 2676c and the binding band CT, it is possible to bundle and hold a plurality of wiring ECs connected to the V winning opening sensor 2603, the loss opening sensor 2604, and the like.

The center right lower ball path 2676 can cooperate with the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 to sandwich the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 from above and below (see FIG. 162). The lower right ball path 2676 of the center is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the front ends of the two passage portions 2676a face the seventh opening 2611 g of the attacker base plate 2610. I'm out. The passage portion 2676a of the center right lower ball path 2676 is received by the second major winning opening 2007 and distributed by the V distribution unit 2660 to either the V winning opening 2008 or the loss opening 2009, and is distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the loss opening 2009, and the attacker front plate 2620 The game ball B, which is guided rearward and has passed through the seventh opening 2611 g of the attacker base plate 2610, enters. The game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a is guided backward by its inclination, is delivered from the rear end to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward.

The attacker unit includes a substrate base 2677 attached to the rear side of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630, an attacker relay board 2678 attached to the rear side of the substrate base 2677, and an attacker relay board 2678 rear side. It is provided with a board cover 2679 attached to the board base 2677 so as to cover the above, and a magnetic sensor holder 2680 attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 to hold the magnetic sensor 1030.

Further, the attacker unit 2600 has one binding pedestal 2550 attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, which will be described in detail later (see FIGS. 166 to 170 and the like). The binding pedestal 2550 has an annular band holding portion 2552, and by bundling a plurality of wiring ECs by a binding band CT passing through the band holding portion 2552, the attacker base plate 2610 is in a state where the plurality of wiring ECs are bundled. Can be supported by.

[5-9b-2a. Attacker base plate]
The attacker base plate 2610 has a flat plate-shaped base plate main body 2611 as shown in FIGS. 152 to 154. The base plate main body 2611 penetrates back and forth at the upper part, and the second starting port sensor 2601 and the second starting port door body 2631 for opening and closing the second starting port 2005 are inserted and accepted into the second starting port 2005. The first opening 2611a through which the game ball B passes, the second opening 2611b through which the wiring that penetrates back and forth below the first opening 2611a and is connected to the second starting port decorative substrate 2671 is inserted, and the second opening. It penetrates back and forth below 2611b and penetrates back and forth between the third opening 2611c through which the second big winning opening door body 2651 that opens and closes the second big winning opening 2007 is inserted, and below the third opening 2611c. The fourth opening 2611d through which the wiring connected to the second large winning opening decorative substrate 2673 is inserted, and the V winning opening door that opens and closes the V winning opening 2008 that penetrates back and forth to the left and below the fourth opening 2611d. The fifth opening 2611e through which the body 2661 is inserted, the sixth opening 2611f through which the game ball B penetrated back and forth on the left side of the fifth opening 2611e and received in the general winning opening 2001, and the fifth opening 2611e The seventh opening 2611 g and the seventh opening 2611 g through which the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are inserted and the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 passes through the lower part of the It penetrates back and forth below the opening 2611g and penetrates back and forth through the eighth opening 2611h through which the wiring connected to the V winning opening decorative substrate 2674 is inserted, and to the left of the eighth opening 2611h and the seventh opening 2611g. The ninth opening 2611i through which the game ball B received in the right sub-out opening 2021b passes, and the wiring that penetrates back and forth on the left side of the ninth opening 2611i and is connected to the first grand prize opening decorative board 2672 are inserted. The eleventh opening 2611k through which the tenth opening 2611j and the first large winning opening door body 2641 that penetrates back and forth above and to the left of the tenth opening 2611j and opens and closes the first winning opening 2006 are inserted. And the twelfth opening 2611l which penetrates back and forth below the eleventh opening 2611k and through which the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2006 passes.

Further, the attacker base plate 2610 extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered above the first opening 2611a on the front surface of the base plate main body 2611, and also has a flat plate-shaped attacker upper shelf portion 2612 protruding forward. It has a sensor holding recess 2613 that is recessed rearward on the left side of the fourth opening 2611d below the third opening 2611c on the front surface of the plate body 2611 and into which the rear end of the second large winning opening sensor 2602 is inserted. There is.

Further, the attacker base plate 2610 passes through a plurality of mounting bosses 2614 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the base plate main body 2611 in a columnar shape and the first opening 2611a after being received by the second starting port 2005, and passes through the first opening 2611a to the upper right of the center. The first gutter part 2615 that guides the game ball B guided by the ball path 2675 to the rear, and the second gutter part that guides the game ball B that has passed through the sixth opening 2611f after being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 to the rear. It has 2616 and a third gutter portion 2617 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the ninth opening 2611i to the rear after being received by the right sub-out port 2021b.

[5-9d-2b. Attacca front plate]
The attacker front plate 2620 is formed transparently. The attacker front plate 2620 has a flat plate-shaped front plate main body 2621 and a wall forming portion 2622 extending rearward in a plate shape from the rear surface of the front plate main body 2621. The central opening 2605 and the right opening 2606 are formed by the wall forming portion 2622 of the attacker front plate 2620.

Further, the wall forming portion 2622 of the attacker front plate 2620 is of the general winning opening 2001, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, the V winning opening 2008, the losing opening 2009, the right sub-out opening 2021b, and the game ball B. In addition to the passage, etc., the second starting port sensor 2601, the second large winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, the sensor holding portion 2623 that holds the front end side of the loss opening sensor 2604, the second starting opening decorative substrate 2671, A substrate holding portion 2624 for holding the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672, the second prize opening decorative substrate 2673, the V winning opening decorative substrate 2674, and the like is formed.

Further, the attacker front plate 2620 has an attacker right guidance passage 2625 for guiding the game ball B guided by the attacker upper shelf portion 2612. The attacker right guidance passage 2625 can guide the game ball B to the left of the second starting port 2005 and the second winning opening 2007.

[5-9d-2c. Second starting port opening / closing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 of the attacker unit 2600 is a flat plate-shaped second starting opening door body provided so as to be able to advance and retreat through the attacker base plate 2610. The start port solenoid 2632 (see FIG. 203) for advancing and retreating the 2631 and the second start port door body 2631 according to the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the second start port door. It has a unit case 2635 which holds a body 2631 and a starting port solenoid 2632 and is composed of a first case portion 2633 and a second case portion 2634. The second starting port 2005 opens to the right, and the flat plate-shaped second starting port door body 2631 extends back and forth and up and down on the right side of the second starting port 2005 (second starting port sensor 2601). It is provided in the out state.

Further, the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 moves forward and backward in the opposite direction to the front / rear advance / retreat of the second start opening door body 2631, penetrates the attacker base plate 2610, and projects forward to play a game ball. It has a flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 capable of guiding B to the second starting port 2005 (second starting port sensor 2601). The guide piece 2636 is held (supported) by the unit case 2635 so as to be able to move forward and backward. The flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 extends to the right from the vicinity below the second start opening door body 2631. The guide piece 2636 is inclined so that the right end side is lowered. In FIG. 155, since the second start port door body 2631 of the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 protrudes (advances) forward, the guide piece 2636 that moves in the opposite direction is retracted, and the second start port 2005 It is a figure which shows the state at the time of closing.

Although not shown, the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 is provided so as to be rotatable around the axis in the vertical direction inside the unit case 2635, and the plunger 2632a of the start port solenoid 2632 advances and retreats. 2637 to the second start door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636, and has an opening / closing link 2637 for advancing and retreating the second start door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636.

The second start opening door body 2631 of the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 is a door piece 2631a which is long in the front-rear direction and is provided with its plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and the rear end of the lower end of the door piece 2631a. It has a flat plate-shaped base portion 2631b extending to the base portion 2631b and an opening / closing pin 2631c protruding upward from the base portion 2631b in a columnar shape. The door piece 2631a of the second starting port door body 2631 is inclined so as to move rearward as its front end side goes downward. Further, the door piece 2631a is inclined so that the vicinity of the front end on the right side surface moves to the left toward the front, and the thickness thereof decreases toward the front.

The second starting port door body 2631 is inclined from the front end to the rear with a predetermined width so that the right side surface moves to the left as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the second start door body 2631 advances, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the second start door body 2631, and the game ball B is bitten. Even so, the friction is reduced, so the bite is reduced as much as possible.

In the second start port door body 2631, the base portion 2631b is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the door body support portion of the second case portion 2644, and the door piece 2631a projects forward through the door body slit 2634c of the second case portion 2644. can do. The opening / closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door body 2631 is slidably inserted into the first slit 2637e of the opening / closing link 2637.

The start port solenoid 2632 is held in the unit case 2635 so that the plunger 2632a moves back and forth in the left-right direction (rightward). The start port solenoid 2632 is provided so as to vertically (in a plan view) overlap with the second start port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636. In the starting port solenoid 2632, the plunger 2632a that advances and retreats is urged in a protruding direction by a spring (not shown). Therefore, when the start port solenoid 2632 is not energized, the plunger 2632a protrudes due to the urging force of the spring, and the second start port door body 2631 protrudes forward by the opening / closing link 2637 that transmits the advance / retreat of the plunger 2632a. The second starting port 2005 is closed, and the guide piece 2636 retracts into the unit case 2635, making it impossible to guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 side.

The unit case 2635 is composed of two members, a first case portion 2633 and a second case portion 2634. The first case portion 2633 is formed in a box shape with the front, left and right directions, and the lower side open. On the other hand, the second case portion 2634 is formed in a box shape with the upper and rear sides open. As a result, by combining the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634 with each other, each open portion is closed. The first case portion 2633 projects downward in a columnar shape and has a shaft portion 2633a for rotatably supporting the opening / closing link 2637.

The second case portion 2634 of the unit case 2635 extends in the front-rear direction, and extends in the front-rear direction with the door body support portion 2634a for slidably supporting the second start opening door body 2631 in the front-rear direction. The guide piece support portion 2634b for slidably supporting the guide piece 2636 in the front-rear direction, the door body slit 2634c through which the door piece 2631a of the second start opening door body 2631 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2634c. It has a guide piece slit 2634d through which the guide piece main body 2636a of the piece 2636 penetrates in the front-rear direction through which it can be inserted.

The door body support portion 2634a of the second case portion 2634 is formed in a U-shape with an upwardly open cross section, and the base portion 2631b of the second starting port door body 2631 can slide in the front-rear direction inside the door body support portion 2634a. Will be inserted. The guide piece support portions 2634b are formed in a U-shape in cross section, and are provided in pairs separated in the left-right direction so that their open portions face each other. The left and right side ends of the guide piece main body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide piece support portions 2634b, respectively.

The guide piece 2636 is larger than the flat guide piece main body 2636a which is long left and right and front and back, the notch 2636b which is cut out from the rear side to the front of the guide piece main body 2636a, and the notch 2636b in the guide piece main body 2636a. It has an opening / closing pin 2636c that projects upward in a columnar shape from the right side portion. The guide piece main body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 is supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by inserting the rear portions of the left and right end sides into the pair of guide piece support portions 2634b of the second case portion 2634. Further, the front end side of the guide piece main body 2636a can project forward through the guide piece slit 2634d of the second case portion 2634.

The guide piece 2636 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the guide piece 2636 advances, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the guide piece 2636, and even if the guide piece 2636 is bitten, the friction is reduced, so that the ball B is bitten. Friction is reduced as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 157 and the like, the cutout portion 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is cut out in a U shape from the rear side to the front side. The notch 2636b is formed so that the opening / closing link 2637 is located inside the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and does not come into contact with the opening / closing link 2637 when the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is assembled. Although the details will be described later, the presence of the notch 2636b of the guide piece 2636 realizes a small second start opening opening / closing unit 2630. The opening / closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted into the second slit 2637g of the opening / closing link 2637.

The opening / closing link 2637 has a vertically extending cylindrical base 2637a that is rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction by the unit case 2635, and a lower arm that extends outward from the lower end of the base 2637a. 2637b, a pair of transmission pins 2637c extending downward in a columnar shape at a predetermined interval from the tip of the lower arm, and a first extending in a direction orthogonal to the lower arm 2637b from the upper end of the base 2637a. The arm 2637d, the first slit 2637e notched from the tip of the first arm 2637d toward the base 2637a, and the second arm 2637f extending from the upper end of the base 2637a in the direction opposite to the first arm 2637d. It has a second slit 2637g, which is notched from the tip of the second arm 2637f toward the base portion 2637a.

The cylindrical base portion 2637a is rotatably held around the axis in the vertical direction by inserting the shaft portion 2633a of the first case portion 2633. The lower arm 2637b extends forward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the base 2637a. The tip of the disk-shaped plunger 2632a in the starting port solenoid 2632 is inserted between the pair of transmission pins 2637c. The first arm 2637d extends from the upper end of the base 2637a to the left longer than the lower arm 2637b. The first slit 2637e extends from the tip of the first arm 2637d to the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction of the first arm 2637d, and the opening / closing pin 2631c of the second starting door body 2631 is slidably inserted. The second arm 2637f extends from the upper end of the base 2637a to the right with the same length as the first arm 2637d. The second slit 2637g extends from the tip of the second arm 2637f to the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction of the second arm 2637f, and the opening / closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is assembled on the game board 5, the unit case 2635 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the second starting port is passed through the first opening 2611a of the base plate main body 2611. The door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 are configured so that they can move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. Further, the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is configured such that the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 are colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) to be conspicuous. There is. Further, in the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630, the unit case 2635 is transparently formed so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and light can be transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (c) and 157 (d), the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 has the start port solenoid 2632 oriented in the left-right direction so that the plunger 2632a protrudes to the right in the assembled state. .. The second start port door body 2631 is provided above the start port solenoid 2632. The guide piece 2636 is provided between the second start port door body 2631 and the start port solenoid 2632. The opening / closing link 2637 is provided so that the lower end of the base 2637a is located below the guide piece 2636 and the upper end of the base 2637a is located above the base 2631b of the second starting door body 2631.

Further, the opening / closing link 2637 is provided so that its central axis is located slightly ahead of the rear end of the starting port solenoid 2632 within the range in which the tip of the plunger 2632a in the starting port solenoid 2632 advances and retreats. A second start door body 2631 is provided to the left of the base 2637a of the opening / closing link 2637, and a guide piece 2636 is provided so that the base 2637a of the opening / closing link 2637 is inserted into the notch 2636b. ing. The notch 2636b is formed so that the opening / closing link 2637 (base 2637a) does not come into contact with the opening / closing link 2637b.

The second start port door body 2631 has its base portion 2631b inserted into the door body support portion 2634a whose base portion 2631b is open above the second case portion 2634, and the first arm 2637d of the opening / closing link 2637 above the base portion 2631b. Is located, and the opening / closing pin 2631c is inserted into the first slit 2637e. As a result, the movement of the second start port door body 2631 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted by the door body support portion 2634a and the first arm 2637d.

The guide piece 2636 has both left and right ends of the guide piece main body 2636a inserted into the guide piece support portion 2634b of the second case portion 2634, and the guide piece support portion 2634b regulates the movement in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. In the guide piece 2636, the opening / closing pin 2636c is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the opening / closing link 2637.

In a normal state (a state in which the starting port solenoid 2632 is not energized), the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is provided with a spring (not shown) of the starting port solenoid 2632 as shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (c). Due to the force, the plunger 2632a protrudes to the right. In this state, since the tip of the plunger 2632a is located to the right of the central axis of the base 2637a of the opening / closing link 2637, the pair of transmission pins 2637c in which the disk-shaped portion of the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted between them. As a result, the lower arm 2637b extends forward to the right with respect to the central axis of the base 2637a. Therefore, the tip of the first arm 2637d extending at right angles to the lower arm 2637b is located in front of the central axis of the base 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f is behind the central axis of the base 2637a. Is located in. The opening / closing pin 2631c of the second starting door body 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening / closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f. Since it is inserted, the second start opening door body 2631 is advancing and the guide piece 2636 is retracting.

As a result, the front end of the second start opening door body 2631 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the front end of the guide piece 2636 is located rearward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. In this state, the game ball B is not guided toward the second starting port 2005 by the guide piece 2636, and even if the game ball B is directed toward the second starting port 2005 for some reason, the second starting port door body. It is blocked by 2631 and is not accepted into the second start port 2005.

On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2632 is energized in a predetermined pattern according to the normal symbol drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002 (the normal symbol is "normal hit"), the spring urging force is applied. The tip moves to the left so that the plunger 2632a is immersed in the opposition. In this state, the tip of the plunger 2632a is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2637a of the open / close link 2637. Therefore, when the start port solenoid 2632 is energized and the plunger 2632a is immersed, the opening / closing link 2637 is centered on the base 2637a via a pair of transmission pins 2637c in which a disk-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted between them. It rotates clockwise with respect to the axis. Due to this rotation, the tip of the first arm 2637d of the opening / closing link 2637 is located behind the central axis of the base 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f is located in front of the central axis of the base 2637a. Become. The opening / closing pin 2631c of the second starting door body 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening / closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f. Since it is inserted, the second start opening door body 2631 is retracted and the guide piece 2636 is advanced.

As a result, the front end of the second start opening door body 2631 is located behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the front end of the guide piece 2636 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. When the game ball B flows down on the upper surface of the guide piece 2636 in this state, the game ball B is guided by the guide piece 2636 and rolls to the left, and the second starting port provided on the left side of the guide piece 2636. Accepted in 2005.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2601, and enters the center upper right ball path 2675. Then, the game ball B that has entered the center upper right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610, handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then back. It is discharged downward from the ball guidance unit 3100.

In the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, when the guide piece 2636 is projected forward, the front end of the notch 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is located behind the front surface of the unit case 2635, and the notch 2636b Does not interfere with the distribution of the game ball B, and the notch 2636b is difficult for the player to see.

Further, the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 detachably holds the sensor holding recess 2635a, which is recessed from the front to the rear in the unit case 2635 and can hold the rear portion of the second starting port sensor 2601, and the magnetic sensor 1030. A magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b that can be formed, a band holding portion 2635c that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and is capable of inserting the band portion CTa of the binding band CT, and wiring provided below the band holding portion 2635c on the rear surface. It has a locking portion 2635d and a penetrating portion 2635e penetrating the unit case 2635 at a portion of the wiring locking portion 2635d. The sensor holding recess 2635a is provided on the left side of the second starting door body 2631.

The sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635 can hold the second starting port sensor 2601 so that the detection hole faces the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the axis of the detection hole is lowered to the left. Can be held in a state. The unit case 2635 can detachably hold the rear portion of the second starting port sensor 2601 from the outside by the sensor holding recess 2635a. Further, the sensor holding recess 2635a can hold the second starting port sensor 2601 so that the lower end of the detection hole is slightly below the extension line of the upper surface of the guide piece 2636. As a result, the game ball B guided by the guide piece 2636 can be reliably detected by passing through the detection hole of the second start port sensor 2601.

The band holding portion 2635c of the unit case 2635 is provided with an annular opening facing the left-right direction. As a result, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the band holding portion 2635c and tightened (bound) together with the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be extended in the vertical direction.

The wiring locking portion 2635d protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit case 2635 and then extends to the right in rear view along the rear surface, and is formed in an L-shape. The tip of the wiring locking portion 2635d is formed in a hook shape toward the rear surface side of the unit case 2635, and the surface facing the unit case 2635 side including the hook-shaped portion becomes closer to the tip of the unit case 2635. It is tilted away from. As a result, the wiring locking portion 2635d can insert the wiring EC extending vertically from the right in the rear view, and the hook-shaped portion at the tip can suppress the wiring EC from coming off (falling off). ..

The penetrating portion 2635e can pass the wiring EC between the inside and outside of the unit case 2635, and when the wiring EC is inserted and locked between the wiring locking portion 2635d and the outer surface of the unit case 2635, The wiring EC bends in the penetrating portion 2635e, and the pressure applied to the wiring EC can be released from the wiring locking portion 2635d.

According to the band holding portion 2635c and the wiring locking portion 2635d of the unit case 2635, the lower part of the wiring EC held by the band holding portion 2635c by the binding band CT is locked to the wiring locking portion 2635d. The wiring EC can be aligned with the rear surface of the unit case 2635.

The wiring EC held by the band holding portion 2635c and the wiring locking portion 2635d includes a magnetic sensor held by the magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b, a second starting port sensor 2601, a starting port solenoid 2632, and a second starting port decorative substrate. The wiring EC connected to 2671, etc. can be mentioned, but other wiring EC may be held.

According to the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 of the present embodiment, the start port solenoid 2632 is provided so that the plunger 2632a advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and the second start port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 are provided. Since they are provided so as to overlap each other (in a plan view), the dimensions of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Further, since the guide piece 2636 is provided with a notch 2636b into which a part of the opening / closing link 2637 for advancing / retreating the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 is provided, the guide piece 2636 and the opening / closing link in a plan view are provided. The area of the region composed of the 2637 can be reduced as much as possible, and the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 can be miniaturized. Therefore, by reducing the size of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear, so that the rear accessory or decoration can be made larger, or a new accessory or decoration can be rearward. By arranging or arranging the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the characters behind the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

Further, since the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is attached after the attacker base plate 2610, the attacker base plate 2610 makes it difficult for the player to see the unit case 2635 (starting port solenoid 2632). This makes it possible to suppress a deterioration in appearance due to the visible start port solenoid 2632, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, since the unit case 2635 holding the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 is composed of two parts, the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634, the second starting port It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the opening / closing unit 2630, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the unit case 2635 is composed of the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634, the second start port door body 2631 and the start port solenoid 2632 are the first case portion 2633 and the second. It can be held so as to be sandwiched between the case portion 2634, and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 is provided with a sensor holding recess 2635a into which the rear end side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is inserted, and the second starting port sensor 2601 is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2635. The unit case 2635 can restrict the movement of the second start port sensor 2601 in a predetermined direction, and can position the second start port sensor 2601 at a predetermined position. .. Further, when assembling the game board 5, the second starting port sensor 2601 can be guided by the sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635, and the assembling work can be facilitated.

[5-9d-2d. First prize opening opening and closing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided as a flat plate-shaped first large winning opening that can advance and retreat through the attacker base plate 2610. The door body 2641 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2005. In order to advance or retreat according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.) or according to the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008. A unit case that holds the first attacker solenoid 2642, the first prize opening door body 2641, and the first attacker solenoid 2642, and is composed of two parts, a first case portion 2634 and a second case portion 2644. It has 2645 and.

The flat plate-shaped first prize opening door body 2641 extends in the left-right direction so as to be lower on the left end side above the first prize opening 2006 that opens upward.

Further, the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 is rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction by the plunger head 2646 attached to the plunger 2642a in which the first attacker solenoid 2642 advances and retreats, and the unit case 2645. It has an opening / closing link 2647 that advances and retreats the first prize-winning door body 2641 by rotating by advancing and retreating the plunger head 2646.

The first prize opening door body 2641 of the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right and a door piece 2641a inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the door piece 2641a faces forward from the rear side. It has a notch portion 2641b that is notched and a link slit 2641c that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the door piece 2641a to the right of the notch portion 2641b and is long to the left and right. The door piece 2641a is bent stepwise so that the part on the right side of the center is located rearward and the rear side is bent stepwise so that the part on the left side of the center is located forward. are doing. In other words, the door piece 2641a is formed so that the shape in a plan view is such that another rectangle long on the left and right is overlapped on the upper right corner of the rectangle long on the left and right.

The first prize-winning door body 2641 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the first prize-winning door body 2641 advances, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the first prize-winning door body 2641. Even if it is chewed, the friction is reduced so that the bite is reduced as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 159, the notch portion 2641b of the first prize-winning door body 2641 is provided at a portion of the rear side of the door piece 2641a located on the left front side of the center. The cutout portion 2641b is notched in a trapezoidal shape narrowed forward, and the right edge thereof extends in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the center of the rear side of the door piece 2641a so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It extends straight to. The opening / closing pin 2647d of the opening / closing link 2647 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2641c. The first prize-winning door body 2641 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the unit case 2645.

The first attacker solenoid 2642 is held in the unit case 2645 so that the plunger 2642a moves back and forth in the left-right direction (leftward). The first attacker solenoid 2642 is provided so as to vertically (in a plan view) overlap with the first prize-winning door body 2641. In the first attacker solenoid 2642, the plunger 2642a that moves forward and backward is urged in a protruding direction by a spring (not shown). Therefore, when the first attacker solenoid 2642 is not energized, the plunger 2642a protrudes due to the urging force of the spring, and the first large winning opening is made via the plunger head 2646 and the opening / closing link 2647 attached to the plunger 2642a. The door body 2641 protrudes forward. By projecting the first prize opening door body 2641 forward, it is possible to close the upper part of the first prize opening 2006 and make the game ball B unacceptable.

The unit case 2645 is provided so that the first case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644 are separated into upper and lower parts. Between the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2644, the first prize-winning door body 2641 is slidably held in the front-rear direction. The unit case 2645 has a ball passage 2645a through which the game ball B can be distributed. The ball passage 2645a has an upstream end side that opens forward at the front of the unit case 2645 below the first prize opening door body 2641, and a downstream end side that opens downward at the rear of the unit case 2645. ing. In the ball passage 2645a of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2006 is distributed. Further, the first case portion 2643 extends downward in a columnar shape, and has a shaft portion (not shown) that rotatably supports the opening / closing link 2647.

The plunger head 2646 has a connecting portion 2646a attached to the plunger 2642a by inserting a disk-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and a connecting portion 2646a protruding upward from the upper end of the connecting portion 2646a and to the left. It has a projecting portion 2646b projecting to, and a transmission slit 2646c that penetrates the projecting portion 2646b vertically and is long in the front-rear direction. The transmission pin of the opening / closing link 2647 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c. The plunger head 2646 moves forward and backward in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2642a by attaching the connecting portion 2646a to the plunger 2642a.

The opening / closing link 2647 has a cylindrical base 2647a extending vertically and rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction by the unit case 2645, and a triangular base extending outward from the base 2647a. A flat plate-shaped extension piece 2647b, a transmission pin 2647c extending downward in a columnar shape from one tip of the extension piece 2647b, and a columnar extension downward from the remaining tip of the extension piece 2647b. It has an opening / closing pin 2647d and an opening / closing pin.

The cylindrical base portion 2647a is rotatably held around the axis in the vertical direction by inserting a shaft portion (not shown) of the first case portion 2634. The extending piece 2647b extends forward so as to spread in a triangular shape from the vicinity of the lower end of the base portion 2647a. The extension piece 2647b is formed in a triangular shape with the base 2647a as one apex, and one apex at the tip is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a and close to the base 2647a, and the rest. The apex at the tip is located to the right of the central axis of the base 2647a and far from the base 2647a. The transmission pin 2647c extends downward from the apex (tip) near the base 2647a of the extension piece 2647b, and is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646. The opening / closing pin 2647d extends downward from the apex (tip) far from the base 2647a of the extending piece 2647b, and is slidably inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first prize-winning door body 2641.

In the state where the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 is assembled on the game board 5, the unit case 2645 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the first opening 2611k of the base plate main body 2611 is passed through. The grand prize opening door body 2641 is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. Further, the upstream end of the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645 is located behind the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacker base plate 2610. Further, in the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640, the first prize opening door body 2641 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) and is configured to stand out. Further, in the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640, the unit case 2645 is transparently formed so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and light can be transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 159 (a) and the like, the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 has the first attacker solenoid 2642 directed to the left and right so that the plunger 2642a protrudes to the left in the assembled state. A plunger head 2646 is attached to the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642 so as to extend upward. The first large winning opening door body 2641 is provided above the first attacker solenoid 2642 so that the protruding portion 2646b of the plunger head 2646 is located in the notch portion 2641b, and the protruding portion 2646b of the plunger head 2646b is provided. The upper end of the door protrudes upward from the door piece 2641a (notch portion 2641b) of the first prize-winning door body 2641. The cutout portion 2641b is formed so that the plunger head 2646 (protruding portion 2646b) does not come into contact with the plunger head 2646b. Further, in the first prize-winning door body 2641, the left and right ends of the door piece 2641a are slidably supported by the unit case 2645 in the front-rear direction.

The opening / closing link 2637 has a base portion 2637a located above the door piece 2641a (notch portion 2641b) of the first large winning opening door body 2641. The central axis of the opening / closing link 2647 is slightly forward of the rear end of the first attacker solenoid 2642 within the range in which the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646 that advances / retreats together with the plunger 2642a in the first attacker solenoid 2642 advances / retreats. It is provided so as to be located in. The transmission pin 2647c of the opening / closing link 2647 is inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646, and the opening / closing pin 2647d is inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first prize-winning door body 2641.

Under normal conditions, the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 has a plunger 2642a protruding to the left due to the urging force of a spring (not shown) of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the plunger head 2646 advances and retreats together with the plunger 2642a. Is located at the left moving end. In this state, since the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646 is located to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a of the opening / closing link 2647, the transmission pin 2647c of the opening / closing link 2647 is also to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a. Is located in. Further, in this state, the opening / closing pin 2647d of the opening / closing link 2647 is located in front of the central axis of the base portion 2647a. The first large winning opening door body 2641 having the link slit 2641c into which the opening / closing pin 2647d of the opening / closing link 2647 is inserted has its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and is the first large. It is not possible to accept the game ball B into the winning opening 2006. In other words, the first prize opening 2006 is closed.

On the other hand, according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005. (For example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.) Or, depending on the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008, the first attacker solenoid 2642 is energized in a predetermined pattern. Then, the tip of the plunger 2642a moves to the right against the urging force of the spring so that the plunger 2642a is immersed, and the plunger head 2646 also moves to the right together with the plunger 2642a. When the plunger head 2646 moves to the right, the transmission slit 2646c moves to the right of the central axis of the base portion 2647a of the opening / closing link 2647, and therefore, the transmission pin 2647c inserted into the transmission slit 2646c The opening / closing link 2647 rotates counterclockwise. Due to this rotation, the opening / closing pin 2647d of the opening / closing link 2647 moves rearward from the central axis of the base 2647a, and the opening / closing pin 2647d is inserted through the link slit 2641c to enter the first prize-winning door body 2641. Will slide backwards.

As a result, the front end of the first large winning opening door body 2641 is located behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the first large winning opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball B can be accepted. In this state, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the front end of the cutout portion 2641b of the first prize-winning door body 2641 is located in front of the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and is visible from the front. It has become. At this time, since the notch portion 2641b of the first prize-winning door body 2641 protrudes from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 at a distance shorter than the radius of the game ball B, the game ball B of the notch portion 2641b comes into contact with the notch portion 2641b. It does not interfere with the distribution of the game ball B.

The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2006 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, passes through the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacker base plate 2610, and enters the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645. Then, the game ball B that has entered the ball passage 2645a is handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 from the downstream end, is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 3002 (see FIG. 203), and then moves downward. Is discharged to.

According to the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640 of the present embodiment, the first attacker solenoid 2642 is provided so that the plunger moves forward and backward in the left-right direction, and at the same time, it moves up and down with respect to the first prize opening door body 2641. Since they are provided so as to overlap (in a plan view), the dimensions of the first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Further, since the first prize-winning door body 2641 is provided with a notch portion 2641b into which a part of the plunger head 2646 for advancing and retreating the first prize-winning door body 2641 is provided, the first prize-winning in a plan view. The area of the area composed of the door body 2641, the plunger head 2646, and the opening / closing link 2647 can be reduced as much as possible, and the first prize-winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be miniaturized. Therefore, by reducing the size of the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear, so that the rear accessory or decoration can be made larger, or a new accessory or decoration can be created in the rear. By arranging or arranging the body, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the backing characters. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the unit case 2645 of the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640 is attached after the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2645 (first attacker solenoid 2642) can be seen from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the appearance of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, since the unit case 2645 holding the first prize-winning door body 2641 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 is composed of the first case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644, the first case is the first. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the unit case 2645 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2644 and the second case part 2644, the first big prize opening door body 2641 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 are combined with the first case part 2634. It can be held so as to be sandwiched between the second case portion 2644 and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, in the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640, one of the notches 2641b of the first prize opening door body 2641 when the first prize opening 2006 is closed by the first prize opening door body 2641. A part is projected forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and a first prize opening decorative board 2672 on which an LED capable of irradiating light is mounted above the first prize opening 2006 is provided. Therefore, the LED of the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672 can illuminate the game ball B rolling on the first prize opening door body 2641 through the notch 2641b from below. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect of illuminating the game ball B rolling on the first prize-winning door body 2641, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[5-9d-2e. Second prize opening opening and closing unit]
As shown in FIG. 160, the second large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650 of the attacker unit 2600 has a flat plate-shaped second large winning opening door body 2651 provided so as to be able to advance and retreat through the attacker base plate 2610. , The first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2005 for the second prize opening door body 2651. It holds a second attacker solenoid 2652 for advancing and retreating according to the above, a second prize opening door body 2651 and a second attacker solenoid 2652, and is composed of two parts, the first case part 2653 and the second case part 2654. The unit case 2655, the plunger head 2656 attached to the plunger 2652a that moves back and forth of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and the unit case 2655 rotatably support the plunger with respect to the axial core in the vertical direction. It has an opening / closing link 2657 that advances and retreats the second prize opening door body 2651 by rotating by advancing and retreating the head 2656.

The second prize opening door body 2651 of the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650 has a door piece 2651a which is long flat to the left and right and is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and a center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the door piece 2651a. It has a base portion 2651b extending rearward from the door and a link slit 2651c that penetrates the base portion 2651b vertically and is long to the left and right. The second prize-winning door body 2651 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the unit case 2655 (first case portion 2653). The opening / closing pin 2657e of the opening / closing link 2657 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c.

The second prize-winning door body 2651 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the second prize-winning door body 2651 advances, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the second prize-winning door body 2651. Even if it is chewed, the friction is reduced so that the bite is reduced as much as possible.

The second attacker solenoid 2652 is held in the unit case 2655 in a direction in which the plunger 2652a, which moves forward and backward by energization, projects to the left. The second attacker solenoid 2652 is provided so as to vertically (in a plan view) overlap with the second prize opening door body 2651. The second attacker solenoid 2652 has a spring (not shown), and the spring urges the plunger 2652a in a protruding direction. The tip of the plunger 2652a is formed in a disk shape.

The unit case 2655 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610. The unit case 2655 is composed of two parts, a first case portion 2653 and a second case portion 2654, which are vertically separated from each other. The unit case 2655 holds (supports) the second prize-winning door body 2651 on the upper surface so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Further, the unit case 2655 holds a second attacker solenoid 2652, a plunger head 2656, and an opening / closing link 2657 inside.

The first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655 has four slide holding pieces 2653a protruding upward in an inverted L shape from the upper surface. The two slide holding pieces 2653a are provided at both left and right ends of the first case portion 2653 so that the tips of the horizontally extending portions of the upper ends face each other. With these two slide holding pieces 2653a, the left and right ends of the door piece 2651a in the second prize opening door body 2651 can be slidably held (supported). The remaining two slide holding pieces 2653a are provided at the rear portion near the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the first case portion 2653, and are separated from each other on the left and right so that the tips of the horizontally extending portions of the upper ends face each other. There is. The two slide holding pieces 2653a can slidably hold (support) both the left and right ends of the base portion 2651b in the second prize opening door body 2651.

Further, the first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655 has a through hole 2653b having a fan-shaped inner circumference penetrating vertically at a portion between two slide holding pieces 2653a in the center in the left-right direction. .. The opening / closing pin 2657e of the opening / closing link 2657 is inserted through the through port 2653b from below.

The second case portion 2654 of the unit case 2655 is formed in a long left and right box shape that is open upward, and has a shaft portion 2654a that extends upward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the left end of the bottom wall. .. The shaft portion 2654a of the second case portion 2654 is for rotatably supporting the open / close link 2657.

The plunger head 2656 includes a connecting portion 2656a attached to the plunger 2652a by inserting a disk-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2652a of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and an extending portion extending to the left from the connecting portion 2656a. It has a 2656b and a transmission portion 2656c provided at the tip of the extension portion 2656b. The transmission portion 2656c is formed in a U shape with the shape in a plan view open forward, and the transmission pin 2657c of the opening / closing link 2657 is slidably inserted into the transmission portion 2656c. The plunger head 2656 moves forward and backward in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2652a by attaching the connecting portion 2656a to the plunger 2652a.

The opening / closing link 2657 has a vertically extending cylindrical base 2657a that is rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction by the unit case 2655, and a first arm 2657b that extends outward from the base 2657a. A transmission pin 2657c extending upward in a columnar shape from the tip of the first arm 2657b, and a second extending outward from the base 2657a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2657b than the first arm 2657b. It has a second arm 2657d and an opening / closing pin 2657e extending upward in a columnar shape from the tip of the second arm 2657d.

The cylindrical base portion 2657a is rotatably held around the axis in the vertical direction by inserting the shaft portion 2654a of the second case portion 2654. The first arm 2657b extends forward from the lower end of the base 2657a. The transmission pin 2657c is slidably inserted into the U-shaped transmission portion 2656c of the plunger head 2656. The second arm 2657d extends to the right from the upper end of the base 2657a. The second arm 2657d is 90 degrees different from the first arm 2657b and extends twice as long as the first arm 2657b. The opening / closing pin 2657e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c of the second prize opening door body 2651 through the through opening 2653b of the first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655.

In the state where the second large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650 is assembled on the game board 5, the unit case 2655 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the second large prize opening opening / closing unit 2650 is passed through the third opening 2611c of the base plate main body 2611. The winning door body 2651 is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. Further, in the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, the second prize opening door body 2651 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) and is configured to stand out. Further, in the second large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, the unit case 2655 is transparently formed so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and light can be transmitted.

In the normal state of the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, the second big winning opening door body 2651 is advanced by the urging force of the spring of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and the front end is in front of the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. The game ball B cannot be accepted into the second prize opening 2007. In other words, the second prize opening 2007 is closed.

On the other hand, according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005. (For example, when the special symbol drawn by lottery is energized in the second attacker solenoid 2652 in a predetermined pattern, it resists the urging force of the spring. The plunger 2652a is immersed, and the opening / closing link 2657 rotates via the plunger head 2656 attached to the tip of the plunger 2652a. Due to the rotation of the opening / closing link 2657, the second prize opening door body 2651 is retracted so that the front end is positioned behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. As a result, the second major winning opening 2007 is opened and the game ball B can be accepted.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2602 provided below the second big winning opening 2007 and in front of the attacker base plate 2610, and then the attacker. It is guided further downward by the front plate 2620. A V winning opening 2008 and a loss opening 2009 are provided below (downstream) of the second major winning opening sensor 2602, and the game ball B detected by the second major winning opening sensor 2602 is generated by the V distribution unit 2660. It will be distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009.

The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2008 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 and then guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, and the seventh opening 2611 g of the attacker base plate 2610. Enter the center right lower ball route 2676 through. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2009 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 after being detected by the loss opening sensor 2604 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the seventh opening 2611 g of the attacker base plate 2610. It enters the passage portion 2676a of the center right lower ball route 2676 through the passage. Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the lower right ball path 2676 of the center is handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 from its downstream end (rear end), and downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. It is discharged.

According to the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650 of the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2652 is provided so that the plunger 2652a advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and is moved up and down with respect to the second prize opening door body 2651. Since it is provided so as to overlap (in a plan view), the dimension of the second large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, by reducing the size of the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear, so that the rear accessory or decoration can be made larger, or a new accessory or decoration can be created in the rear. By arranging or arranging the body, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the backing characters. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the unit case 2655 of the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650 is attached after the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2655 (second attacker solenoid 2652) can be seen from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the appearance of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, since the unit case 2655 holding the second prize opening door body 2651 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is composed of the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654, the second case is formed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the large winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the unit case 2655 is composed of the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654, the second attacker solenoid 2652 is sandwiched between the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654. It can be held, and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

[5-9d-2f. V distribution unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the V distribution unit 2660 of the attacker unit 2600 has a flat plate-shaped V winning opening door body 2661 provided so as to penetrate the attacker base plate 2610 and move forward and backward, and a V winning opening door. It holds a V distribution solenoid 2662 for advancing and retreating the body 2661, a V winning opening door body 2661 and a V distribution solenoid 2662, and is composed of two parts, a first case portion 2663 and a second case portion 2664. Plunger head 2666 attached to the unit case 2665 and the plunger 2662a that moves back and forth of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the plunger head 2666 that is rotatably supported by the unit case 2665 with respect to the axial core in the vertical direction. It has an opening / closing link 2667 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door body 2661 by rotating according to the advancement and retreat of.

The V winning opening door body 2661 of the V distribution unit 2660 has a flat plate shape whose left and right sides are slightly longer than one game ball B and is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and a rear end of the door piece 2661a. It has a base portion 2661b extending rearward from the door, and a link slit 2661c provided at the rear end of the base portion 2661b and penetrating vertically and long to the left and right. The V winning opening door body 2661 is supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction in the unit case 2665. The opening / closing pin 2667e of the opening / closing link 2667 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c.

The V winning opening door body 2661 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the V-winning door body 2661 advances, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the V-winning door body 2661, and even if it is bitten. Since the friction is reduced, the bite is reduced as much as possible.

The V distribution solenoid 2662 is held in the unit case 2665 in a direction in which the plunger 2662a, which moves forward and backward by energization, projects to the left. The V distribution solenoid 2662 is provided so as to vertically (in a plan view) overlap with the V winning opening door body 2661. The V distribution solenoid 2662 has a spring (not shown), and the spring urges the plunger 2662a in a protruding direction. The tip of the plunger 2662a is formed in a disk shape.

The unit case 2665 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610. The unit case 2665 is composed of two parts, a first case portion 2663 and a second case portion 2664, which are vertically separated from each other. The unit case 2665 holds (supports) the V winning opening door body 2661 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the second case portion 2664 which is the inside. Further, the unit case 2665 holds a V distribution solenoid 2662, a plunger head 2666, and an opening / closing link 2667 inside.

The first case portion 2663 of the unit case 2665 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open downward. The second case portion 2664 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open upward. The second case portion 2664 has two slide holding pieces 2664a protruding upward in an inverted L shape from the upper surface of the bottom wall. The two slide holding pieces 2664a are provided so that the tips of the horizontally extending portions of the upper ends of the first case portion 2663 face each other with the portion slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction as the center. With these two slide holding pieces 2653a, the left and right ends of the base portion 2661b in the V winning opening door body 2661 can be slidably held (supported).

Further, the second case portion 2664 has a shaft portion 2664b extending upward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the rear end to the left of the two slide holding pieces 2664a on the bottom wall. The shaft portion 2664b of the second case portion 2664 is for rotatably supporting the open / close link 2667.

The unit case 2665 has a sensor contact portion 2665a on which a part of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604 abuts on the lower surface on the outer surface. By bringing the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 into contact with the sensor contact portion 2665a, it is possible to regulate the movement of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 in a predetermined direction. More specifically, the sensor contact portion 2665a is formed in a stepped shape with the right side higher than the left side, and the V winning opening sensor 2603 can regulate the upward movement, and the loss opening sensor 2604 Movement to the top and left can be restricted.

The plunger head 2666 has a connection portion 2666a attached to the plunger 2662a by inserting a disk-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2662a of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and an extension portion extending to the left from the connection portion 2666a. It has a 2666b and a transmission pin 2666c that protrudes downward from the tip of the extending portion 2666b in a columnar shape. The transmission pin 2666c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c of the open / close link 2667. The plunger head 2666 moves forward and backward in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2662a by attaching the connecting portion 2666a to the plunger 2662a.

The opening / closing link 2667 includes a vertically extending cylindrical base 2667a that is rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction by the unit case 2665, and a first arm 2667b that extends outward from the base 2667a. The elongated transmission slit 2667c that penetrates the first arm 2667b vertically and extends in the longitudinal direction of the first arm 2667b, and the first arm from the base 2667a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2667b. It has a second arm 2667d extending outward longer than 2667b, and an opening / closing pin 2667e extending downward in a columnar shape from the tip of the second arm 2667d.

The cylindrical base portion 2667a is rotatably held around the axis in the vertical direction by inserting the shaft portion 2664b of the second case portion 2664. The first arm 2667b extends forward from the upper end of the base 2667a. The transmission pin 2666c of the plunger head 2666 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c. The second arm 2667d extends to the right from the upper end of the base 2667a. The second arm 2667d differs from the first arm 2667b by 90 degrees in the extending direction, and extends twice as long as the first arm 2667b. The opening / closing pin 2667e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c of the V winning opening door body 2661.

When the V distribution unit 2660 is assembled on the game board 5, the unit case 2665 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the V winning opening door body 2661 passes through the fifth opening 2611e of the base plate main body 2611. Is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. Further, in the V distribution unit 2660, the V winning opening door body 2661 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) and is configured to be conspicuous. Further, in the V distribution unit 2660, the unit case 2665 is formed transparently so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and light can be transmitted.

Further, in the V distribution unit 2660, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2665a on the lower surface of the unit case 2665. The sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right lower ball path 2676 is in contact with the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 from the left-right direction, the lower side, and the rear side. That is, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are sandwiched between the V distribution unit 2660 and the center right lower ball path 2676, and their movements to the vertical, backward, and horizontal directions are restricted (FIG. 162). See).

When the V distribution unit 2660 is not energized with respect to the V distribution solenoid 2662, the V winning opening door body 2661 advances due to the urging force of the spring of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the front end is the attacker base plate 2610. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the game ball B, which makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008. That is, the V winning opening 2008 is closed. As a result, the game ball B that has been accepted by the second major winning opening 2007 and has flowed down toward the V winning opening 2008 can be guided to the right losing opening 2009 by the inclination of the V winning opening door body 2661. The game ball B can be distributed to the loss opening 2009.

Then, the game ball B distributed (accepted) to the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2604 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and then guided to the rear by the attacker front plate 2620, and is guided to the rear by the attacker base plate 2610. It enters the passage portion 2676a of the center right lower ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of 2610. Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the lower right ball path 2676 of the center is handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 from its downstream end (rear end), and downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. It is discharged.

On the other hand, when the V distribution solenoid 2662 is energized, the plunger 2662a is immersed against the urging force of the spring, and the opening / closing link 2667 rotates via the plunger head 2666 attached to the tip of the plunger 2662a. Due to the rotation of the opening / closing link 2667, the V winning opening door body 2661 retracts and the front end is positioned behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. As a result, the V winning opening 2008 is opened and the game ball B can be accepted. In this state, if the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 flows down, it will be accepted in the V winning opening 2008. That is, it will be distributed to the V winning opening 2008.

The V distribution solenoid 2662 may be energized at regular intervals regardless of the progress of the game, or the game ball B may be energized to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004. It is also possible to energize in a predetermined pattern according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance or the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005.

The game ball B distributed (accepted) to the V winning opening 2008 is guided to the rear by the attacker front plate 2620 after being detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and is guided to the rear by the attacker base plate 2610. It enters the passage portion 2676a of the center right lower ball path 2676 through the seventh opening 2611g of the center. Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the lower right ball path 2676 of the center is handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 from its downstream end (rear end), and downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. It is discharged.

According to the V distribution unit 2660 of the present embodiment, the V distribution solenoid 2662 is provided so that the plunger 2662a moves forward and backward in the left-right direction, and is vertically (in a plan view) with respect to the V winning opening door body 2661. ) Since they are provided so as to overlap each other, the dimensions of the V distribution unit 2660 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, since the V distribution unit 2660 becomes smaller, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear, so that the accessory or decoration in the rear can be made larger, or a new accessory or decoration can be arranged in the rear. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the behind-the-scenes characters, etc. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 is attached after the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2665 (V distribution solenoid 2662) is made difficult to see from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the appearance of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, since the unit case 2665 holding the V winning opening door body 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 is composed of two parts, the first case portion 2663 and the second case portion 2664, the V distribution unit The increase in the number of parts of the 2660 can be suppressed, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the unit case 2665 is composed of two parts, the first case part 2663 and the second case part 2664, the V winning opening door body 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 are the first case part 2663 and the second case part 2663. It can be held so as to be sandwiched between the case portion 2664, and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, since the sensor contact portion 2665a is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 so that the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604 come into contact with the outer surface of the unit case 2665. , The unit case 2665 can regulate the movement of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 in a predetermined direction, and enables the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 to be positioned at a predetermined position. it can. Further, when assembling the game board 5, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 can be guided by the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, so that the assembling work can be facilitated.

[5-9d-2g. Second embodiment of the opening / closing unit]
Next, the opening / closing unit 2700 of the embodiment different from the above-mentioned second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, second winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, and V distribution unit 2660 is shown in FIG. It will be described in detail with reference to 163. FIG. 163 is a perspective view seen from the lower rear. The opening / closing unit 2700 is attached to the rear side of the flat plate-shaped base plate 2710.

The opening / closing unit 2700 includes a flat plate-shaped door body 2701 that penetrates the base plate 2710 and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward, a solenoid 2702 as a driving means for moving the door body 2701 forward and backward, and a door body 2701 and a solenoid 2702. The unit case 2705, which is composed of the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704, is provided.

The door body 2701 of the opening / closing unit 2700 has a predetermined width from the front end to the rear, and is inclined so that the lower surface moves upward as the lower surface moves forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes thinner. As a result, when the door body 2701 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate (not shown) and the front end of the door body 2701, and even if the door body 2701 is bitten, the friction is reduced so that the game ball B can be bitten. The number is reduced.

The solenoid 2702 is held in the unit case 2705 in a direction in which the plunger 2702a, which advances and retreats when energized, projects to the right. The solenoid 2702 has a spring (not shown), and the spring urges the plunger 2702a in a protruding direction. The tip of the plunger 2702a is formed in a disk shape.

In the opening / closing unit 2700, when the solenoid 2702 is not energized, the plunger 2702a protrudes due to the urging force of the spring, and the door body 2701 is provided with a base plate at the front end thereof by an opening / closing link (not shown) connected to the plunger 2702a. It is retracted so as to be located behind the front surface of the 2710. As a result, the door body 2701 cannot guide the game ball B to a reception port (not shown), which makes it impossible to accept the game ball B at the reception port.

When the plunger 2702a is immersed in the opening / closing unit 2700 against the urging force of the spring by energizing the solenoid 2702, the door body 2701 is advanced by an opening / closing link (not shown), and the front end thereof is the first opening 2710a of the base plate 2710. It becomes a state of protruding forward from the front through. Since the door body 2701 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, the ball sensor 2711 whose detection hole protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 2710 through the second opening 2710b on the left side of the door body 2701. The game ball B can be guided to. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down onto the door body 2701 with the door body 2701 protruding, the game ball B can be guided toward the ball sensor 2711 by the upper surface of the door body 2701, and the game ball B can be guided. It can be detected by passing it through the detection hole of the ball sensor 2711. That is, it is possible to accept the game ball B at the reception port.

Further, the opening / closing unit 2700 is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 with an annular band holding portion 2706, and is provided on the unit case 2705 for mounting the opening / closing unit 2700 on the mounting boss 2710c of the base plate 2710. It has a portion 2707 and a sensor contact portion 2708 that is provided on the unit case 2705 and is capable of contacting the ball sensor 2711 that is held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of band holding portions 2706 are provided at different positions on the outer surface of the unit case 2705. Specifically, two band holding portions 2706 are provided on the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705, and one is provided on the right side surface of the unit case 2705. Each band holding portion 2706 is provided with an annular opening facing in the vertical direction. The band holding portion 2706 is tightened (bound) together with the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702, the ball sensor 2711, etc. in a state where the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the annular portion, thereby tightening (binding) the wiring EC. It is for holding in the unit case 2705.

Two mounting portions 2707 are provided, and each protrudes outward from the left and right side surfaces of the unit case 2705 in a flange shape. The sensor holding portion 2710d is provided integrally with the mounting portion 2707 protruding from the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705. The sensor holding portion 2710d closes a part of the portion of the U-shaped sensor holding portion 2710d capable of accommodating a part of the ball sensor 2711 on the base plate 2710, which is open to the rear. As a result, the backward movement of the ball sensor 2711 held by the sensor holding unit 2710d can be restricted. The U-shaped open portion of the sensor holding portion 2710d faces to the right (unit case 2705 side).

In the opening / closing unit 2700 of the present embodiment, the two mounting portions 2707 are mounted in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 with the front surface of the two mounting portions 2707 in contact with the rear end of the mounting boss 2710c of the base plate 2710. In the ball sensor 2711, the front portion where the detection hole is provided through the second opening 2710b from the rear of the base plate 2710 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 2710, and the rear portion is a U-shaped sensor holding portion 2710d. It is housed inside. A part of the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 is in contact with the sensor contact portion 2708, and a part of the peripheral side surface of the rear portion of the ball sensor 2711 is in contact with the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705.

A front plate (not shown) provided in front of the base plate 2710 is in contact with the front end of the ball sensor 2711. As a result, the ball sensor 2711 is positioned at a predetermined position. Further, as described above, since the left side surface 2705L on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 is in contact with a part of the sphere sensor 2711, the unit case 2705 moves the sphere sensor 2711 in a predetermined direction depending on the portion. It has a function to regulate.

In the present embodiment, the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702 extends from the rear portion of the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705 to the outside, and the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 provided on the left side of the unit case 2705. The wiring EC connected to is extended to the rear. Then, the wiring ECs are extended to the right along the lower surface of the unit case 2705, and are fastened to the band holding portion 2706 provided at the lower rear end on the right side surface of the unit case 2705 by the binding band CT. There is. Details of the cable tie CT will be described in [5-9a-1. Wiring locking part] is described in the chapter.

At this time, the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702 is tightened with a small margin, and the wiring EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is tightened with a large margin. As a result, when the unit case 2705 is removed from the base plate 2710, the ball sensor 2711 is not pulled backward by the wiring EC until the unit case 2705 is separated from the base plate 2710 to some extent. That is, the opening / closing unit 2700 can be separated from the base plate 2710 to some extent while the ball sensor 2711 is held by the sensor holding portion 2710d, and the opening / closing unit 2700 can be confirmed (maintenance).

Further, since the wiring EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is held by the band holding portion 2706 by the binding band CT, even if the opening / closing unit 2700 is removed from the base plate 2710 together with the ball sensor 2711, the wiring EC The opening / closing unit 2700 and the ball sensor 2711 are connected to each other, so that the ball sensor 2711 can be prevented from being lost.

According to the opening / closing unit 2700 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid 2702 is provided so that the plunger 2702a moves back and forth in the left-right direction, the size of the opening / closing unit 2700 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, since the opening / closing unit 2700 becomes smaller, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear, so that the accessory or decoration in the rear can be made larger, or a new accessory or decoration can be arranged in the rear. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the backing characters, etc. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit case 2705 of the opening / closing unit 2700 is mounted after the base plate 2710, the base plate 2710 makes it possible to make the unit case 2705 (solenoid 2702) difficult to see from the player side, and the solenoid 2702 It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the appearance, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, since the unit case 2705 holding the door body 2701 and the solenoid 2702 is composed of the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704, the increase in the number of parts of the opening / closing unit 2700 is suppressed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the unit case 2705 is composed of the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704, the door body 2701 and the solenoid 2702 are sandwiched between the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704. It can be held in such a way that the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, since the sensor contact portion 2708 is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 of the opening / closing unit 2700 so that the sphere sensor 2711 contacts the outer surface of the unit case 2705, the unit case 2705 causes the sphere sensor 2711 to come into contact with the sphere sensor 2711. The movement in a predetermined direction can be regulated, and the ball sensor 2711 can be positioned at a predetermined position. Further, when assembling the game board 5, the ball sensor 2711 can be guided by the sensor contact portion 2708 of the unit case 2705, and the assembling work can be facilitated.

Further, since the unit case 2705 of the opening / closing unit 2700 is provided with a plurality of annular band holding portions 2706, the wiring EC is tightened together with the wiring EC through the band portion CTa of the binding band CT to the band holding portion 2706. It can be held in the case 2705, and the wiring EC can be made difficult to see from the player side by collecting the wiring EC.

Further, since a plurality of band holding portions 2706 are provided, the required band holding portion 2706 can be used depending on the routing direction of the wiring EC. Therefore, by changing the mounting position of the opening / closing unit 2700 due to a model or design change, even if the wiring EC routing direction changes, it is possible to handle it by using any of the band holding portions 2706. The highly versatile opening / closing unit 2700 can be used, and the opening / closing unit 2700 can be diverted, so that an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the band holding portion 2706 is provided in the unit case 2705, before assembling the game board 5, the wiring EC of the ball sensor 2711, which is separate from the opening / closing unit 2700, is connected by the binding band CT to the band holding portion 2706. It is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the ball sensor 2711 at the time of assembling.

Further, since the unit case 2705 is provided with the sensor contact portion 2708 that abuts on the rear end of the ball sensor 2711, the opening / closing unit 2700 is held in a state where the ball sensor 2711 is held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710. When attached to the base plate 2710, the sphere sensor 2711 can be attached by restricting the rearward movement of the sphere sensor 2711 by the sensor contact portion 2708. Therefore, it is not necessary to attach the ball sensor 2711 separately from the opening / closing unit 2700, and the game board 5 can be easily assembled.

[5-9d-2h. Mounting the sensor in the attacker unit]
Next, with respect to the attachment of the sensors (here, the second starting port sensor 2601, the second large winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, and the loss opening sensor 2604) in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, FIG. 152. A detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. 154, 162, 164 and the like. FIG. 164 shows the relationship between the attacker front plate, the second starting port sensor, the second large winning opening sensor, the V winning opening sensor, the loss opening sensor, the attacker base plate, and the lower right ball passage of the center in the attacker unit of the center accessory. Is an explanatory view showing a perspective view. In addition, in FIG. 153, in order to make it easy to understand the mounting state of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604, the positional relationship between them and the center right lower ball path 2676 is shown in a state where they are not decomposed.

First, the outer shape of the sensor (ball sensor) such as the second starting port sensor 2601, the second large winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, and the loss opening sensor 2604 will be described. The ball sensor has a detection hole through which the game ball B can pass for detecting the game ball B. The ball sensor is formed into a rectangle whose outer shape is the size of two squares arranged side by side when viewed from the axial direction of the detection hole for detecting the game ball B, and is formed from the center of the rectangle in the longitudinal direction. There is also a detection hole on one side. Further, a C chamfer is provided at one of the four corners of the rectangle near the detection hole. Further, in the sphere sensor, the axial core direction of the detection hole is formed to have a thickness of about half the diameter of the detection hole. Therefore, the sphere sensor is formed in a thin flat plate shape in which a detection hole is provided on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction. A substrate and a connector of the ball sensor are housed inside the ball sensor on the side opposite to the detection hole with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, a connector is provided on both end faces in the longitudinal direction of the sphere sensor, which are far from the detection holes, to which the wiring EC from the outside is connected. Hereinafter, the side of the ball sensor in which the detection hole is provided from the center in the longitudinal direction will be referred to as a detection side, and the opposite side will be referred to as a connector side.

The attachment of the second starting port sensor 2601 in the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The second starting port sensor 2601 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. The second start port sensor 2601 is oriented so that the detection side is located forward of the center in the longitudinal direction. The second start port sensor 2601 is housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 whose detection side is opened rearward in the attacker front plate 2620. As a result, the second start port sensor 2601 is restricted from moving in the forward, vertical, and horizontal directions by the attacker front plate 2620. Further, the second start port sensor 2601 is held by the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 in a state in which the axis of the detection hole is tilted so as to be higher on the right side in the front view with respect to the horizontal direction. That is, the second start port sensor 2601 is positioned by the attacker front plate 2620 in a state where the axis of the detection hole is tilted.

The second start port sensor 2601 detects the game ball B circulating to the left, and the accuracy must be particularly improved for positioning the detection hole in the axial center direction. Therefore, the second start port sensor is used. The sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 accommodating the front end side (detection side) of 2601 is formed in a U shape so as to surround the peripheral edge of the second start port sensor 2601 on the detection side. As a result, the second start port sensor 2601 can be positioned at a desired position with high accuracy, so that the game ball B guided to the left by the guide piece 2636 of the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 can be smoothly detected. It can be detected by passing through the hole, and the stagnation or stagnation of the game ball B on the guide piece 2636 can be suppressed.

Further, the connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 passes through the first opening 2611a of the attacker base plate 2610 from the front and protrudes to the rear of the base plate main body 2611. The connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is inserted into the sensor holding recess 2635a provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2635 in the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630. As a result, the connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is restricted from moving backward, up and down, and left and right by the sensor holding recess 2635a. Therefore, the second start port sensor 2601 is attached in a state of being sandwiched between the attacker front plate 2620 and the second start port opening / closing unit 2630 (unit case 2635).

Next, the attachment of the second large winning opening sensor 2602 in the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The second grand prize opening sensor 2602 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second grand prize opening 2007. The second large winning opening sensor 2602 is arranged with the detection holes facing in the vertical direction in a state where the detection side and the connector side are aligned in the left-right direction. Specifically, the second large winning opening sensor 2602 is horizontally arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right so that the connector side is located on the right side of the front view of the detection side. Most of the second prize opening sensor 2602 is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620. As a result, the second large winning opening sensor 2602 is restricted from moving in the forward, vertical, and horizontal directions by the attacker front plate 2620 (sensor holding portion 2623).

Further, in the second large winning opening sensor 2602, a portion (rear end) protruding rearward from the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 is housed in the sensor holding recess 2613 of the attacker base plate 2610. That is, the rear end of the second large winning opening sensor 2602 is in contact with the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the rear end is restricted by the attacker base plate 2610. Therefore, the second large winning opening sensor 2602 is provided in front of the base plate main body 2611 of the attacker base plate 2610, and is attached in a state of being sandwiched between the attacker base plate 2610 and the attacker front plate 2620.

In the installation of the second prize opening sensor 2602, most of the sensor is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620. It is possible to make it less susceptible to the influence of each manufacturing error, assembly error, etc., and it is possible to facilitate positioning of the second prize opening sensor 2602 at a desired position. Therefore, since the position of the detection hole of the second large winning opening sensor 2602 can be made difficult to shift, the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 can be surely passed through the detection hole, and the game ball B can be passed through the detection hole. It is possible to make it difficult for stagnation, stagnation, ball clogging, etc. to occur.

Subsequently, the attachment of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 of the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The V winning opening sensor 2603 is for detecting the game ball B received (distributed) in the V winning opening 2008, and the loss opening sensor 2604 detects the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. It is for doing. The V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are oriented so that the detection side is located forward of the center in the longitudinal direction in a horizontal state in which the detection hole is oriented in the vertical direction. The V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 whose detection side is opened rearward in the attacker front plate 2620. As a result, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are restricted from moving in the forward, vertical, and horizontal directions by the attacker front plate 2620.

Further, in the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604, the connector side passes through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610 from the front and protrudes to the rear of the base plate main body 2611. The connector side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 is sandwiched between the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 and the center right lower ball path 2676. On the lower surface of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660, a sensor contact portion 2665a capable of contacting the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604 is provided. The lower right ball path 2676 of the center is provided with a sensor contact portion 2676b that is open forward and upward and is capable of contacting (partially accommodating) the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604. ..

More specifically, the connector side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 is in contact with a portion on the left side of the stepped portion of the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660. Further, the left side surface, the lower surface surface, and the rear surface of the V winning opening sensor 2603 on the connector side are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right lower ball path 2676. As a result, the connector side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 is restricted from moving upward by the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is left and downward by the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right lower ball path 2676. , And backward movement is restricted. The V winning opening sensor 2603 is not restricted from moving to the right on the connector side, but is restricted from moving to the right by the sensor holding unit 2623 on the detection side, so that it is sufficient for a desired position. Can be positioned to.

On the other hand, on the connector side of the loss opening sensor 2604, the upper surface is in contact with the portion on the right side of the stepped portion in the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660, and the left side surface is in contact with the portion on the right side. It is in contact with a stepped portion (a portion extending vertically) in the sensor contact portion 2665a. Further, the right side surface, the lower surface surface, and the rear surface on the connector side of the loss opening sensor 2604 are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right lower ball path 2676. As a result, the connector side of the loss opening sensor 2604 is restricted from moving upward and to the left by the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is restricted to the right by the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right lower ball path 2676. Movement to the direction, downwards, and backwards is restricted.

In this way, in the installation of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604, the attacker front plate 2620, the V distribution unit 2660 (unit case 2665), and the center right lower ball path 2676 were sandwiched between the three members. Since it is installed in a state and the detection side of the front end is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620, the detection hole can be positioned at a desired position with high accuracy in the same manner as above, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

Since the ring-shaped band holding portion 2676c is provided on the center right lower ball path 2676, the band holding portion 2676c and the binding band CT are used to connect to the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604. A plurality of wiring ECs may be bundled and held.

[5-9d-2i. Second embodiment of the door body in the opening / closing unit]
Next, the guide piece 2636 of the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, the first winning opening door body 2641 of the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, and the second winning opening door of the second winning opening opening / closing unit 2650. The door body 2720 of the embodiment different from the body 2651, the V winning opening door body 2661 of the V distribution unit 2660, and the door body 2701 of the opening / closing unit 2700 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 (a) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section of the door body of a different embodiment applied to the first large winning opening opening / closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory, and FIG. 165 (a) is a plan view of (a). It is explanatory drawing shown by. Here, the door body 2701 will be described by applying it to the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640 in the attacker unit 2600 (replaced with the first prize opening door body 2641), and the same reference numerals will be given to the parts having the same configuration. Moreover, detailed description will be omitted.

The first large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 as an opening / closing unit has a flat plate-shaped door body 2720 that is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat forward through the attacker base plate 2610. This door body 2720 is provided between the base plate main body 2611 of the attacker base plate 2610 and the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620, and the first large winning opening 2006 that opens upward is opened in the front and rear. It can be closed by moving forward and backward. The door body 2720 is the first special symbol or the second special drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005. The first big prize by sliding backward according to the design (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.) or according to the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008. It opens the mouth 2006.

In the attacker unit 2600, a first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2672 on which an LED capable of irradiating light upward is mounted is provided below the first grand prize opening 2006. The LED of the first prize opening decoration substrate 2672 can illuminate and decorate the first prize opening 2006.

The door body 2720 is opaque, colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) and is configured to stand out. As shown in FIG. 165, the door body 2720 has a plurality of openings 2721 penetrating vertically at a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. The opening 2721 is provided at a position away from the rolling region 2722 of the game ball B shown by the crosshatch in FIG. 165 (b) in a state where the first prize opening 2006 is closed. As a result, the plurality of openings 2721 do not come into contact with the game ball B and do not hinder the distribution of the game ball B.

By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine provided with a door body that opens and closes by moving back and forth between the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening, many game balls B circulate on the door body, so that it is wear resistant. Additives have been added for reasons such as increasing the amount of water, and the additives make it substantially opaque. Therefore, even if the light is irradiated from below with the big winning opening or the like closed, the light is blocked by the door body, so that the game ball B rolling on the door body looks dark. There is. On the other hand, there has been proposed an LED that irradiates light forward above and behind the door body so as to illuminate the game ball B on the door body from the rear. However, when the LED is provided above and behind the door body, it is difficult to brightly illuminate the inside of the large prize opening below the door body with the light from the LED. It is necessary to provide an LED to illuminate, and there is a problem that the cost for the pachinko machine increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the flat door body 2720 that can open and close the first prize opening 2006 by moving forward and backward is provided with a plurality of openings 2721 that penetrate vertically. Therefore, when the door body 2720 is advanced and the first prize opening 2006 is closed, the LED of the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672 provided below the first prize opening 2006 is made to emit light. Then, the light radiated upward from the LED can illuminate the inside of the first prize opening 2006 with light emission, and also illuminate the game ball B rolling on the door body 2720 through the opening 2721 from below. be able to. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the game ball B rolling on the door body 2720 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far. It is possible to attract a strong interest, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the plurality of openings 2721 of the door body 2720 illuminate the game ball B on the door body 2720 by the light from the LED of the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672 provided below the first prize opening 2006. Unlike conventional pachinko machines, it is not necessary to install LEDs (decorative substrates) above and below the door body, respectively, and one first major winning opening decorative substrate 2672 inside the first major winning opening 2006. And the game ball B on the door body 2720 can be light-emittingly decorated, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the light from the LED of the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672 is illuminated on the game ball B from below through the plurality of openings 2721 of the door body 2720, the game ball B is used like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared with the case where the light is illuminated from the rear, the light from the LED can be made difficult to reach the eyes of the player directly, and it is possible to reduce the appearance of dazzling light. Further, when the light from the LED reaches the player's eyes directly, it looks dazzling, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to make the game ball B easier to see.

Further, since the door body 2720 is provided with a plurality of openings 2721 that penetrate vertically, dust and dirt that have fallen on the door body 2720 can be discharged downward through the openings 2721, and the door body can be discharged downward. It is possible to prevent dust and dirt on the 2720 from hindering the distribution of the game ball B and the advance / retreat of the door body 2720.

In the above embodiment, the door body 2720 that opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 2006 is provided with a plurality of openings 2721, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second starting opening 2005, the second starting port 2005, the first An opening may be provided in the door body that opens and closes the two major winning openings 2007, the V winning opening 2008, and the like.

[5-9d-3. Unity pedestal]
Next, the binding pedestal 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 171 and the like. FIG. 166 (a) is a perspective view seen from the rear in a state where wiring is omitted in the vicinity of the attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 166 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the binding pedestal disassembled in (a). FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center base of the main body unit and the attacker base plate of the attacker unit and the binding pedestal in the center accessory. FIG. 168 is a six-view view of the binding pedestal. FIG. 169 (a) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from above and front, (b) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from above and rear, and FIG. 169 (c) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal viewed from below and front. Is. FIG. 170 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a main part of the center accessory in a state where a plurality of wires are bundled on the binding pedestal by a binding band, and FIG. 170 (b) shows the binding pedestal separated in (a). It is an exploded perspective view which shows in a state. FIG. 171 (a) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of an embodiment different from the binding pedestal of FIG. 168, and FIG. 171 (b) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of a further different embodiment.

The binding pedestal 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is for holding (supporting) the center accessory 2500 in a state where a plurality of wiring ECs are bundled by using the binding band CT. The binding pedestal 2550 has a flat plate-shaped main body 2551 attached to the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610, an annular band holding portion 2552 protruding from the main body 2551, and a mounting hole 2553 penetrating the main body 2551. And have.

As shown in FIG. 168, the binding pedestal 2550 is formed so that the shape of the main body portion 2551 is chamfered (C chamfered) at an angle of 45 degrees at the upper right corner of a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. A band holding portion 2552 is provided at an upper left portion with respect to the center of the main body portion 2551, and a mounting hole 2553 is provided at the center in the left-right direction below the band holding portion 2552. The annular band holding portion 2552 is provided so that the annular opening faces the main body portion 2551 in the left-right direction. The annular opening of the band holding portion 2552 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long vertically in a side view.

The binding pedestal 2550 has a peripheral wall portion 2554 that protrudes from the main body portion 2551 in the direction opposite to the band holding portion 2552. The peripheral wall portion 2554 includes a left wall portion 2554a extending along the left side of the main body portion 2551 and an upper wall portion 2554b continuous with the left wall portion 2554a and extending along the upper side of the main body portion 2551. The C chamfered wall 2554c, which is continuous with the upper wall 2554b and extends along the C chamfered side of the main body 2551, is continuous with the C chamfered wall 2554c and is constant from the right side of the main body 2551. The right wall portion 2554d extending along the right side at a position separated from the width, the right wall portion 2554d and the left wall portion 2554a are continuous and extend along the lower side at a position separated from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width. It has a lower wall portion 2554e that is exposed, and a concave wall portion 2554f that is recessed in a semi-cylindrical shape about the axis of the mounting hole 2553 in the lower wall portion 2554e.

The left wall portion 2554a of the peripheral wall portion 2554 is recessed so that the vicinity of the portion connected to the lower wall portion 2554e is separated from the left side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width. The distance recessed from the left side of the main body 2551 in the left wall 2554a is a certain width away from the right side of the main body 2551 in the right wall 2554d (distance from the right side of the main body 2551 to the right wall 2554d). Is the same as. The distance of the lower wall portion 2554e from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width is longer than the distance from the right side of the main body portion 2551 to the right wall portion 2554d. More specifically, the lower wall portion 2554e is the distance from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 to a position where the distance from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 is in contact with the side of the mounting hole 2553 close to the lower side of the main body portion 2551. It is almost the same.

The recessed portion of the left wall portion 2554a of the binding pedestal 2550, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e can be brought into contact with the linearly extending wall-shaped or rib-shaped side surface. The binding pedestal 2550 can be non-rotatably attached by abutting the wall-shaped or rib-shaped side surfaces on the recessed portion of the left wall portion 2554a, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e. Further, a cylindrical or semi-cylindrical mounting boss is inserted into the space formed by the concave wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550.

The binding pedestal 2550 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting boss 2515 projecting in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the center base 2511 in the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500. The mounting boss 2515 to which the binding pedestal 2550 is mounted is provided so as to project rearward from the center base 2511 and partially overlap the rib 2516 extending linearly in the left-right direction. Therefore, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the center base 2511 with the outer circumference of the attachment boss 2515 surrounded by the concave wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e along the upper side surface of the rib 2516. Although detailed illustration is omitted, since there is a certain gap between the lower wall portion 2554e and the rib 2516, the binding pedestal 2550 is centered on the axis of the mounting hole 2553 within the range of the gap. It is rotatable as. The mounting boss 2515 of the center base 2511 is provided in advance at various locations. Therefore, the plurality of mounting bosses 2515 may be used or not used depending on the model or the like.

Further, in the attacker unit 2600, the attacker unit 2600 is attached to a mounting boss 2614 protruding from the rear surface of the attacker base plate 2610 in a columnar shape. The mounting boss 2614 to which the binding pedestal 2550 is mounted is provided so as to project rearward from the attacker base plate 2610 and partially overlap the rib 2618 extending linearly in the left-right direction. Therefore, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the attacker base plate 2610 in a state where the outer circumference of the mounting boss 2614 is surrounded by the concave wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e is in contact with the upper side surface of the rib 2618. The mounting boss 2614 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided in advance at various locations. Therefore, the plurality of mounting bosses 2614 are used and not used depending on the model and the like.

The two binding pedestals 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are provided at the boundary between the main body unit 2510 and the attacker unit 2600, at a position close to the inner circumference of the frame of the frame-shaped center base 2511. The two binding pedestals 2550 are provided at relatively close positions, and the respective band holding portions 2552 are attached with the annular opening facing the left-right direction.

Further, the two binding pedestals 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are formed in the same color (transparent here) as the center base 2511 of the main body unit 2510 and the attacker base plate 2610 of the attacker unit 2600. This makes the binding pedestal 2550 inconspicuous when assembled on the game board 5.

As shown in FIG. 170, the binding pedestal 2550 of the present embodiment has a plurality of wiring ECs by tightening together with a plurality of wiring ECs in a state where the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the annular band holding portion 2552. It can be attached to the center accessory 2500 (center base 2511 and attacker base plate 2610) in a bundled state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the plurality of wiring ECs from being separated and protruding into the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the wiring ECs can be seen from the player side and the appearance is deteriorated.

Further, according to the binding pedestal 2550 of the present embodiment, since the wiring EC bundled by the binding band CT is attached to the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610 of the center accessory 2500 via the binding pedestal 2550, the center base Compared with the case where the band holding portion is directly provided on the 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610, it is possible to make it easier to respond to a model change or a design change, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when it is desired to keep the wiring EC away from the center accessory 2500 due to maintenance or the like, the binding pedestal 2550 can be removed to keep the wiring EC away from the center accessory 2500 without cutting the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

More specifically, by separating the binding pedestal 2550 while maintaining the binding state of the plurality of wiring ECs by the binding band CT, the plurality of wiring ECs are bundled from the fixed position (attachment position of the binding pedestal 2550). It is possible to shift. This can produce the following effects. That is, in the past, when checking the installation status of parts behind a plurality of wiring ECs, the plurality of wiring ECs that were bound by the binding band CT at a fixed position are cut one by one by cutting the binding band CT. According to the present embodiment, it was necessary to put the wires in the unbound state and to return the unbound wiring ECs, which were separated one by one after confirmation, to be bound by a new binding band CT at a fixed position. By simply attaching and detaching the binding pedestal 2550, the above-mentioned trouble is eliminated, and it becomes easy to check the installation status of the parts behind the plurality of wiring ECs.

Further, when assembling the game board 5, a plurality of wiring ECs are bundled together with the band holding portion 2552 by the binding band CT in advance and held by the binding pedestal 2550, so that the wiring ECs are less likely to interfere with the assembly. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the plurality of binding pedestals 2550 are mounted relatively close to each other, and the band holding portions 2552 are provided so as not to be positioned on the axis perpendicular to the annular opening. , A plurality of wiring ECs held by a plurality (series) of binding pedestals 2550 are bent in an S shape between the two binding pedestals 2550. As a result, as compared with the case where a plurality of wiring ECs are held linearly between the two binding pedestals 2550, a margin of length is given to the plurality of wiring ECs, so that the temperature, humidity, etc. Even if the wiring EC expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, the expansion and contraction of the wiring EC can be absorbed by the length margin, and the occurrence of problems such as disconnection can be suppressed.

Further, since the wiring EC can be bent in an S shape between the two binding pedestals 2550 to allow a margin in the length of the wiring EC, all the binding pedestals 2550 can be used for maintenance or the like. By removing one binding pedestal 2550 without removing it, the member to which the wiring EC is connected can be separated from the center accessory 2500 to some extent, and the labor required for maintenance and the like can be facilitated. ..

Further, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550 so that the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the rib 2618 of the attacker base plate 2610 come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2554, the binding pedestal 2550 rotates about the axis of the mounting hole 2553. This can be prevented, the wiring EC held by the binding band CT in the band holding portion 2552 can be prevented from changing, and the wiring EC can be maintained at a desired position. It can be continued, and the wiring EC can be made difficult to see from the player side to improve the appearance.

In this embodiment, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the center accessory 2500, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, the attacker, and the like. The wiring EC may be held via the binding band CT.

[5-9d-3a. Another Embodiment of the unity pedestal]
Next, the binding pedestal 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570 of the embodiment different from the binding pedestal 2550 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 171. First, the binding pedestal 2560 shown in FIG. 171 (a) penetrates a rectangular main body 2561 having a vertically long front shape, a plurality of band holding portions 2562 protruding from the main body 2561 in an annular shape, and the main body 2561. It has a mounting hole 2563 and a rectangle.

The main body portion 2561 is formed in a block shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. Two of the plurality of band holding portions 2562 are provided on the front surface of the main body portion 2561 which is the front surface, and one is provided on each of the left and right side surfaces of the main body portion 2561. More specifically, the two band holding portions 2562 on the front surface of the main body portion 2561 are provided with an annular opening facing up and down at the upper part, and the other one having an annular opening below the annular opening in the horizontal direction. It is provided toward. These two band holding portions 2562 are provided on an axis whose center passes through the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the main body portion 2561. The band holding portions 2562 on the left and right side surfaces are provided with an annular opening facing the front-rear direction at the same height as the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface of the main body portion 2561. The mounting hole 2563 is provided in the center of the front surface of the main body portion 2561 in the left-right direction, below the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface of the main body portion 2561.

Although detailed illustration of the binding pedestal 2560 is omitted, the lower surface of the block-shaped main body 2561 is recessed upward at a constant height from the front surface to the rear side with a predetermined distance left, and in the left-right direction thereof. The center of the hole is recessed upward in a semi-cylindrical shape about the axis of the mounting hole 2563. That is, it is formed in the same shape as the lower wall portion 2554e and the concave wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550 of the first embodiment.

The binding pedestal 2560 is bundled by tightening the wiring EC together with the band holding portion 2562 through the band portion CTa of the binding band CT to the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface and the band holding portions 2562 on the left and right side surfaces. The wiring EC can be held in a state of being extended in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the wiring EC is tightened and bundled together with the band holding portion 2562 through the band portion CTa of the binding band CT to the upper band holding portion 2562 on the front surface, the wiring EC is held in a state of being extended in the left-right direction. Can be done.

According to the binding pedestal 2560 of the present embodiment, in addition to the same action and effect as the binding pedestal 2550 described above, one main body portion 2561 has a plurality of band holding portions 2562 having different orientations and positions, so that wiring is performed. It is sufficient to use the band holding portion 2562 according to the handling position and the handling direction of the EC, and the versatility of the binding pedestal 2560 can be further enhanced, and it can be used in various situations.

Next, the binding pedestal 2570 shown in FIG. 171 (b) holds two bands, a main body portion 2571 extending long in a predetermined direction and two bands protruding in the same direction in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2571. It has a portion 2572 and two mounting holes 2573 that penetrate the main body portion 2571 on the outer side in the longitudinal direction from the band holding portion 257 near both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2571.

The binding pedestal 2570 is provided with two band holding portions 257 so that the annular opening faces the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2571. Thereby, by tightening the same wiring EC to each band holding portion 2572 by the binding band CT, the wiring EC can be arranged along the main body portion 2571.

The binding pedestal 2570 of the present embodiment also has the same effect as the binding pedestal 2550 and the binding pedestal 2560 described above, and can also hold the wiring EC along the main body 2571, and the wiring EC can be held by the main body 2571. By hiding the wiring EC, it is possible to make the wiring EC more difficult to see from the player side.

In the above embodiment, the band holding portions 2572 are provided near both ends of the main body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the vicinity of both ends of the main body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the band holding portion 257 may be provided at a portion in the middle of the longitudinal direction.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 2571 extending linearly is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion 2571 extending in an L-shape or a curved shape may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape of the band holding portion such as the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, the band holding portion 2572, the band holding portion 2635c, the band holding portion 2676c, and the band holding portion 2706 is closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an open shape such as the wiring locking portion 1603 may be used. When the band holding portion has a closed shape, it is necessary to fix it with a binding band CT or the like, but the binding band CT does not come off from the band holding portion, and the wiring EC can be reliably bound. On the other hand, when the band holding portion has an open shape, the binding band CT can be easily inserted from the open portion, and workability can be improved.

[5-9e. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 141 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement with the inner rail 1002 are provided. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513 opens toward the upper left near the center of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center base 2511 in the vertical direction. Further, below and to the right of the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513, the entrance of the lower warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left. A wind turbine is provided between the lower warp passage 2512 and the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300.

The game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the upper warp passage 2513 and the lower warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crune 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The game ball B supplied to the crune 2530 turns in the dish-shaped croon 2530 and then is discharged to the lower first taxiway 2521, rolls to the right along the inclination of the first taxiway 2521, and is predetermined. It is distributed to either the first upper start port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 by the center distribution piece 2523 that advances and retreats in the rhythm of. In the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B circulating in the upper warp passage 2513 is distributed to the first upper start port 2004 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2).

The game ball B received in the first upper start port 2004 is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 after being detected by the first upper start port sensor 2524 provided downstream, and the back ball. It is discharged downward via the induction unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first upper start port sensor 2524, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a first special symbol). When the number of holdings is less than 4), a lottery of the first special symbol that enables the generation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B that has entered the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided in the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls left and right on the stage 2514, and is either the central discharge portion 2514a or the side discharge portion 2514b. It is released so as to recirculate into the game area 5a from any of the above. Since the central release portion 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first lower start port 2003, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2514a has a high probability of being the first. It is accepted by the lower start port 2003. The game ball B released from the left and right side discharge portions 2514b of the central discharge portion 2514a is received by the first lower start port 2003 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101 of the start port unit 2100, and the back ball guidance unit of the back unit 3000. It is handed over to the 3100 and discharged downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first lower start port sensor 2101, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a first special symbol). When the number of holdings is less than 4), a lottery of the first special symbol that enables the generation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2514 and not received in the first lower starting port 2003 is received in the out port 2020 (left out port 2020a and right out port 2020b) and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100.

The game ball B, which was driven to the left outside of the center accessory 2500 and did not enter the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512, has a high probability of being a center accessory when it circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine. It flows down to the right along a plurality of obstacle nails arranged diagonally along the lower side of 2500. The game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 provided in the first lower starting port 2003 or the side unit 2200. The game ball B that has not been accepted by the first lower start opening 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 is received by the out opening 2020 (left out opening 2020a and right out opening 2020b) and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

On the other hand, when the turbine circulates on the left side of the center of the wind turbine, it flows down on the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down on the shelf portion 2301 to the right. The game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the left sub-out port 2021a is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. The game ball B that has not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a is received by the left out opening 2020a and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the upper right guide passage group 2541, the gate 2002, the lower right guide passage group 2542, the second starting port 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, the general winning opening 2001, and the first major winning. The port 2006 and the right sub-out port 2021b are provided in order from the top. Multiple obstacle nails are planted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, and between the second prize entrance 2007 and the first prize 2006 on the left side of the general prize entrance 2001. Has been done.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the upper right first guide passage 2541a or the upper right second guide passage 2541b of the upper right guide passage group 2541.

The game ball B, which is hit relatively strongly toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, abuts on the abutment portion 1006 and enters the upper right first guide passage 2541a of the upper right guide passage group 2541. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, and the upper right guide passage group 2541. Enter the second guide passage 2541b on the upper right.

The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right guide passage group 2541 passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is provided with a gate sensor 2501 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and when the gate sensor 2501 detects the passage of the game ball B, a lottery for a normal symbol for opening and closing the second starting port 2005 is executed. Will be done.

The game ball B that has circulated in the upper right guide passage group 2541 circulates in either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 provided downstream thereof. The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right second guide passage 2542b flows down onto the attacker upper shelf 2612 of the attacker unit 2600, enters the attacker right guidance passage 2625 from the attacker upper shelf 2612, and enters the attacker right guidance passage 2625 by the attacker right guidance passage 2625. (Ii) It is guided downstream from the starting port 2005 and the second winning opening 2007. That is, the game ball B that has circulated through the lower right second guide passage 2542b is not accepted by the second starting port 2005 and the second major winning opening 2007 even if they are open.

In addition, the game ball B circulating through the lower right second guide passage 2542b may not flow down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612. On the contrary, the game ball B circulating through the lower right first guide passage 2542a may flow down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612.

The game ball B (the game ball B that did not flow down onto the attacker upper shelf 2612) that circulated through the lower right first guide passage 2542a has a certain probability of being provided in the center on the right side of the attacker upper shelf 2612. It enters the port 2605 and passes in front of the retracting guide piece 2636 in the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630. Therefore, according to the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002 (the normal symbol is "normal hit"), the guide piece 2636 is moving forward and the second starting door body 2631 is moving backward. Occasionally, when the game ball B flows down on the guide piece 2636, it is guided to the left by the guide piece 2636 and is received by the second starting port 2005.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2601, and enters the center upper right ball path 2675. Then, the game ball B that has entered the center upper right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610, handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then back. It is discharged downward from the ball guidance unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a hold of the second special symbol). When the number is less than 4), a lottery of the second special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B that circulates through the lower right guide passage group 2542 and enters the central exit 2605 and is not accepted by the second start opening 2005 and the game ball B that enters the right exit 2606 closes the second major winning opening 2007. It flows down onto the second prize-winning door body 2651. The game ball B that has flowed down onto the second prize opening door body 2651 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and is released from the left end to the left. Therefore, the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and the second special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. Depending on the symbol (for example, when the special symbol drawn is "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.), the second big prize opening door body 2651 retracts and the second big prize If the game ball B passes in front of the second big winning opening door body 2651 when the mouth 2007 is open, the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 is detected by the second major winning opening sensor 2602 provided downstream, and then guided downward to the V winning opening 2008 or lost by the V distribution unit 2660. After being distributed to either of the mouths 2009 and detected by the V winning mouth sensor 2603 or the lost mouth sensor 2604, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and downward. Is discharged to.

When the game ball B is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2602, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. When the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. The privilege to do is given. When the game ball B is detected by the loss opening sensor 2604, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is not given. When the game ball B is detected by the loss opening sensor 2604, a privilege different from that when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 may be given. In the present embodiment, also, does the sum of the number of game balls B detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the loss opening sensor 2604 match the number of game balls B detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2602? We check the integrity of whether or not, and monitor fraudulent activities.

Game ball B that flows down from the lower right guide passage group 2542 to the upper shelf 2612 of the attacker and circulates through the right guide passage 2625 of the attacker, or enters the central exit 2605 or the right exit 2606 and enters the second large winning entrance door body 2651 from above. The game ball B released to the left flows downward while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600. Then, there is a possibility that the attacker unit 2600 will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the right sub-out opening 2021b.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. Further, the game ball B received in the right sub-out port 2021b is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guidance unit 3100. To.

The game ball B that was not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the right sub-out opening 2021b of the attacker unit 2600 is the first large winning opening door body 2641 that closes the first large winning opening 2006 provided on the left side. The upper surface is rolled to the left, is received by the right out port 2020b provided on the left from the left end thereof, and is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

At this time, the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. (Ii) Depending on the special symbol (for example, when the special symbol drawn is "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.), the first big prize opening door body 2641 retracts and the first If the game ball B flows down onto the first large winning opening 2006 when the large winning opening 2006 is open, the game ball B is accepted into the first large winning opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2006 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 3002, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the special symbol of the second special symbol in which the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs, the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004 are the game balls B. The game ball B is accepted in a predetermined pattern only when the normal lottery in which the second starting port 2005 is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate 2002 is "normal hit", while the game ball B is always open so that the game ball B can be accepted. It is possible. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the game ball B will be accepted at the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 than at the second starting port 2005.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is the game ball B so that the player can receive the game ball B at the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004. It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down, and the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails is shown to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the game ball B. At the same time, it is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004.

In the game aiming at the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, in the game aiming at the first upper start port 2004 (upper warp passage 2513), the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 Since it is received by the first upper start port 2004 via the crune 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 and the center distribution piece 2523, the movement of the game ball B in the crune 2530 can be enjoyed and the center distribution piece 2523 can be enjoyed. The player can also be entertained by whether or not the game ball B is released from the crune 2530 at the timing when the game ball B is distributed to the first upper start port 2004.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "hit". When the "big hit", etc.) is drawn, the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes, so that the game ball B is accepted in the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. In addition, it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed"), and at the same time, the game to the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the ball B.

When the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, an upper right guide passage group 2541 composed of an upper right first guide passage 2541a and an upper right second guide passage 2541b, and a gate 2002. And the lower right guide passage group 2542 including the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided, and since they have various flow paths, a desired flow path can be obtained. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B is distributed, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B.

Also. A gate 2002 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a normal lottery lottery is held in which the second starting port 2005 can be accepted by passing through the gate 2002. The player can be entertained by whether or not B passes through the gate 2002, and when the second starting port 2005 becomes acceptable, whether or not the game ball B is accepted by the second starting port 2005. Can also entertain the player.

Further, in the second major winning opening 2007, the accepted game ball B is distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the loss opening 2009, so that the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 wins a V prize. Depending on whether or not the game is distributed to the mouth 2008, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be more entertained.

[5-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The back unit 3000 is received by the vibration sensor 1040 (see FIGS. 173 and 174, etc.) that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) and the general winning opening 2001, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B and the first winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first winning opening 2006 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. I have. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first large winning opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guidance unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back wall 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and the rear wall of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock slider 3020 that is slidable in the left-right direction and for attaching / detaching the effect display device 1600, and a back board unit 3040 that is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 having an L-shaped front view and thin front and rear, and a panel relay board and an effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the substrate box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010 g of the back box 3010 at the tip of an L-shaped portion extending to the left and right.

Further, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) has a functional surface portion 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) or the like. The functional surface portion 3015 is provided in the back box 3010, and the production unit for the back box 3010 (here, the back ball guidance unit 3100, the back front upper production unit 3200, the back front left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400). , Etc.), which can be used for mounting other members such as, lying down with the front side of the back unit 3000 facing downward, lying on the back with the rear side of the back unit 3000 facing upward, etc. Is.

Further, although the details of the back unit 3000 will be described later, a plurality of mounting supporters 3050 for mounting the back rear effect unit 3600 on the back box 3010 and a mounting supporter 3060 for mounting the back right effect unit 3400 on the back box 3010. , Is equipped.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front upper effect unit 3200 provided along the upper side, the back front left effect unit 3300 provided along the left side near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 slightly rearward from the front end. The back right effect unit 3400 provided along the right side, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided in the upper left corner near the rear end in the back box 3010 behind the back front left effect unit 3300, and the back. The rear left effect unit 3500 is attached, and the rear left effect unit 3600 is provided near the rear end in the back box 3010.

The back ball guidance unit 3100, the back front upper effect unit 3200, and the back front left effect unit 3300 are directly attached to the back box 3010. The back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the front surface of the back rear effect unit 3600, and a part of the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060. The back-back effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010, and a part of the back-back effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 via a mounting supporter 3050.

The back front upper effect unit 3200, the back front left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 can be moved in a predetermined manner according to the progress of the game. It is possible to show the effect and the light emission effect to the player.

[5-10a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174 and the like. FIG. 172 is an explanatory view showing a usage state of the wiring locking portion on the rear surface of the game board in a perspective view. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled into the production unit, the mounting supporter, and the back box, and FIG. 174 disassembles the back unit of the game board into the production unit, the mounting supporter, and the back box. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind.

The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. Is. The back box 3010 is formed transparently. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.

The back box 3010 is a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and squarely penetrating the rear wall, and a mounting surface portion 3010b provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is placed. Two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the top in the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the lock slider 3020 provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface portion 3010b to the left and right. It includes a lock mechanism portion 3010d that can be slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3: 4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device (effect display device 1600).

The upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear while the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in the rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in the rear view with the lower fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 inserted in the lock mechanism unit 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1602 from moving backward. Then, the effect display device 1600 can be attached.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear surface around the shaft extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010 g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

In the back box 3010, the back board unit 3040 can be attached to the rear side across the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) by the pair of shaft support portions 3010f and the locking portion 3010g. When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back substrate unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. Further, the L-shaped left and right portions of the back substrate unit 3040 are located below the peripheral control unit 1500.

When the back box 3010 is assembled on the game board 5, the locking claw 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g is released, and the locking claw 3041b is rearward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating the display device 1600 so as to move to, the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the effect display device 1600 can be moved without removing the back board unit 3040 from the back box 3010. It can be attached and detached.

Further, the back box 3010 is provided on the rear surface and has a plurality of wiring locking portions 3011 for locking the wiring EC, and a penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth at the portion where the wiring locking portion 3011 is provided. It has 3012 and. The penetrating portion 3012 of the back box 3010 can pass the wiring EC between the inside and outside of the back box 3010, and when the wiring EC is locked between the wiring locking portion 3011 and the rear surface of the back box 3010, The wiring EC can be bent into the penetrating portion 3012 to release the pressure applied to the wiring EC from the wiring locking portion 3011.

Further, the back box 3010 is provided on a surface facing the front-rear direction excluding the fixed piece portion 3010e, and has a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 in which two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally are set as a set. It has a functional surface portion 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole portion 3013 have the same diameter. The functional hole portion 3013 is for mounting the effect unit directly or via the mounting supporter 3050 or the mounting supporter 3060 to the back box 3010.

[5-10a-1. Wiring locking part]
Subsequently, the wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 will be described in detail. A plurality of wiring locking portions 3011 are provided on the rear surface of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the wiring locking portion 3011 is a straight type in which the wiring locking portion 3011 has a gap in front through which the wiring EC can pass and extends on the same surface as the rear surface of the back box 3010. Wiring locking portion 3011A, L-shaped wiring locking portion 3011B that projects shortly backward from the rear surface of the back box 3010 and then extends parallel to the surface of the back box 3010, shortly backward from the rear surface of the back box 3010. A crank-type wiring locking portion 3011C that is bent in a direction approaching the back surface of the back box 3010 in the middle of extending in parallel with the rear surface of the back box 3010 after projecting, and a short projecting rearward from the rear surface of the back box 3010. The M-shaped wiring locking portion 3011D and the L-shaped wiring locking portion, which extend parallel to the surface of the back box 3010 and are bent so that the tip approaches the rear surface of the back box 3010 and separates from each other, There are opposed type wiring locking portions 3011 and the like that are provided so as to face each other.

The linear type wiring locking portion 3011A is provided near the left and right ends of the portion above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the portion below the opening 3010a on the left side of the locking mechanism portion 3010d in the rear view. Has been done. The wiring locking portion 3011A above the opening 3010a is provided so that the tip extends toward the center side in the left-right direction. Three wiring locking portions 3011A below the opening 3010a are provided side by side, and the tips of the respective wiring locking portions 3011A are upward in the two wiring locking portions 3011A at both left and right ends, and the central wiring locking portion 3011A. Then, it is provided so as to extend downward.

The L-shaped wiring locking portions 3011B are provided near the left and right ends below the opening 3010a, and are provided one on the left side and two on the right side when viewed from the rear. The wiring locking portion 3011B on the left side when viewed from the rear is provided so that the tip of the wiring locking portion 3011B extends to the right. The two wiring locking portions 3011B provided on the right side of the rear view are provided so that the tip of one wiring locking portion 3011B extends to the right, and the tip of the remaining wiring locking portion 3011B extends to the right. The tip of the wiring locking portion 3011B extending to the right is provided so as to extend downward on the left side.

The crank type wiring locking portion 3011C is provided below the opening 3010a at a position to the left in the rear view from the center in the left-right direction. The wiring locking portion 3011C is provided so that the tip of the wiring locking portion 3011C extends downward.

A total of four M-shaped wiring locking portions 3011D are provided below the opening 3010a with a crank-type wiring locking portion 3011C in between, two on each of the left and right sides. Each wiring locking portion 3011D is provided at the same height as the wiring locking portion 3011C so that the tip thereof extends downward. The four wiring locking portions 3011D and one wiring locking portion 3011C are provided at regular intervals in the left-right direction.

The facing type wiring locking portion 3011E is provided so that the gap between the tips provided so as to face each other is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction. The wiring locking portion 3011E is provided above the opening 3010a and below the linear type wiring locking portion 3011A provided near the left end in the rear view. The wiring locking portion 3011E is provided so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction.

The wiring locking portion 3011 includes a claw-shaped hook portion 3011a projecting toward the rear surface side (front) of the back box 3010 at the tip thereof, and a ridge portion projecting shortly from two sides in the longitudinal direction toward the rear surface side (front). It has 3011b and. The tip of the wiring locking portion 3011 is formed obliquely so that the surface (front surface) facing the rear surface side of the back box 3010 is positioned rearward toward the tip including the hook portion 3011a. This makes it easy to insert the wiring EC from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 3011 between the wiring locking portion 3011 and the rear surface of the back box 3010. Further, the wiring locking portion 3011 has a U-shaped cross section due to the two ridge portions 3011b, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced.

In these wiring locking portions 3011, the direction in which the tip extends is the direction in which the wiring EC tends to move when the wiring EC is pulled in a state where the wiring EC is locked and the wiring EC is routed. It is in the opposite direction. As a result, even if the wiring EC is pulled or pulled during assembly or maintenance of the game board 5, the wiring EC moves in the direction opposite to the tip in the wiring locking portion 3011, so that the wiring is locked. The wiring EC does not come off from the unit 3011.

Next, an example of how to use the wiring locking portion 3011 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 172. As shown in the figure, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. After being locked to the wiring locking portion 1603 on the upper right side of the rear view, it is locked to the wiring locking portion 3011 on the right side of the rear view above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and extends upward.

The wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided on the left side of the rear view with respect to the wiring locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600. Further, the tip of the wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 extends to the left in the rear view, whereas the tip of the wiring locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600 extends to the right in the rear view. It is extended. Therefore, when both ends (connector side) of the harness WH1 (plurality of wiring ECs) locked to the wiring locking portion 3011 and the wiring locking portion 1603 are pulled, the harness WH1 becomes the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring clerk. The tip of the stop portion 3011 moves in the direction opposite to the extending direction, and the harness WH1 does not come off from the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, a harness WH2 composed of a small number of wiring ECs (here, two wiring ECs) is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to extend downward. This harness WH2 is locked to the wiring locking portion 1603 at the lower right of the rear view on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600, but goes under the harness WH1 which is bent upward between the two wiring locking portions 1603. It is being routed like this. As a result, the harness WH2 extending downward is provided with a margin in length and is prevented from hanging down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 locked to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are tightened together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT. Is bundled together. At this time, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened with a strength that allows them to slide together with the binding band CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 extend. Since the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a are provided at the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the binding band CT is provided together with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring. It does not come off from the tip of the locking portion 3011.

Here, the binding band CT is a band portion CTa in which a plurality of ridges or grooves are provided at regular intervals in the longitudinal direction in a band shape, and the base end of the band portion CTa is connected and the tip of the band portion CTa is connected. It has a block-shaped lock portion CTb that allows the side to be inserted and prevents the band portion CTa from retreating by using a ridge. The binding band CT makes the band portion CTa loop-shaped (annular) by inserting the tip of the band portion CTa into the inside from the lower surface near the portion where the base end of the band portion CTa is connected in the lock portion CTb. By pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the upper surface of the lock portion CTb, the diameter of the loop formed by the band portion CTa can be reduced. At this time, although not shown, a lock mechanism is provided inside the lock portion CTb to prevent the band portion CTa from moving in the direction of exiting the lock portion CTb, and the band through which the lock portion CTb is inserted is provided. The part CTa does not return (backward).

Therefore, by inserting the tip of the band portion CTa into the lock portion CTb and pulling it so that the band holding portion 2706 and the wiring EC are located in the loop of the band portion CTa, the band portion 2706 and the wiring EC are pulled by the band portion CTa. Can be tightened and maintained in a cohesive state. After tightening with the binding band CT, the portion of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is cut to an appropriate length (for example, 0.5 mm to 2 mm) from the lock portion CTb. As a result, even if the band portion CTa moves in the direction of exiting from the lock portion CTb for some reason, it is possible to prevent the band portion CTa from immediately disconnecting from the lock portion CTa and suppress the occurrence of a defect.

The cable tie CT of the present embodiment is formed in a milky white color having light transmission. The color of the binding band CT may be different depending on the part to be attached, the operator, and the like. For example, if the color of the binding band CT is changed for each worker or cooperating company, it is possible to easily find work omissions in the subsequent process.

As the binding band CT, the band portion CTa is not detachable with respect to the lock portion CTb, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the band portion CTa may be detachable. If the binding band CT is removable, it can be reused even after it is removed, so that the amount of waste can be reduced.

On the rear side of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 172, the binding band CT is attached in a state where the lock portion CTb is in contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with a portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. In other words, the binding band CT is attached so that the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are located between the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb. As a result, since the lock portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to facilitate the binding work and confirmation of binding by the binding band CT. In addition, the work of cutting the binding band CT can be facilitated. Further, as will be described in detail later, since the contact of the lock portion CTb with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 can be avoided, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 bound by the binding band CT can be attached to the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring staff. It can be protected by the stopper 3011.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, the member (rear case) on which the wiring locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600 is formed and the back box 3010 are transparently formed, so that the wiring locking portion 1603 The portion of the wiring locking portion 3011 supported by the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized from the outside (rear) through the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not all the wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled by the binding band CT, and the binding work by the binding band CT is easy. can do.

Further, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT is attached so that the binding band CT (the band portion CTa of the band portion CTa) is in oblique contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. As a result, the contact area can be widened, and the frictional resistance is increased to make it difficult to move (slide), as compared with the case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. can do.

Further, as shown in the figure, in the binding band CT in which the harness WH1 is bundled with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa is that of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It is installed so as to extend diagonally with respect to the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached in a cross-shaped manner. As a result, in a state where the harness WH1 is bundled with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is changed to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion. When the binding band CT is tilted so as to approach the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of 3011, the tightening by the band portion CTa can be loosened, and the harness WH1 is connected to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking together with the binding band CT. The portion 3011 can be easily slid in the longitudinal direction. Further, when the binding band CT is returned to the inclined state after sliding, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 can be tightened to return to the original difficult-to-slide state.

By the way, although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 locks the binding band CT in which the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It protrudes rearward from the portion CTb. As a result, during the assembly work of the game board 5, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with the rear surface facing down, the peripheral control board box 1520 comes into contact with the workbench, so that the lock portion of the binding band CT The workbench does not come into contact with the CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transfer work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520, so that the other game boards 5 are brought into contact with the lock portion CTb. Does not come into contact. Therefore, due to the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520, it is possible to prevent other members such as the work table and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the damage of the lock portion CTb, causing a problem.

Further, although not shown, in the state where the game board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, other members, such as the wiring EC connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, the game ball B, etc., become the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT. Contact (contact) can be prevented by the back cover 640, and when other members or the like come into contact, the tightening of the band portion CTa by the lock portion CTb is released, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected to the wiring locking portion. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being disengaged from the 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem caused by the binding band CT. Further, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of the tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the lock portion CTb should be used. Can be done.

In the above embodiment, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are shown to be transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the wiring EC can be seen through even if it is translucent or opaque. It may have a visible light transmittance. Alternatively, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 may not have opaque light transmission.

Further, although not shown, a portion of the harness WH1 that is separated from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 (for example, a portion between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011) is specifically bound. You may bundle them in a band. As a result, even in the portion between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 in the harness WH1, the harness WH1 is bundled with a specific binding band, so that a plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 are formed. It can be suppressed over the entire length of the harness WH1 that the harnesses are separated one by one. Here, the specific binding band has a different name from the above-mentioned binding band CT, but the difference in usage is clarified, and the specific binding band has the same configuration (structure) as the binding band CT.

As described above, according to the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT of the present embodiment, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, first, in a conventional pachinko machine, a harness composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is exposed on the rear surface of the back box. Then, since there is a possibility that a problem may occur when the exposed harness comes into contact with other members, a plurality of harness support portions for supporting the harness are provided so that the harness is along the rear surface of the back box. .. The harness support portion of such a conventional pachinko machine extends along the rear surface of the back box and has a rod-shaped or strip-shaped portion having one end as a free end, and the back box is formed from the free end side. It is supported by inserting a harness between the harness and the harness support. However, in the conventional harness support portion, the harness or the wiring EC constituting the harness may come off, which may cause a problem.

In response to such a problem, in the present embodiment, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are bundled together with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs by tightening with a binding band CT. In the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the wiring ECs are not separated from the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 one by one, and some of the separated wiring ECs are separated from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking. It is possible to prevent the wiring from coming off from the portion 3011, and it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being easily disconnected from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 while being bundled by the binding band CT, they are hidden by the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. When you want to check the members, the wiring ECs are not bundled by the binding band CT. Conventionally, the wiring ECs are moved (sliding) one by one from the harness, but multiple wiring ECs (harness WH1 and harness WH1) are used at once. The harness WH2) can be slid, the confirmation work can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Further, since the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the harness is provided from the open free end side of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily inserted, and the workability can be improved. At this time, since the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a protruding toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are provided at the tips of the wiring lock portion 1603 and the wiring lock portion 3011, the binding band CT is used. When the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 to form a bundle, the binding band CT is combined with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 to form the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion. Even if it slides in the direction of the free end of 3011, further sliding is prevented by abutting against the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 1603 together with the binding band CT. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent the wiring locking portion 3011 from coming off from the tip thereof and can surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the binding band CT is composed of the band portion CTa and the lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, can be inserted in only one direction, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring By simply inserting the locking portion 3011 and the tip of the band portion CTa wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened. It can be locked in a closed state, and the workability of the binding work of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be improved. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, for some reason, the binding band CT is placed around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. Even if a rotating force acts, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, so that the binding band CT is in contact with the shaft core of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to prevent the cable tie from rotating around, and the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb can be prevented from coming into contact with other members, resulting in a defect. It can be prevented from becoming a cause.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the parts of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent features are obtained. It can exert an action effect. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, it protrudes from the lock portion CTb. It is necessary to pull the tip of the band portion CTa in the direction of the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010, and the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010 becomes an obstacle and the binding work becomes difficult. On the other hand, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the opposite side, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are brought into contact with each other by the binding band CT. When bundling, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side, and if the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is pulled away from the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010, the wiring locking portion 1603 or The wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be tightened, and the workability can be further improved.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, as described above, the lock portion CTb Is facing the worker side, so it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to check the work.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are interposed between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It can be a blocking wall that blocks things from happening. As a result, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled and bundled, the wiring ECs of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 come into contact with the lock portion CTb. If this is the case, a part of the wiring EC may be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa to which the wiring EC is pulled, and the insulating coating of the wiring EC may be broken. On the other hand, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the opposite side, that is, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are interposed between them, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) are not in contact with the lock portion CTb, so that the band portion through which the lock portion CTb is inserted is inserted. Even if the tip of the CTa is pulled, a part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa, and the insulation coating of the wiring EC can be prevented from being torn. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 that have been made.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the parts of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, maintenance and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed. Therefore, when the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 is removed from the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011, the cutting work of the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be facilitated. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator side, a cutting tool such as a nipper is guided along the lock portion CTb to damage other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without the band portion CTa.

Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 projecting rearward from the binding band CT are provided as the protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT is provided. For some reason, other members hit the binding band CT under various circumstances such as assembling, transporting, installing, and installing in the game hall of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). It is possible to prevent contact with each other, prevent damage to the binding band CT (lock portion CTb), and prevent the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. be able to. Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect the other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to the other members due to the contact of the binding band CT can be prevented. It can be avoided and the occurrence of defects can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 can surely prevent the other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, the other members come into contact with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb) for some reason. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the damage of the lock portion CTb. Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 can prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, it is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged by the contact with the binding band CT. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

Further, in the state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear part of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in the island equipment of the game hall, other members, books, etc. The back cover 640 prevents other members such as the wiring EC and the game ball B connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side from contacting (contacting) the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by releasing the tightening of the band portion CTa by the locking portion CTb due to contact with other members or the like. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of defects caused by the binding band CT. Further, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of the tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the lock portion CTb should be used. Can be done.

Further, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the binding band CT is provided as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the back box 3010 provided with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 is provided. When the other member moves from the rear toward the rear, the other member comes into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protective portion before the other member comes into contact with the binding band CT, and the other member further comes into contact with the binding band CT. It is possible to prevent the movement toward the binding band CT and prevent the contact of other members with the binding band CT. Therefore, since it is possible to avoid contact (contact) of other members with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb), the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT due to the contact with the other members and the like. The regulation is not lifted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect caused by the binding band CT. Further, since the peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protective unit for protecting the binding band CT, even if another member approaches the game board 5 from behind beyond the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 for some reason. As described above, since the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the binding band CT is further present, the binding band CT can be doubly protected.

Further, as a protective unit for protecting the binding band CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the binding band CT is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 provided with the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with the rear surface facing down during the assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 comes into contact with the workbench, so that the lock portion of the binding band CT The workbench does not come into contact with the CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transfer work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520, so that the other game boards 5 are brought into contact with the lock portion CTb. Does not come into contact. Therefore, due to the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520, it is possible to prevent other members such as the work table and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the damage of the lock portion CTb, causing a problem.

Further, since the rear surface and the back box 3010 of the effect display device 1600 are made transparent and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are visually supported by the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the wiring is locked from the outside. Since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 supported through the portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized, all the wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled by the binding band CT and moved. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the wiring is regulated, it is possible to prevent the shipment of defective products in which some wiring ECs are disconnected, and it is easy to confirm the binding band CT in maintenance and the like. can do.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, it is possible to easily perform the binding work of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

Further, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the transparent wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT is made milky white with low light transmission, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are made visible. Since the colors are different from those of the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the above (for example, gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.), the harness WH1 is passed through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. When looking at the band portion CTa of the harness WH2 (plural wiring EC) and the binding band CT, it is possible to clearly see that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the binding of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be surely confirmed, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound by the binding band CT. It can be easy.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is made to come into contact with the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, there is a case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In comparison, the contact area can be widened, and the frictional resistance between the binding band CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or harness WH2 can be increased. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be sufficiently regulated, and the harness WH1, the harness WH2, and the wiring EC can be prevented from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Can be avoided.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. Depending on the strength, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate at an early stage, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuit may easily occur. On the other hand, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, the band portion CTa is wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction and brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. The contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 (wiring EC) can be widened as compared with the case of doing so. Therefore, even if the binding band CT is tightened with the same strength, the force acting by the tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small by making the contact at an angle to widen the contact area. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and the occurrence of problems such as electric leakage and short circuit can be suppressed.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a strip shape, the harness WH1 and the harness together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided by the binding band CT. When the WH2 is bundled, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 have a width, so that the band portion CTa of the binding band CT automatically and diagonally contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs are bundled by a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled. It is possible to prevent the plurality of constituent wiring ECs from being separated one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and to avoid contact with other members of the separated wiring ECs. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled and bound at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the specific binding band, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move in the longitudinal direction for some reason. When pulled, the lock portion of the specific binding band comes into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT as the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move, and the specific binding band further increases the number. The movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be prevented.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs are bound by a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the outer periphery of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 is circular. A plurality of wiring ECs are gathered so as to approach the above, and the band portion of the specific binding band extends in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be compactly bundled at the portion of the specific binding band, so that the parts provided behind the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the portion of the specific binding band provided at the portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the direction in which the band portion of the specific binding band is orthogonal to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (longitudinal direction). It extends to. On the other hand, in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend with respect to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be different between the portion of As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by confirming the position and number of the band portion CTa and the band portion in the extending direction, it is easy to confirm whether or not the work is carried out according to the work manual. Can be confirmed in. In this case, the color of the binding band CT of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 may be different from that of the specific binding band, so that the binding work can be easily confirmed. it can.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, there is a case where the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are rod-shaped. In comparison, the contact area between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be increased, so that the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to exert the action and effect of the binding band CT as the movement regulating means, and it is possible to reliably regulate the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 and further avoid the occurrence of defects.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are used in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Since the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the wiring can be easily spread so as to line up along the surfaces of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, it is possible to easily dissipate heat from the wiring EC. At this time, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be connected to the wiring locking portion 1603. It can be easily confirmed one by one through the wiring locking portion 3011 and the wiring locking portion 3011.

Further, as shown in the enlarged cross-sectional view of the main part of FIG. 172, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 have a ridge portion 1603b and a protrusion protruding forward from two sides extending in the longitudinal direction thereof. Since the strip portion 3011b is provided, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are brought into contact with the ridge portion 1603b and the ridge portion 3011b. In other words, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided with recesses for avoiding contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, when the binding band CT is used for tightening and binding, a force acts on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT to the entire width of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Since it can be avoided, the force acting on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be adjusted, and the early deterioration of the insulating coating in the wiring EC can be suppressed.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided with the ridge portion 1603b and the ridge portion 3011b, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened by the binding band CT, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are configured. The insulating coating of the wiring EC is easily bitten into the corner sides of the ridge portion 1603b and the ridge portion 3011b. As a result, resistance can be applied to the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the longitudinal direction, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made difficult to move in the longitudinal direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the penetrating portion 1604 that penetrates the rear surface of the portion facing the wiring locking portion 1603 on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 and the wiring locking portion 3011 in the back box 3010 are opposed to each other. Penetration portions 3012, which penetrate the front and back, are provided in the respective portions. In other words, the main body portion provided with the harness support portion for locking the wiring EC, the harness WH1 and the like such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 (here, the effect display device 1600 and the back box). In 3010), the binding band CT in which the wiring EC, the harness WH1 and the like are bundled together with the harness support portion at the portion of the main body portion facing the portion extending along the surface of the main body portion of the harness support portion. However, a contact avoidance portion (corresponding to the penetration portion 1604 and the penetration portion 3012 in the present embodiment) is provided to prevent the contact with the main body portion.

In this way, a contact avoidance portion for avoiding contact with the binding band CT is provided at a portion of the main body portion facing the harness support portion such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Therefore, it is possible to easily insert a plurality of wiring ECs, harnesses WH1 and binding band CTs between the main body portion and the harness support portion, and workability can be improved. Further, the binding band CT that binds the harness WH1 or the like to the harness support portion is prevented from coming into contact with the surface of the main body portion, that is, the binding band CT is not in contact with the main body portion, so that the harness WH1 And the trouble with the harness support can be reduced.

More specifically, when the binding band CT comes into contact with the main body, a force always acts on the harness support portion in the direction away from the main body via the wiring EC, the harness WH1 and the like and the binding band CT. Therefore, the force acting on the harness support portion from the main body portion may cause the harness support portion to become fatigued and damaged at an early stage. Further, since the force acting from the main body portion to the harness support portion also acts on the wiring EC, the harness WH1, etc., the insulating coating is deteriorated at an early stage due to the constant force acting on the insulating coating of the wiring EC. There is a risk of electric leakage or short circuit. In response to such a problem, in the present embodiment, since the contact avoidance portion is provided in the main body portion, a force acts from the main body portion on the harness support portion, the harness WH1 bundled by the binding band CT, and the like. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to reduce problems such as early damage to the harness support portion and electric leakage or short circuit in the harness WH1 or the like.

It should be noted that, as the contact avoidance portion, in the present embodiment, the one that penetrates the surface of the main body portion (the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 and the rear surface of the back box 3010) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be recessed from the surface of the main body.

In the above embodiment, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound together by the binding band CT in the wiring locking portion 1603 provided on the rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wiring EC and the harness are bound together by the binding band CT in the wiring locking portion provided in the effect unit having the decorative body or the movable decorative body. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the binding band CT is wound around (binding) the harness support portion such as the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 together with the harness such as the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. By doing so, we have shown something that prevents the harness from coming off from the harness support, but it is not limited to this, and a hook-and-loop fastener type band may be used, or a vinyl tie may be used. , A harness clip may be used, a spiral tube may be used, a high friction resistance portion may be provided on the harness support portion, or an adhesive portion may be provided on the harness support portion. good.

[5-10a-2. Functional surface]
Next, the functional surface portion 3015 of the back box 3010 will be described in detail. The functional surface portion 3015 is also used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3015 is provided inside the outer peripheral edge of the back box 3010 and behind the fixed piece portion 3010e for mounting the back box 3010 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The functional surface portion 3015 is formed so that the front surface side and the rear surface side are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. The functional surface portion 3015 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front.

Since the functional surface portion 3015 can bring a predetermined member into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, an intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member such as a workbench or a mounting table on the front surface side of the functional surface portion 3015. The upper end of the surface may be brought into contact with the surface. At this time, the intermediate member is longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the front surface of the back unit 3000 (here, the back ball guidance unit 3100, the back front upper effect unit 3200, and the back front left effect unit 3300). It is protruding. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed (laid face down) on a predetermined member with the front side facing down, the back unit 3000 is placed with the front side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member into contact with the front surface of the functional surface portion 3015, the back unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member in a state where the front surface of the back unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member. Can be placed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent scratches on the front surface of the back unit 3000 due to contact with a predetermined member, maintain the back unit 3000 in a good state, and generate defective products (defective products) due to scratches. This can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. The intermediate member may be a separate member separated from the predetermined member.

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3015 can prevent the front surface of the back unit 3000 from coming into contact with the predetermined member, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) holding the effect unit is placed face down. Therefore, it is possible to perform mounting work and wiring work of other members such as the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 on the rear side of the back box 3010.

Further, since the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3015, the effect is as compared with the case where the functional surface portion 3015 is provided in the production unit such as the back front upper effect unit 3200 or the back front left effect unit 3300. The back box 3010 can be laid face down even when the unit is not held. Therefore, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be laid face down even during assembly, and various working states (working modes) can be supported.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 can bring a predetermined member into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, an intermediate portion protruding from the predetermined member such as a workbench or a mounting table on the rear surface side of the functional surface portion 3015. The upper ends of the members may be brought into contact with each other. At this time, the intermediate member projects longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, when it is desired to place the back unit 3000 on a predetermined member with the rear surface side facing downward (putting it on its back), the back unit 3000 is placed with the rear surface facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015, the back unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member in a state where the rear surface of the back unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member. Can be placed.

Therefore, the back unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member on its back in a state where the upper surface of the intermediate member is brought into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015 so that the predetermined member does not come into contact with the rear surface of the back unit 3000. Therefore, when assembling, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be stabilized in a state of lying on its back, and the assembly work from the front end side of the back box 3010 can be easily performed. it can.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided in a portion recessed from the front surface to the rear of the back box 3010, a portion projecting forward or backward (for example, the back box) is provided at least a part of the peripheral edge of the functional surface portion 3015. Since it has a side wall of 3010), it is possible to regulate the relative movement of the functional surface portion 3015 and the upper surface of the intermediate member or the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member depending on the portion. As a result, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be made difficult to move when the back unit 3000 is placed face down or laid on its back via the functional surface portion 3015, and the assembly work and the like can be made easier.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided with a part of the plurality of functional hole portions 3013, the positioning can be determined by providing the intermediate member with a positioning pin that can be inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013. The back unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down or laid on its back via the functional surface portion 3015 can be restricted from moving in a direction along the surface of a predetermined member, and has the same effect as described above. be able to.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 in the front view, the back unit 3000 is placed face down or on its back on a predetermined member such as a workbench or a mounting table via an intermediate member. At that time, the back unit 3000 can be in a stable state, and it is possible to prevent the back unit 3000 from tilting and contacting the front surface of the effect unit or the like with a predetermined member.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3015 hits the game panel 1100 when the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem.

In the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3015 is shown as a flat surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the functional surface portion may be "rearly conical or conical". "Curved surface recessed in a truncated cone shape", "Multi-faceted portion recessed in a polygonal pyramid shape or a truncated cone shape backward", "Curved surface portion protruding forward in a truncated cone shape or truncated cone shape", "Forward It may be a multi-faceted portion protruding in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated cone, or the like. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or a multi-faceted portion as described above, it is desirable that the upper end surface of the intermediate member has a shape that imitates the functional surface portion. Thereby, the relative movement of the functional surface portion (back box 3010) and the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be regulated.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3015, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect unit and the ball guiding member for guiding the game ball B attached to the back box 3010 are not limited to this. Etc. may be provided. For example, the end surface of the drive motor or solenoid of the effect unit, the tip surface of the ball guiding member, or the like may be used as the functional surface portion.

[5-10b. Mounting supporter]
Next, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 177. FIG. 175 (a) is a six-view view of the mounting supporter in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the mounting supporter of (a). It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 176 is a perspective view showing a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from that of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175, and FIG. 176 is a main part of the mounting supporter having a different main body shape in the mounting supporter of (a). Is an explanatory view showing a perspective view, and FIG. 3C is an explanatory view showing a main part of a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of (a) in a perspective view as viewed from behind. FIG. 177 (a) is a perspective view of a mounting supporter having a form different from that of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175 as viewed from the front left, (b) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a), and (c) is (a). ) Is a perspective view seen from the front right, and (d) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter (a) seen from the back.

FIG. 178 is an enlarged view of a portion of the mounting supporter as a main part in a state where the back box is transparent, and is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 179 (a) is a photograph of the portion of the mounting supporter of FIG. 175 in the back unit as viewed from behind, and FIG. 179 (b) is a photograph of the portion of the mounting supporter of FIG. 177 in the back unit as viewed from behind. In FIG. 178, the back box 3010 is shown by a broken line, and the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are shaded in order to enlarge the main part.

In the present embodiment, the back-back effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 by the mounting supporter 3050, and the back-right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 by the mounting supporter 3060.

First, the mounting supporter 3050 will be described. As shown in FIG. 175 and the like, the mounting supporter 3050 is provided apart from the block-shaped main body 3051, the first mounting hole 3052 penetrating the main body 3051, and the first mounting hole 3052. It has a protruding pin 3053 that protrudes rearward from the portion 3051, a boss portion 3054 that protrudes forward from the main body portion 3051 in a columnar shape, and a second mounting hole 3055 that penetrates the boss portion 3054. are doing. The mounting supporter 3050 is colored in a color different from that of the back box 3010 (here, black).

The main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 is formed in a front view shape in which the left side of a rectangle long to the left and right is a semicircle in contact with the upper side and the lower side. The main body 3051 is formed so that the right side from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the left side. The rear surface of the main body 3051 is formed flat, whereas the front surface is formed in a stepped manner so that the front surface is recessed rearward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. The main body portion 3051 has a piece portion 3051a thinner than the left side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. Further, the base portion of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body portion 3051 is recessed so as to surround the outer circumference of the protruding pin 3053 (has an annular groove portion).

The first mounting hole 3052 is provided coaxially with the center of the semi-circular arc on the left side in the front view of the main body 3051, and penetrates the main body 3051 in the front-rear direction. The first mounting hole 3052 is provided with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back box 3010.

The projecting pin 3053 projects rearward in a columnar shape at a portion of the main body portion 3051 that is behind the one portion 3051a. The tip of the protruding pin 3053 is formed in a hemispherical shape. The distance between the shaft core of the protruding pin 3053 and the shaft core of the first mounting hole 3052 is the same as the distance between the shaft cores of the two through holes in the back box 3010. Further, the protruding pin 3053 has the same diameter of the cylinder as the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back box 3010, and can be inserted (or press-fitted) into the functional hole portion 3013.

The boss portion 3054 protrudes (extends) in a columnar shape from a portion of the main body portion 3051 to the right of the center in the left-right direction (a portion closer to the protrusion pin 3053 side). The front surface of the boss portion 3054 is shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3051. The diameter of the cylinder of the boss portion 3054 is the same as the distance from the upper side to the lower side of the main body portion 3051. Therefore, the boss portion 3054 is in contact with the upper side and the lower side of the main body portion 3051.

The second mounting hole 3055 penetrates back and forth to the boss portion 3054 and the main body portion 3051 at the center of the cylinder of the boss portion 3054. The diameter of the second mounting hole 3055 is the same as the diameter of the first mounting hole 3052.

In this mounting supporter 3050, a protruding pin 3053 is inserted from the front into one of the two through holes constituting the functional hole portion 3013 of the back box 3010, and the first mounting hole 3052 is coaxially above the remaining through holes. It is attached to the back box 3010 by screwing a mounting screw into the first mounting hole 3052 from the rear of the back box 3010 through the through hole and tightening the mounting screw. Since the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 has a flat piece 3051a at a portion in front of the protruding pin 3053, when the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is inserted into the functional hole 3013, The protruding pin 3053 can be easily inserted into the functional hole portion 3013 by the operator pressing the one portion 3051a with a finger or the like.

Then, the base of the effect unit is brought into contact with the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 mounted on the back box 3010, and the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3055 through the base from the front, thereby mounting the mounting supporter 3050. The effect unit can be mounted in the back box 3010 via.

Specifically, the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 formed of two through holes. Further, the back-rear effect unit 3600 mounted in the back box 3010 has a square frame-shaped unit base 3601, and mounting holes are provided at the upper and lower sides of the frame-shaped unit base 3601. Then, among the plurality of functional hole portions 3013 provided in the back box 3010, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached from the front to the functional hole portion 3013 at a position corresponding to the mounting hole of the unit base 3601.

After mounting the mounting supporter 3050 on the back box 3010, the back-back effect unit 3600 is inserted into the back box 3010 so that the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 and the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050 are matched. In the present embodiment, a recess into which the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be inserted is formed at the portion of the mounting hole to be mounted on the mounting supporter 3050 in the unit base 3601, and the tip of the boss portion 3054 is inserted into the recess. By inserting the unit base 3601, the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 and the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be easily matched.

When the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 of the back-rear effect unit 3600 and the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050 are matched, the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3055 from the front of the unit base 3601 and tightened. As a result, the back-rear effect unit 3600 can be mounted in the back box 3010.

In the above, an example is shown in which the mounting supporter 3050 is mounted on the back box 3010 and then the back rear effect unit 3600 is attached to the mounting supporter 3050, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit base of the back rear effect unit 3600 is not limited to this. After mounting the mounting supporter 3050 on 3601, the mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the back box 3010.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the mounting supporter 3050 is mounted on the functional hole portion 3013 provided in advance in the back box 3010 and used is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when assembling the game board 5. In addition, two through holes for mounting the mounting supporter 3050 may be formed at a predetermined position on the back box 3010, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted in the through holes.

Further, in the above embodiment, the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 3051 to be shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in the mounting supporter 3050, the boss portion 3054 may be long protruding (extending) forward. As a result, by preparing a mounting supporter 3050 having boss portions 3054 of various lengths in advance, it is possible to respond to various design changes and model changes, and it is provided near the front end of the back box 3010. The effect unit and the like can also be attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050.

Further, as the mounting supporter 3050, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the main body portion 3051 may be enlarged to increase the contact area with the back box 3010 (functional hole portion 3013). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), instead of the protruding pin 3053, another first mounting hole 3052 is added, and the two first mounting holes 3052 are used to use the back box 3010 (functional hole portion 3013). It may be attached to. According to these, even if a heavy effect unit or the like is attached or the boss portion 3054 is projected for a long time, the force acting on the attachment portion of the attachment supporter 3050 with the back box 3010 (functional hole portion 3013) is increased. , The effect unit, etc. can be installed in good condition. That is, it is possible to cope with a heavy effect unit or the like, or an effect unit or the like that requires a long boss portion 3054 by being provided at a position away from the functional hole portion 3013.

Further, in the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3050 is mounted on the back box 3010, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, or the like.

As described above, according to the mounting supporter 3050 of the present embodiment, even if the back box 3010 is not provided with a mounting boss for mounting a production unit such as the back-rear effect unit 3600, the mounting supporter 3050 can be simply installed. A mounting boss for mounting the effect unit or the like can be provided at a desired position on the back box 3010. In other words, a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 composed of two through holes are provided in advance in the back box 3010, and are attached to the functional hole portion 3013 of the portion corresponding to the attachment hole of the effect unit such as the back-rear effect unit 3600. By attaching the supporter 3050, a mounting boss for mounting the effect unit can be provided on the back box 3010. Therefore, even if the part of the back box 3010 to which the production unit or the like is mounted changes due to a design change or a model change, the production unit or the like can be changed by simply changing the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3050 without recreating the back box 3010. Since it can be attached, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, and it is possible to divert the back box 3010, so that an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the mounting supporter 3050 of the present embodiment is colored in a color different from that of the back box 3010, it becomes conspicuous when mounted on the back box 3010. Therefore, when assembling the game board 5, the inside of the back box 3010 is used. The position of the mounting supporter 3050 can be easily recognized by the operator, and the position of the mounting supporter 3050 (mounting boss) can be easily understood. It can be easy to do. In the present embodiment, since the back box 3010 is transparent, the mounting supporter 3050 can be visually recognized from the outside of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 178 and 179 (a)).

Further, since the production unit or the like such as the back-rear production unit 3600 is mounted in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, a certain gap is formed between the production unit or the like and the back box 3010. It is possible to make it easier for heat and the like to escape due to the gap. Further, since the effect unit or the like is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, it is possible to reduce the transmission of vibration between the effect unit or the like side and the back box 3010 side by the attachment supporter 3050. Become.

Further, since the production unit or the like such as the back-rear effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 having the boss portion 3054, the effect unit or the like can be attached to the back box 3010 to the unit base of the effect unit or the like. It is not necessary to provide a mounting boss that protrudes rearward, and the thickness of the unit base in the front-rear direction can be made relatively thin, and the depth of carving of the mold for molding the unit base can be made shallow. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the unit base.

By the way, when the mounting supporter 3050 of the present embodiment is formed by injection molding or the like, R is likely to be attached to the root of the protruding pin 3053, and the root of the protruding pin 3053 becomes thicker due to the R. Then, when an attempt is made to insert the protrusion pin 3053 into the functional hole portion 3013 of the back box 3010 with an R attached to the root, the thickened portion of the root cannot enter the functional hole portion 3013 and protrudes. The insertion of the pin 3053 may stop in the middle, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the back box 3010 in a state where the protruding pin 3053 is incompletely inserted. If the protrusion pin 3053 is incompletely inserted, the positioning effect of the back-rear effect unit 3600 mounted by the mounting supporter 3050 cannot be sufficiently exerted, so that the above-mentioned action and effect cannot be obtained. There is a fear.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove portion is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050, the root of the protruding pin 3053 is the groove portion in front of the rear surface of the main body portion 3051. Even if it becomes the bottom and has an R at the base of the protruding pin 3053, the portion of the protruding pin 3053 behind the rear surface of the main body 3051 does not become thicker, and the thickness (diameter) of the effective range of the protruding pin 3053 can be adjusted. The protrusion pin 3053 can be completely inserted into the functional hole portion 3013 until the front surface of the back box 3010 comes into contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3051. Further, even if burrs are generated on the front end edge of the functional hole portion 3013 of the back box 3010, the burrs are accommodated in the groove portion, so that the burrs are sandwiched between the back box 3010 and the main body portion 3051. This can be avoided and the protruding pin 3053 can be completely inserted into the functional hole 3013. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert the positioning effect when the back-rear effect unit 3600 by the protruding pin 3053 is attached, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, even if the base of the protruding pin 3053 has an R, the portion thickened by the R can be moved to the front of the rear surface of the main body 3051 due to the presence of the groove, so that the base of the protruding pin 3053 is thickened. There is no gap between the back box 3010 and the main body 3051 due to the incomplete insertion into the functional hole 3013 due to the formed portion. Further, since the burr generated at the front end edge of the functional hole portion 3013 can be accommodated in the groove portion, the burr at the portion of the first mounting hole 3052 of the main body portion 3051 between the back box 3010 and the main body portion 3051. There is no gap in the space. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3050 is not mounted on the back box 3010 with a gap between the back box 3010 and the main body 3051, and is mounted on the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050. The production unit such as the back-and-forth production unit 3600 does not rattle.

Further, since a groove is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 on the rear surface of the main body 3051, the molten resin is formed due to the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of the protruding pin 3053 on the main body 3051 during injection molding of the mounting supporter 3050. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks on the front surface side of the main body 3051 when the resin is cured.

Next, the mounting supporter 3060 will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 and the like, the mounting supporter 3060 has a main body portion 3061 having a predetermined length, a first mounting hole 3062 penetrating back and forth near both ends of the main body portion 3061 in the longitudinal direction, and a length of the main body portion 3061. Two protruding pins 3063 that are separated from each other in the direction and project from the rear surface of the main body 3061 to the rear in a columnar shape, and a second mounting hole 3064 that penetrates back and forth near both ends of the main body 3061 in the longitudinal direction. Have. The mounting supporter 3060 is colored in a color different from that of the back box 3010 (here, black).

The main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has two block-shaped heads 3061a provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a strip-shaped back connecting piece 3061b that connects the rear ends of the two heads 3061a. A strip-shaped side connecting piece 3061c extending forward along one long side of the back connecting piece 3061b and connecting the two head portions 3061a, and a back connecting piece 3061b and a side connecting piece. It has a triangular rib piece 3061d, which is connected to the 3061c and is provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction (four in this case). The side connecting piece 3061c is provided along the left side of the back connecting piece 3061b in the front view. The main body 3061 has an L-shaped cross section orthogonal to the longitudinal direction by the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c, and has a plurality of triangular rib pieces 3061d. Therefore, the strength and rigidity are increased, making it difficult to bend.

The two first mounting holes 3062 are near the ends of the head portion 3061a on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3061 on the back connecting piece 3061b side, and the side connecting pieces 3061c with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is provided in the part closer to the right (to the right). The two first mounting holes 3062 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the main body 3061. The first mounting hole 3062 is provided with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back box 3010. The distance between the two first mounting holes 3062 is relative to the four functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010, which are arranged at equal intervals in the direction in which the main body 3061 straddles and the two through holes are separated. , The distance between the through holes on both outer sides of the two functional holes 3013 on the side close to each other is the same.

The two projecting pins 3063 project in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the back connecting piece 3061b in the main body 3061 to the rear. The tip of the protruding pin 3063 is formed in a truncated cone shape. Further, the protruding pin 3063 has the same diameter of the cylinder as the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back box 3010, and can be inserted (or press-fitted) into the functional hole portion 3013. The two protruding pins 3063 are provided on the same straight line connecting the two first mounting holes 3062. The distance between the two protruding pins 3063 is the same as the distance between the through holes on the far sides of the two functional holes 3013 near the center of the four functional holes 3013 that the main body 3061 straddles in the back box 3010. is there.

The two second mounting holes 3064 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3061 at positions outside the first mounting holes 3062, and are provided at the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The second mounting hole 3064 penetrates in the front-rear direction in the head portion 3061a of the main body portion 3061. The diameter of the second mounting hole 3064 is the same as the diameter of the first mounting hole 3062.

The mounting supporter 3060 is a functional hole portion of a portion of a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 provided in the back box 3010 in which four or more functional hole portions are arranged at equal intervals in the direction in which the two through holes are separated from each other. It is attached to 3013.

The mounting supporter 3060 has two protruding pins from the front in two through holes on the two functional holes 3013 near the center of the four functional holes 3013 arranged in a row in the back box 3010, which are separated from each other. 3063 are inserted respectively. At this time, since the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has a flat back connecting piece 3061b at a portion in front of the protruding pin 3063, the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is inserted into the functional hole 3013. When the operator presses the back connecting piece 3061b with a finger or the like, the protruding pin 3063 can be easily inserted into the functional hole portion 3013.

In this mounting supporter 3060, when two protruding pins 3063 are inserted into the through holes of the two functional holes 3013, the two first mounting holes 3062 are the through holes of the functional holes 3013 at both ends of the four functional holes 3013. It becomes a state that matches with. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3060 can be mounted on the back box 3010 by screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the first mounting hole 3062 that coincides with the through hole from the rear of the back box 3010.

Then, the base of the effect unit is brought into contact with the front end of the head portion 3061a of the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 mounted on the back box 3010, and the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3064 from the front through the base. The effect unit can be mounted in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060.

Specifically, the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 composed of two through holes, and two through holes are vertically separated from each other in the vicinity of both left and right ends, and two through holes are provided. A plurality of (here, four or more) functional hole portions 3013 are provided at equal intervals in the direction in which the holes are separated (vertical direction). Further, the back right effect unit 3400 has a unit base 3401 made of a metal plate. The unit base 3401 has a flange portion 3401a whose front end side is bent to the right after being bent forward from the left side, and the flange portion 3401a is provided with a mounting hole penetrating back and forth. .. Then, the mounting supporter 3060 is attached from the front to the four functional holes 3013 arranged vertically along the right side in the front view of the back box 3010.

After mounting the mounting supporter 3060 on the back box 3010, the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400 is brought into contact with the front surface of the mounting supporter 3060 (main body portion 3061) from the front. Then, with the mounting hole of the flange portion 3401a aligned with the second mounting hole 3064 of the mounting supporter 3060, the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3064 from the front through the mounting hole to tighten. As a result, the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 in the back right effect unit 3400 can be attached to the back box 3010.

In the above description, an example is shown in which the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted on the back box 3010 and then the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 in the back right effect unit 3400 is mounted on the mounting supporter 3060, but the present invention is not limited to this. The mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted on the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400, and then the mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted on the back box 3010.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted on the functional hole portion 3013 provided in advance in the back box 3010 and used is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when assembling the game board 5. In addition, a through hole for mounting the mounting supporter 3060 may be formed at a predetermined position on the back box 3010, and the mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted in the through hole.

Further, in the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 is shown in which the main body 3061 extends linearly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body 3061 is L-shaped, frame-shaped, or circular. It may extend into an arc shape, a curved shape, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted on the back box 3010 by using a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 each of which is composed of two through holes, and each of the functional hole portions 3013 used has two. Only one of the through holes is used. That is, in the functional hole portion 3013 composed of two through holes, one through hole is not used. For this reason, in the above embodiment, the functional hole portion 3013 is shown to be composed of two through holes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the functional hole portion 3013 composed of one through hole may be used. ..

As described above, according to the mounting supporter 3060 of the present embodiment, even if the back box 3010 is not provided with a mounting boss for mounting a directing unit such as the back right directing unit 3400, the mounting supporter 3060 can be simply mounted. A mounting boss for mounting the effect unit or the like can be provided at a desired position on the back box 3010. In other words, a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 composed of two through holes are provided in advance in the back box 3010, and a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 in a portion corresponding to the mounting holes of the effect unit such as the back right effect unit 3400. By mounting the mounting supporter 3060 on the back box 3010, a mounting boss for mounting the effect unit can be provided on the back box 3010. Therefore, even if the part of the back box 3010 to which the production unit or the like is mounted changes due to a design change or a model change, the production unit or the like can be changed by simply changing the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3060 without remaking the back box 3010. Since it can be attached, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, and it is possible to divert the back box 3010, so that an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the mounting supporter 3060 of the present embodiment is colored in a color different from that of the back box 3010, it becomes conspicuous when mounted on the back box 3010. Therefore, when assembling the game board 5, the inside of the back box 3010 is used. The position of the mounting supporter 3060 can be easily recognized by the operator, and the position of the mounting supporter 3060 (mounting boss) can be easily understood. It can be easy to do. In the present embodiment, since the back box 3010 is transparent, the mounting supporter 3060 can be visually recognized from the outside of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 178 and 179 (b)).

Further, since the production unit or the like such as the back right production unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, a certain gap is formed between the production unit or the like and the back box 3010. It is possible to make it easier for heat and the like to escape due to the gap. Further, since the effect unit or the like is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, it is possible to reduce the transmission of vibration between the effect unit or the like side and the back box 3010 side by the attachment supporter 3060. Become.

Further, since the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted on the back box 3010 so as to straddle the plurality of functional holes 3013, the back box 3010 (or the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400) can be reinforced by the mounting supporter 3060. ..

The mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are provided with a band holding portion protruding in an annular shape and a wiring locking portion extending in a rod-shaped or strip-shaped shape for holding the wiring EC. You may. In this case, as described above, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 form a certain gap between the effect unit and the back box 3010. Therefore, by arranging the wiring EC in the gap, the wiring EC is improved. It becomes possible to handle it.

Further, in the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 of the above embodiment, the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 are provided at different positions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 may be provided coaxially, respectively. As a result, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 can be made smaller or simpler.

Further, in the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 of the above embodiment, the shaft core of the first mounting hole 3052 and the shaft core of the second mounting hole 3055, the shaft core of the first mounting hole 3062 and the shaft of the second mounting hole 3064 The cores and the cores are shown to extend in the same direction (parallel), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the directions in which the cores of the second mounting holes are different from the shaft cores of the first mounting holes are shown. It may be suitable. This makes it possible to mount the effect unit on the mounting supporter from a wider variety of directions.

[5-10c. Back front top production unit]
Subsequently, the back front upper effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 and the like. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from behind. is there. The back front upper effect unit 3200 is provided along the upper side in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front upper effect unit 3200 has three transparent plates, a back front upper first decorative plate 3201, a back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and a back front upper third decorative plate 3203, which are arranged at intervals in the front-rear direction. It has a decorative plate (see FIG. 144). The three decorative plates are provided in front of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 at the retracted position in the back-rear effect unit 3600, which will be described later, and the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 can be visually recognized from the front through each decorative plate.

The three decorative plates, the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, are long flat plates on the left and right, and the plate surfaces are provided in the front-rear direction. Has been done. On the back surface of each decorative board, the same logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is carved in a streak pattern. The logo is also provided on the back-rear upper decorative body of the back-rear effect unit 3600, and the back-front upper third decorative plate 3203 is provided with a logo of the same size as the logo of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650. ing. The back front upper second decorative plate 3202 has a logo larger than the logo of the back front upper third decorative plate 3203. Further, the back front upper first decorative plate 3201 is provided with a logo larger than the logo of the back front upper second decorative plate 3202. As a result, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective in which the characters of the logo increase from the rear to the front (see FIG. 197).

The back front upper effect unit 3200 supports the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, and the unit base 3204 attached to the back box 3010. The unit base 3204 is provided with light toward the upper end surfaces of the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203. It further includes a back front upper decorative substrate 3205 on which a plurality of possible LEDs are mounted.

The back front upper effect unit 3200 appropriately emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper decorative substrate 3205, thereby causing the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper decorative plate 3202. The light incident on the inside from the upper end surface of each of the upper third decorative plate 3203 is diffusely reflected at the portion of the streak-shaped logo on which the logo is applied, so that the logo can be made to emit light.

Although not shown, specific characters are used among the logos on the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, respectively. The formed streaks are colored by an inkjet printing machine from the rear, and the light from the LED of the back front upper decorative substrate 3205 can give off a glossy shine.

[5-10d. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184 and the like. FIG. 182 (a) is a front view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a back front left effect unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from the above, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left effect unit cut along the server line in (a). FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left effect unit disassembled in the back unit and viewed from behind. is there. The back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided along the left side in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010.

The back front left effect unit 3300 has a back front left decorative body 3301 and a back front left decorative body 3301 in which a sheet-like material having a predetermined character pattern in accordance with the concept of the game board 5 is three-dimensionally formed. A transparent decorative body cover 3302 provided in front of the back front left decorative body 3301 formed along the surface of the back front left decorative body 3301, and a back front left decorative body 3301 provided behind the back front left decorative body 3301. A transparent inner lens 3303 formed along the surface of the back box, a unit base 3304 that supports the back front left decorative body 3301, the decorative body cover 3302, and the inner lens 3303 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a unit. It is provided between the base 3304 and the inner lens 3303, and is provided on the left side of the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 and the decorative body cover 3302 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the left side surface of the decorative body cover 3302, and the substrate base 3307 in which the back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 is attached to the unit base 3304. It has a sheet-shaped back front left back decorative sheet 3308 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3304 and having a predetermined character on the rear surface, and a magnetic sensor 1030 attached to the unit base 3304. There is. The magnetic sensor 1030 of the back front left effect unit 3300 is for detecting an illegal magnetism acting near the entrance of the lower warp passage 2512 and the upper warp passage 2513 in the center accessory 2500.

The back front left decorative body 3301 has translucency. The back front left decorative body 3301 is made of polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. A sheet of such a thermoplastic resin, in which a color pattern composed of a predetermined character is applied by silk printing, offset printing, inkjet printing, or the like, is three-dimensionally formed by pneumatic molding or vacuum molding.

On the rear surface of the decorative body cover 3302, a streak-shaped groove 3302a is formed at a position along the contour of the character in the back front left decorative body 3301. When the light from the plurality of LEDs of the back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 is irradiated to the left side surface of the decorative body cover 3302 and enters the inside, the light guided inside is diffusely reflected forward at the portion of the groove 3302a. The groove 3302a can be made to emit light. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the contour portion of the predetermined character in the back front left decorative body 3301 emits light. The decorative body cover 3302 is formed by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin that is thicker than the material (sheet) of the back front left decorative body 3301.

The inner lens 3303 is formed to have a predetermined thickness and to follow the three-dimensional shape of the back front left decorative body 3301. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 provided at the rear can be refracted in an appropriate direction according to the shape of the back front left decoration body 3301. The rear surface can be irradiated with light having shading (shading) so as to correspond to the character. As a result, when the back front left decorative body 3301 is light-emitting and decorated by the plurality of LEDs of the rear back front left main decorative substrate 3305, the inner lens 3303 irradiates the shaded light, so that the back front left The three-dimensional effect of the pattern (character) of the decorative body 3301 can be further enhanced. In addition, the gap in the appearance of the back front left decorative body 3301 depending on the presence or absence of LED light emission of the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 can be increased, and the effect of the light emission effect can be further enhanced, and the player's effect can be further enhanced. It can attract a strong interest and suppress the decline in interest in the game. The inner lens 3303 is formed by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin like the decorative body cover 3302.

The unit base 3304 has a flat rear surface and has an opening 3304a penetrating the front and rear. When the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 attached to the rear surface is peeled off, the opening 3304a presses the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 backward from the front through the opening 3304a with a worker's finger or the like. It is possible to easily peel off the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 without using a tool. Further, the opening 3304a can release heat from the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 to the rear when the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is not attached due to a difference in model or the like. The unit base 3304 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

The back front left main decorative substrate 3305 is composed of two substrates, a first substrate 3305a and a second substrate 3305b. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surfaces of the first substrate 3305a and the second substrate 3305b, respectively. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 are made to emit light, the back front left decorative body 3301 can be made to emit light through the inner lens 3303.

The back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 is composed of three substrates, an upper substrate 3306a, a middle substrate 3306b, and a lower substrate 3306c. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light to the right are mounted on the upper substrate 3306a, the middle substrate 3306b, and the lower substrate 3306c, respectively. When a plurality of LEDs of the back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 are made to emit light, the groove 3302a of the decorative body cover 3302 can be made to emit light, and the outline of the character in the back front left decorative body 3301 corresponding to the groove 3302a is emitted and decorated. Can be made to.

The back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is printed on the back surface with a pattern different from that of the back front left decorative body 3301. That is, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is provided toward the rear, and is provided invisible within the projection range of the back front left effect unit 3300 in the front view.

In the state where the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface is separated forward by a predetermined distance near the left end on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It is located at the site (see FIGS. 145, 197, etc.). Therefore, when viewed from the front, the pattern on the back surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and appears to be reflected (the reflection pattern 3310 can be seen). When a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen of the device 1600 and the display screen is bright, the reflection of the pattern is canceled by the brightness, and the reflected pattern 3310 is hardly visible. Then, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened to some extent like a blackout, the pattern on the back surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the reflection pattern 3310 can be seen. (See Figure 197). As a result, during the execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, the pattern on the back surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is displayed on the display screen by darkening or intentionally darkening the display screen. Since it is possible to show the player the effect of seeing the reflection pattern 3310 in the reflection, the player can be surprised by the faintly visible reflection pattern 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, something is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the pattern on the back surface of the back front left decorative sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decorative body 3301, the following effect can be exhibited. More specifically, in the normal state where the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, only the character (picture) having a predetermined expression of the back front left decorative body 3301 can be seen, and the back front left decorative body 3301 On the right side, the reflected pattern 3310 in which the characters (pictures) with different facial expressions of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 are reflected on the display screen cannot be seen. Then, when the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, the character of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 with a different facial expression from the back front left decorative body 3301 is reflected on the right side of the back front left decorative body 3301. Since the 3310 can be seen, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the face behind the character can be seen, and it is possible to entertain the player with the gap in the facial expression of the character. If this effect is performed, for example, before the jackpot game is executed, the effect can make the player strongly think that it may be a "loss", and then the player becomes a "big hit". You can surprise and enhance your interest.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, light is displayed on the display screen (front) of the effect display device 1600 from between the back front left effect unit 3300 and the effect display device 1600. When the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 can be sufficiently darkened, and the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be made difficult to enter. The pattern of the above can be easily reflected, and the reflected pattern (reflection pattern 3310) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be easily seen from the player side, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the reflective pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 reflected on the display screen can be seen faintly. By shortening the time for darkening the display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, depending on the player, the reflection pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be noticed. As a result, the player can make the player grin or be surprised by noticing that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, which makes the player feel like he has gained. Can entertain the player.

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, thereby pachinko. Since the reflection pattern 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be seen from the front of the machine 1, the positional relationship between the effect display device 1600 and the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308). Depending on the situation, it may be difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the reflected back front left back decorative sheet 3308, and the player sitting in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or the pachinko machine may be difficult to see. It is possible for the player in the vicinity of 1 to easily see the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the players can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 is selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to make it easier to play, and it is possible to entertain the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, the display screen is displayed only by the right eye of the left and right eyes of the player sitting in front. It is possible to hide the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 that has been crowded. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be seen only by the right eye, so the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is visible. Can be shown in an uncertain state, and a phantom-looking effect can be presented to the player, and the eerie feeling of the effect can be amplified to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the back box 3000 and the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back box 3000, the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet). Since the distance between the 3308) and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction can be made as long as possible, the back front left back decorative sheet reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. The pattern of 3308 can be made easy to see. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the effect of the above-mentioned effects on the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. it can.

In the above embodiment, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is projected with the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 in the back front left effect unit 3300 to be shown to the player in front. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a reflector made of a transparent sheet, a transparent plate, a magic mirror, or the like may be provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened in the same manner as described above, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be easily reflected on the reflector. The above-mentioned action and effect can be more easily achieved. In this case, the reflector may be tilted or curved so that the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the reflector. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 as it is. Even if a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED capable of irradiating light from the rear is provided on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300. Good (see Figure 197 (see b)). As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the light emitting means 3320 is made to emit light to brighten the back front left back decorative sheet 3308, thereby making the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 brighter than the display screen. Since it can be reflected, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be made more visible, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of more exerting the above-mentioned effects can be provided. ..

When the liquid crystal display device 1600 is used as the effect display means as in the present embodiment, a glossy liquid crystal is preferable to a non-glare liquid crystal. By using the glossy liquid crystal, the reflective pattern 3310 can be made more visible, and the pachinko machine 1 that easily exerts the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

[5-10e. Back right production unit]
Subsequently, the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 and the like. The back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the front surface of the back rear effect unit 3600, and a part thereof is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060. The back right production unit 3400 has a unit base 3401 made of long metal plates at the top and bottom, three back upper right decorative bodies 3402 attached to the unit base 3401 and imitating lanterns, a back right middle decorative body 3403, and a back right lower right. It has a decorative body 3404, a back upper right decorative body 3402 attached near the upper end of the unit base 3401, a back right middle decorative body 3403, and a back right drive motor 3405 for moving the back right lower decorative body 3404. are doing.

The unit base 3401 has a flange portion 3401a whose tip is bent to the right after extending forward at the central portion in the vertical direction on the right side. The upper end and the lower end of the unit base 3401 are attached to the front surface of the back-rear effect unit 3600, respectively, and the flange portion 3401a is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060.

The back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are arranged in a vertical direction and are three-dimensionally formed to imitate a lantern, and each has the same size. Is formed in. The back right middle decoration body 3403 is composed of two back right middle left decoration bodies 3403a and a back right middle right decoration body 3403b with the center in the left-right direction as a boundary. A plurality of LEDs on the front are mounted behind each of the back right middle decoration body 3402, the back right middle left decoration body 3403a, the back right middle right decoration body 3403b, and the back right lower decoration body 3404. The decorative substrate is provided.

Although detailed illustration of the back right effect unit 3400 is omitted, the upper right arm whose lower end is rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction near the center in the vertical direction of the unit base 3401 and extends upward. And the upper connection base that is rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the upper right arm, and the upper end around the axis in the front-rear direction at the part to the left of the upper end of the upper right arm in the upper connection base. The upper left arm, which is rotatably supported and extends downward, and the lower right, whose upper end is rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction and extends downward below the upper right arm. The arm, the lower connecting base that is rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the lower right arm, and the lower end of the lower right arm at the portion to the left of the lower end of the lower right arm in the lower connecting base. The lower left arm, which is rotatably supported around and extends upward, and the lower end of the upper left arm and the lower end of the lower left arm are separated from each other in the vertical direction. It has a medium connection base that is rotatably supported.

The upper right arm has an upper right lower gear provided at the lower end and an upper right gear provided at the upper end. The upper left arm has an upper upper left gear provided at the upper end and meshing with the upper upper right gear of the upper right arm, and an upper left lower gear provided at the lower end. The lower right arm has a lower upper right gear provided at the upper end and meshing with the upper right lower gear of the upper right arm, and a lower right lower gear provided at the lower end. The lower left arm is a lower left lower gear that is provided at the lower end and meshes with the lower right lower gear of the lower right arm, and a lower upper left gear that is provided at the upper end and meshes with the upper left lower gear of the upper left arm. And have. As a result, a pantograph-like link is formed by the unit base 3401, the upper right arm, the upper left arm, the lower right arm, the lower left arm, the upper connecting base, the lower connecting base, and the middle connecting base.

The back upper right decorative body 3402 is attached to the front surface of the upper connecting base, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 is attached to the front surface of the lower connecting base. The back right middle left decorative body 3403a of the back right middle right decorative body 3403 is attached to the front surface of the middle connecting base, and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b covers the upper right lower gear and the lower upper right gear from the front. It is mounted on the front of the unit base 3401.

In the back right effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b are in contact with each other in front of the unit base 3401, and the back right middle left decorative body 3402 and the back upper right decorative body 3402 are in contact with each other. The right middle decorative body 3403 and the back right lower right decorative body 3404 are arranged in a straight line in the vertical direction.

When the back right effect unit 3400 is rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3405 from the normal state when the upper end side of the lower right arm is rotated clockwise in front view, the middle connection base moves to the left and the upper side is moved upward. The connecting base and the lower connecting base move in the vertical direction so as to approach each other while moving to the left. As a result, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a of the back right middle decorative body 3403 moves to the left away from the back right middle right decorative body 3403b, and the back upper right decorative body 3402 is shorter than the back right middle left decorative body 3403a. As it moves to the left, it moves slightly downward, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 moves to the left and slightly upward in the same manner as the back upper right decorative body 3402.

In this state, the upper right arm, the upper left arm, the lower right arm, and the lower left arm form a rhombus with each side as each side, and the upper right decorative body 3402 and the lower right back decoration are placed at the upper and lower vertices of the rhombus. The body 3404 is located, and the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b are located at the left and right vertices of the rhombus. As a result, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are in a state of appearance positions approaching the center side of the game area 5a (effect display device 1600) (FIG. 198). See).

According to the back right effect unit 3400, when the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are moved from the normal evacuation position to the appearance position, the decorative bodies are near the center. Move (appear) to. At this time, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404, which were arranged in a straight line vertically, and the back right middle decorative body 3403 are the back right middle left decorative body 3403a. And the back right middle right decoration body 3403b, and the back right middle right decoration body 3402, the back right middle left decoration body 3403a, the back right middle right decoration body 3403b, and the back right lower right decoration body 3404 are diamond-shaped. Because it transforms into a form placed at the apex of the, it can surprise the player, draw the player's attention strongly to those ornaments, and there is something better with the appearance of the ornaments. It is possible to make people think that it is, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

[5-10f. Back left production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 to 181 and the like. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 is attached near the upper part of the portion forming the left side of the frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the back-rear effect unit 3600. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 is attached to the back-rear left decorative body 3501 having transparency imitating the cutting edge of Nata and the frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the back-rear effect unit 3600, and the back-rear left decorative body 3501 is attached. It has a back rear left base 3502 that supports it, and a back rear left drive motor 3503 that is attached to the back rear left base 3502 and for moving the back rear left decorative body 3501.

Further, although detailed illustration of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is omitted, the rotation base and the rotation base, whose base end side is rotatably attached to the back rear left base around an axis in the front-rear direction, are A link arm and a link arm whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rotation base at different positions around the axis in the front-rear direction and whose tip end side is slidably attached to the rotation base in the longitudinal direction. A second shaft that is slidably attached to the rotating base so that it protrudes outward from the tip of the rotating base by sliding the tip, and the back left decorative body is parallel to the rotating surface of the rotating base at the tip. A slide base that is rotatably attached to the circumference, and a base end side that is rotatably attached to the rotation base around an axis parallel to the second axis, and the tip side is attached to the back rear left decorative body 3501. It has an inclined arm that is rotatably attached around an axis parallel to the second axis, and a return spring that urges the back rear left decorative body 3501 in a direction approaching the rotation base. ..

The rotation base is bent in a dogleg shape, and the base end side is rotated by the back rear left drive motor 3503. The rotating base has a bending slit that is bent in a dogleg shape so as to follow its shape. The tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the bending slit. The slide base has a straight slit extending parallel to a straight portion of the bent slit near the proximal end side. The tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the straight slit. The slide base is rotatably attached around the second axis at the end portion (near the right end in the front view) opposite to the cutting edge in the back rear left decorative body 3501 that imitates the cutting edge of Nata. The tilting arm is provided so that the tip end side extends away from the tip end of the slide base with the base end side in between, and extends toward the base end side of the rotating arm. The return spring is a coil spring, and is attached to the proximal end side of the rotating arm so that the proximal end side extends to the distal end side of the rotating arm rather than the portion to which the tilting arm is rotatably attached. It is attached to the back left decorative body 3501.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 is positioned so that the rotation base extends upward in a normal state, and the back rear left decorative body 3501 attached to the tip side of the rotation base is the back rear left decorative body 3501. The cutting edge is facing downward. In this normal state (retracted position), the back-rear left decorative body 3501 is the back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front left effect unit 3300, and the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 of the back-rear effect unit 3600. , Are located behind each, and are invisible from the front. Further, the front surface of the back rear left decorative body 3501 is parallel to the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

In a normal state, when the rotation base is rotated clockwise around the base end side by the back rear left drive motor 3503, the back rear left decorative body 3501 on the front end side moves to the right and downward. Rotate to do so. Further, by rotating the rotation base in the clockwise direction, the tip of the link arm slides the bending slit and the straight slit toward the tip side to the bent portion of the bending slit. In this state (state of the first appearance position), substantially the entire back rear left decorative body 3501 is located to the right of the back front left decorative body 3301 and below the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and is visible to the player. However, a part of the imitated cutting edge is located behind the back front left decorative body 3301 and below the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and the overall shape is unclear. (See Figure 199). That is, it is difficult to recognize that the back left decorative body 3501 is the cutting edge of Nata. Even in the state of the first appearance position, the front surface of the back rear left decorative body 3501 is parallel to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the whole is located behind the back rear upper decorative body 3650.

Then, when the rotation base is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the tip of the link arm enters the bent tip side of the bending slit, but the slide base in which the tip of the link arm is also inserted. In the straight slit of No. 1, since the straight slit is not bent, the tip of the link arm presses the slide base through the straight slit in the direction in which the bent tip side of the bending slit extends. As a result, the slide base slides so that its tip protrudes outward with respect to the rotating base.

When this slide base is moved so as to project outward from the tip of the rotating base, the back rear left decorative body 3501 is rotatably attached to the slide base around the second axis, so that the slide base is rotatably attached together with the slide base. The back left decorative body 3501 moves outward (here, to the right) from the tip of the rotation base. At this time, since the back rear left decorative body 3501 is connected to the rotating base by an inclined arm, when the back rear left decorative body 3501 moves to the right together with the slide base, the back rear left decorative body 3501 is decorated. Since the right end side (second axis) of the body 3501 is moved away from the base end side of the tilt arm, the tip side of the tilt arm and the left end side of the back rear left decorative body 3501 are forward against the urging force of the return spring. The back left decorative body 3501 rotates around the second axis so as to move to. As a result, the left end side of the back rear left decorative body 3501 protrudes forward to a position substantially the same as the back front left decorative body 3301 in front of the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and the entire body can be seen from the player side. It is in the state of the second appearance position (see FIG. 200).

In the state of the second appearance position, the front surface of the back rear left decorative body 3501 is slanted with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the cutting edge of the nata imitated by the back rear left decorative body 3501 is , It seems that it is protruding diagonally forward from the display screen of the production display device 1600.

According to the back-rear left effect unit 3500, the back-rear left decorative body 3501 that cannot be seen in a normal state can be visually recognized in two stages. The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. Then, when moving to the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body 3501 that has moved (rotated) in parallel with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the tip (left end) of the cutting edge protrudes forward. Because it moves, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that has never been seen on a pachinko machine so far, and it can have a strong impact on the player, and there may be something good. It can be strongly reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

[5-10 g. Back-to-back production unit]
Subsequently, the back-rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 185 to 196 and the like. FIG. 185 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 186 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 186 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing the unit base side, the back rear upper decorative body, and the back rear lower decorative body from the front in the back rear effect unit, and FIG. 188 shows the unit base side and the back of the back rear effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the back by disassembling the rear upper decorative body and the back rear lower decorative body. FIG. 189 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear upper decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front in the back-rear effect unit, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view seen from. FIG. 190 (a) is an explanatory view showing a locking mechanism in the locked position state in the back rear upper decorative body, and FIG. 190 (b) is a perspective view showing the locking mechanism in the unlocked position state in the back rear upper decorative body. It is explanatory drawing shown by.

FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 193 is an explanatory view showing wiring arrangement on the rear surface of the back rear lower decorative body of the back rear effect unit. FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotating decorative body in the back rear lower decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 (b) disassembles the first rotating decorative body in the back rear lower decorative body. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 195 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the back-back upper decorative body is moved to the drop position. FIG. 196 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the back-rear upper decorative body and the back-rear lower decorative body are moved to the central position.

The back rear effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end in the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050. The back-back effect unit 3600 consists of a square frame-shaped unit base 3601 that is slightly smaller than the inner circumference of the back box 3010, and a pair of long columnar columns that are provided in front of the unit base 3601 near both the left and right ends. A guide shaft 3602, a back-rear upper decorative body 3650 whose left and right ends can be raised and lowered by a pair of guide shafts 3602, and a pair of guide shafts 3602 that raise and lower both left and right ends below the back-back upper decorative body 3650. It has a back-back lower decorative body 3700, which is supported as much as possible.

Further, the back-rear effect unit 3600 has a lock groove 3603 in which the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the back-rear upper decoration 3650 is locked near the right end of the upper side of the square frame-shaped unit base 3601. have. The lock groove 3603 is provided so that the shape of the front view is quadrangular and is recessed from the front to the rear. The lock groove 3603 is provided on the left side of the guide shaft 3602 on the right side (the right side of the unit base 3601). Further, the back-rear effect unit 3600 has a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting the vibration acting on the game board 5. The vibration sensor 1040 is provided at a portion of the unit base 3601 on the upper side from the center in the left-right direction to the right.

Further, the back-rear effect unit 3600 has a rotation slit 3604 that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the center of the lower side of the square frame-shaped unit base 3601 in the left-right direction and extends long in the left-right direction. The other end side of the unit arm 3788 in the back rear lower decorative body 3700, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the rotation slit 3604.

Further, the back-rear effect unit 3600 is provided on the right end side of the unit base 3601 and has a right elevating mechanism 3610 for raising and lowering the back-rear upper decorative body 3650, and is provided on the left end side of the unit base 3601 and is provided on the back rear It has a left elevating mechanism 3630 for elevating and lowering the lower decorative body 3700.

The right elevating mechanism 3610 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the unit base 3601 to form a spiral groove, and is screwed onto the right spiral shaft 3611 and the right spiral shaft 3611. The right elevating slider 3612 that moves up and down by the rotation of the unit base 3601, the back right lower right drive motor 3613 that is provided in the lower right corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the right spiral shaft 3611 around its axis, and the vicinity of the upper right corner of the unit base 3601 Auxiliary upper slider 3614 provided so as to be slidable within a predetermined range in the vertical direction, an auxiliary lower slider 3615 provided slidably in the vertical direction by the unit base 3601 below the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and an auxiliary upper slider 3615. The upper and lower ends are locked to the slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615, and the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 are urged in the direction of approaching each other. It has a right elevating first sensor 3617 and a right elevating second sensor 3618 that detect the elevating position of the right elevating slider 3612.

The right elevating slider 3612 of the right elevating mechanism 3610 can come into contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 from below, and also hits the auxiliary lower slider 3615 from above. It is accessible. The right elevating slider 3612 can move (elevate) the back rear upper decorative body 3650 in the vertical direction. The auxiliary upper slider 3614 can be brought into contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 from above. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 can be brought into contact with the lower end of the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and can be brought into contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 from below. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 is provided so as to be movable below the lower moving end of the right slide support portion 3652c of the back rear upper decorative body 3650. The auxiliary spring 3616 enables the right slide support portion 3652c of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 to be urged downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and the right slide of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615. The support portion 3652c can be urged upward.

The right elevating first sensor 3617 of the right elevating mechanism 3610 is for detecting that the back rear upper decorative body 3650 has moved to the retracted position via the right elevating slider 3612, and the right elevating second sensor 3618 is This is for detecting that the back rear upper decorative body 3650 has moved to the center position via the right evacuation slider 3612.

The left elevating mechanism 3630 is screwed onto the left spiral shaft 3631 and the left spiral shaft 3631, which extend vertically from the vicinity of the lower end of the unit base 3601 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction and have a spiral groove formed therein. The left elevating slider 3632 that moves up and down by the rotation of the left spiral shaft 3631, the back rear lower left drive motor 3633 that is provided in the lower left corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the left spiral shaft 3631 around its axis, and the unit base 3601. It has a left elevating sensor 3634 that detects the elevating position of the left elevating slider 3632, and a left rack gear 3635 that is provided on the unit base 3601 and extends up and down along the left spiral shaft 3631. There is.

The left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 has a rear surface of the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 attached to the front surface thereof. With this left elevating slider 3632, the back rear lower decorative body 3700 can be moved (elevated) in the vertical direction. The left elevating sensor 3634 is for detecting that the back rear lower decorative body 3700 has moved to the retracted position via the left elevating slider 3632. The left rack gear 3635 is provided with the tips of its gear teeth facing to the right, and the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 in the back rear lower decorative body 3700 meshes with the left rack gear 3635. The left rack gear 3635 can rotate the first rotating decorative body 3710 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 via the pinion gear 3768.

[5-10g-1. Back and top decorations]
Subsequently, the back-back upper decorative body 3650 of the back-back effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. The back-rear upper decorative body 3650 of the back-rear effect unit 3600 is supported above the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is made movable in the vertical direction by the right elevating mechanism 3610. By moving (falling) downward, the back-back upper decorative body 3650 can be combined with the back-back lower decorative body 3700 to form one large decorative body.

The back rear upper decorative body 3650 includes a back rear upper decorative lens 3651 extending in the left-right direction, a decorative body base 3652 attached to the rear side of the back rear upper decorative lens 3651, and a back rear upper decorative lens 3651. The back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 which is provided between the decorative body base 3652 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 which are provided between the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653. Rear upper A transparent flat plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that diffuses light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 3653 and irradiates the light forward, and is provided on the rear surface of the decorative body base 3652. It has a lock mechanism 3660 and.

The back-back upper decorative lens 3651 extends in the left-right direction with a length slightly shorter than the distance between the pair of guide shafts 3602, and has translucency. The back-back upper decorative lens 3651 is formed in a shape imitating Nata, and a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the game board 5 is provided in a relief shape.

The decorative body base 3652 is a transparent flat plate-shaped base body 3652a that covers the rear side of the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 and whose lower edge extends downward from the back rear upper decorative lens 3651, and the left and right ends of the base body 3652a. It has a left slide support portion 3652b and a right slide support portion 3652c that protrude outward from the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 in the left-right direction and into which the guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. The right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 can be brought into contact with the auxiliary upper slider 3614 from above, and can be brought into contact with the right elevating slider 3612 from below.

Further, the decorative body base 3652 includes a receiving portion 3652d extending rearward from a portion having a predetermined length in the left-right direction near the center of the lower end edge in the left-right direction, an upper surface of the receiving portion 3652d, and a base body 3652a. It has a plurality of ribs 3652e connecting to the rear surface, and a lock mechanism mounting portion 3652f provided adjacent to the right slide support portion 3652c on the rear surface and to which the lock mechanism 3660 is mounted. The receiving portion 3652d comes into contact with the shock absorbing portion 3781f provided on the upper surface of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls from the retracted position.

Further, the decorative body base 3652 has a plurality of light guide ports 3652 g in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 are inserted so as to penetrate the base main body 3652a back and forth. .. The light guide port 3652g has an arcuate inner surface on the inner peripheral surface on the side closer to the outer edge of the base body 3652a. The light guide port 3652g is formed so that when assembled on the back rear upper decorative body 3650, light is emitted from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 on the arcuate inner peripheral surface. Light is incident on the base body 3652a from the inner peripheral surface. The light incident on the base body 3652a is reflected forward at the outer edge of the base body 3652a and radiated forward from the front surface of the base body 3652a. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 are made to emit light, the outer peripheral edge of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 (back rear upper decorative lens 3651) can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, the decorative body base 3652 has a plurality of openings 3652h penetrating the base body 3652a back and forth. The plurality of openings 3652h are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction near the center in the vertical direction of the decorative body base 3652. The opening 3652h is formed in a quadrangle larger than the light guide port 3652g, and can dissipate heat from the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 to the rear.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653. The back-back upper decorative substrate 3653 has white solder resist applied to the front surface and the rear surface, and the element name and the substrate identification number are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, light can be reflected to make the back-rear upper decorative lens 3651 emit light more brightly, and the back-rear upper decorative substrate 3653 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide ports into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 are inserted, and a plurality of square pyramidal diffusers formed over substantially the entire rear surface. And have. When light is incident on the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffuser lens can be diffusely reflected by a plurality of diffusers and radiated from the front to the front. The lens 3651 can be light-emitting and decorated with uniform brightness.

The lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 includes a lock latch 3661 provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction at the lock mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652, and a lock spring for urging the lock latch 3661 rearward. The unlocking solenoid 3663, which is attached to the locking mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 and is used to release the lock by the lock latch 3661 against the urging force of the lock spring 3662, and the unlocking solenoid 3663 from the rear. The rear cover 3664, which is attached to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 so as to cover it, and the rear cover 3664 are rotatably supported around the axis in the vertical direction, and are supported from behind the lock latch 3661. It has a lock link 3665 in contact with the lock link 3665 and a plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a of the unlocking solenoid 3663 to rotate the lock link 3665 by advancing and retreating the plunger 3663a.

The lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is provided adjacent to the left side of the right slide support portion 3652c. The lock latch 3661 has a main body portion 3661a extending vertically, and an upper lock claw 3661b and a lower lock claw 3661c extending rearward from both upper and lower ends of the main body portion 3661a. The lock latch 3661 is inclined so that the upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b becomes lower toward the rear and the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c becomes higher toward the rear. The upper lock claw 3661b can be inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, and the lower lock claw 3661c can be inserted into the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700. Has been done.

The unlock solenoid 3663 is provided so that the plunger 3663a, which advances and retreats, projects to the right (toward the direction of the lock latch 3661) to the left of the lock latch 3661. The lock link 3665 extends forward from the shaft portion 3665a, which is rotatably supported around the shaft in the vertical direction by the rear cover 3664, and the tip thereof is slidably connected to the plunger head 3666. It has a transmission portion 3665b and a pressing portion 3665c extending to the right from the shaft portion 3665a and capable of contacting the rear surface of the main body portion 3661a of the lock latch 3661. The lock link 3665 is formed in an L shape in a plan view.

In the normal state where the unlocking solenoid 3663 is not energized, the locking mechanism 3660 has a plunger 3663a that advances and retreats so as to project to the right of the unlocking solenoid 3663 and protrudes to the moving end to the right. In this state, the transmission portion 3665b of the lock link 3665 extends in the front-rear direction and the pressing portion 3665c extends in the left-right direction via the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a. The main body portion 3661a of the lock latch 3661 is in contact with the pressing portion 3665c of the lock link 3665 from the front by the urging force of the lock spring 3662. As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 are in a state of protruding rearward and are in a lockable state (see FIG. 190 (a)).

When the unit base 3601 comes into contact with the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 from relatively above in the lockable state, the upper lock claw 3661b is pressed forward by the inclined upper surface, and the lock is locked. The latch 3661 moves forward against the urging force of the lock spring 3662. Then, when the upper lock claw 3661b reaches the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, the forward pressure is removed, and the lock latch 3661 moves backward due to the urging force of the lock spring 3662. As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b is inserted into the lock groove 3603, and the downward movement of the upper lock claw 3661b (back rear upper decorative body 3650) is restricted.

In the lockable state, on the other hand, when the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 comes into contact with the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 from relatively below, the inclined lower surface thereof The lower lock claw 3661c is pressed forward, and the lock latch 3661 moves forward against the urging force of the lock spring 3662. Then, when the lower lock claw 3661c reaches the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, the forward pressure is lost and the lock latch 3661 moves backward due to the urging force of the lock spring 3662. To do. As a result, the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e, and the upward movement of the lower lock claw 3661c (back rear upper decorative body 3650) from the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is restricted. ..

When the unlocking solenoid 3663 is energized in this state, the plunger 3663a moves to the left so as to be immersed, and the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a moves to the left. When the plunger head 3666 moves to the left, the lock link 3665 rotates clockwise in a plan view around the shaft portion 3665a via the transmission portion 3665b connected to the plunger head 3666. .. Then, when the lock link 3665 rotates in the clockwise direction, the tip of the pressing portion 3665c of the lock link 3665 rotates so as to move forward. Therefore, the lock latch is moved forward by the pressing portion 3665c. The 3661 will move forward against the urging force of the lock spring 3662. As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 are in a state of being immersed (retracted) forward, and are in a state of being unlocked (see FIG. 190 (b)). In this unlocked state, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c are separated forward from the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601 and the lock groove 3781e of the back rear lower decorative body 3700. The back rear upper decorative body 3650 is in a state where it can move in the vertical direction relative to the lock groove 3603 and the lock groove 3781e.

Since the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is provided with a lock mechanism 3660 having a lock release solenoid 3663, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is heavier by that amount. As a result, when the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, a heavy drop effect (movable effect) can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

[5-10g-2. Back and bottom decoration]
Subsequently, the back-back lower decorative body 3700 in the back-back effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194 and the like. The back rear lower decorative body 3700 of the back rear effect unit 3600 is supported by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so as to be movable in the vertical direction below the back rear upper decorative body 3650. Further, the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is movable in the vertical direction by the left elevating mechanism 3630. The back-back lower decoration body 3700 can receive the back-back upper decoration body 3650 that has fallen from above, and can be combined with the back-back-upper decoration body 3650 that has fallen to form one large decoration body. It is possible.

The back rear lower decorative body 3700 is provided so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and the first rotating decorative body 3710, the second rotating decorative body 3720, and the third rotating decorative body 3700 are arranged in rows in the left-right direction, respectively. Left and right provided behind the rotating decorative body 3730 and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740, the first rotating decorative body 3710, the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740. It has a long after-decoration body 3750 and.

Further, the back rear lower decorative body 3700 supports the first rotating decorative body 3710 and moves vertically along the left guide shaft 3602 by the left elevating mechanism 3630, and the second rotating decorative body 3720. The right unit 3780, which supports the third rotating decoration 3730, the fourth rotating decoration 3740, and the rear decoration 3750 and can move up and down along the guide shaft 3602 on the right side, and the left unit 3760 and the right. It has a connection guide 3790 that connects the unit 3780 and the unit.

The first rotating decorative body 3710 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 has a translucent first decorative lens 3711 that imitates a predetermined character (for example, the character "disastrous") and the rear side of the first decorative lens 3711. The first base 3712 attached to the first rotating decorative body 3713, which is provided between the first decorative lens 3711 and the first base 3712 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the first decoration. A transparent flat plate-shaped lens provided between the lens 3711 and the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713, which diffuses and irradiates light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 forward. It has a diffuser lens (not shown).

The first base 3712 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a projecting rearward. The shaft cylinder portion 3712a is rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction by being inserted into the shaft support portion 3761c of the left slide base 3761 in the left unit 3760. Further, the first decorative gear 3762 of the left unit 3760 is attached to the rear end of the axle tube portion 3712a. The wiring EC is connected to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 from the rear through the shaft tube portion 3712a. The barrel portion 3712a of the first base 3712 is provided substantially in the center of the word “disastrous” in the first decorative lens 3711.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713. The surface of the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 is subjected to white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the first decorative lens 3711 can be made to emit light more brightly by reflecting light, and the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 is made difficult to see from the front. The diffusing lens has a plurality of light guide ports into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 are inserted, and a plurality of square pyramid-shaped lenses formed over substantially the entire rear surface. It has a diffuser and a diffuser. When light is incident on the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffusing lens can be diffusely reflected by a plurality of diffusing portions and radiated from the front to the front, and is a first decorative lens provided in the front. The 3711 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness.

The second rotating decorative body 3720 has a second decorative lens 3721 having translucency imitating a predetermined character (for example, the character of "drama") and a second decorative lens 3721 attached to the rear side of the second decorative lens 3721. A second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723 provided between the base 3722, the second decorative lens 3721, and the second base 3722 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a second decorative lens 3721 and the second rotating decoration. A transparent flat plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration substrate 3723 and diffuses the light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second rotating decorative substrate 3723 forward to irradiate the light. And have.

The second base 3722 of the second rotating ornament 3720 has a cylindrical axle tube portion 3722a that projects long rearward. The shaft tube portion 3722a penetrates the rear decorative body 3750 and is inserted into the left shaft support cylinder 3781d of the three shaft support cylinders 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported. Further, a second decorative gear 3784 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the axle tube portion 3722a. The wiring EC is connected to the second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723 from the rear through the shaft tube portion 3722a. The barrel portion 3722a of the second base 3722 is provided below the center of the character "drama" in the second decorative lens 3721.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723. The surface of the second rotating decorative substrate 3723 is white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the second decorative lens 3721 can be decorated by emitting light more brightly by reflecting light, and the second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723 is made difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide ports into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723 are inserted, and a plurality of square pyramid-shaped lenses formed over substantially the entire rear surface. It has a diffuser and a diffuser. When light is incident on the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffusing lens can be diffusely reflected by a plurality of diffusing portions and radiated from the front to the front, and is a second decorative lens provided in the front. The 3721 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness.

The third rotating decorative body 3730 has a third decorative lens 3731 having translucency imitating a predetermined character (for example, the character "times") and a third decorative lens 3731 attached to the rear side of the third decorative lens 3731. The third decorative body decorative substrate 3733 provided between the base 3732, the third decorative lens 3731, and the third base 3732 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the third decorative lens 3731 and the third rotating decoration. A transparent flat-plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration substrate 3733 and diffuses the light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the third rotating decorative substrate 3733 forward to irradiate the light. And have.

The third base 3732 of the third rotating decorative body 3730 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3732a that projects long rearward. The shaft tube portion 3732a penetrates the rear decorative body 3750 and is inserted into the central shaft support cylinder 3781d of the three shaft support cylinders 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported. Further, a third decorative gear 3785 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the axle tube portion 3732a. The wiring EC is connected to the third rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3733 from the rear through the shaft tube portion 3732a. The barrel portion 3732a of the third base 3732 is provided below the center of the character “times” in the third decorative lens 3731.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the third rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3733. The surface of the third rotating decorative substrate 3733 is white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, light can be reflected to make the third decorative lens 3731 brighter and light-emitting decoration, and the third rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3733 is made difficult to see from the front. The diffusing lens is a plurality of light guide ports into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the third rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3733 are inserted, and a plurality of light guide ports formed over substantially the entire rear surface. It has a square pyramid-shaped diffusion portion. When light is incident on the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffusing lens can be diffusely reflected by a plurality of diffusing portions and radiated from the front to the front, and is a third decorative lens provided in the front. The 3731 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness.

The fourth rotating decorative body 3740 has a fourth decorative lens 3741 having translucency imitating a predetermined character (for example, the character "avoidance") and a fourth decorative lens 3741 attached to the rear side of the fourth decorative lens 3741. The fourth decorative body decorative substrate 3743 provided between the base 3742 and the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth base 3742 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth rotating decoration. A transparent flat-plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration substrate 3743 and diffuses the light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the fourth rotating decorative substrate 3743 forward to irradiate the light. And have.

The fourth base 3742 of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3742a that projects long rearward. The shaft tube portion 3742a penetrates the rear decorative body 3750 and is inserted into the right shaft support cylinder 3781d of the three shaft support cylinders 3781d in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported. Further, a fourth decorative gear 3786 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the axle tube portion 3732a. The wiring EC is connected to the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743 from the rear through the shaft tube portion 3732a. The axle tube portion 3742a of the fourth base 3742 is provided below the center of the character "avoidance" in the fourth decorative lens 3741.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743. The surface of the fourth rotating decorative decorative substrate 3743 is subjected to white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the fourth decorative lens 3741 can be made to emit light more brightly by reflecting light, and the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743 is made difficult to see from the front. The diffusing lens is a plurality of light guide ports into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743 are inserted, and a plurality of light guide ports formed over substantially the entire rear surface. It has a square pyramid-shaped diffusion portion. When light is incident on the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffusing lens can be diffusely reflected by a plurality of diffusing portions and radiated from the front to the front, and is a fourth decorative lens provided in the front. The 3741 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness.

The rear decoration body 3750 has three circular passage ports 3750a penetrating back and forth at intervals in the left-right direction. The shaft support cylinder 3781d of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780, which will be described later, is inserted into these passage ports 3750a from the rear. The rear decorative body 3750 is provided between the rear decorative lens 3751 extending in the left-right direction, the rear base 3752 attached to the rear side of the rear decorative lens 3751, and the rear decorative lens 3751 and the rear base 3752. It has a rear decorative decorative substrate 3753 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface.

The rear-decorative lens 3751 (rear-decorative body 3750) of the rear-decorative body 3750 is formed in a shape imitating long left and right nata. The rear decorative lens 3751 has substantially the same length in the left-right direction as the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and the shape of the upper edge follows the shape of the lower edge of the back rear upper decorative lens 3651. It is formed like this. As a result, when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back rear lower decorative body 3700 are combined, a slight gap is formed between the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751, and the back rear upper decorative body is decorated. The lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751 can form one large ornamental body of Nata.

The rear base 3752 is formed to have the same size as the rear decorative lens 3751. The rear base 3752 has a plurality of light guide ports penetrating the front and rear, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear decoration decorative substrate 3753 are inserted, and a lower surface below the plurality of light guide ports in the front surface. It has a plurality of diffusion portions recessed in a square pyramid shape within a predetermined range above the edge. A plurality of light guide ports are provided in two rows in the vertical direction so as to sandwich a horizontal line passing above the center in the vertical direction of the rear base 3752, and in the upper row, the inner side is close to the upper edge. In the lower row, the peripheral surface is formed in an arc shape, and the inner peripheral surface near the lower edge is formed in an arc shape. The light guide port is formed so that light is emitted from an LED mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative decorative substrate 3753 on the arcuate inner peripheral surface, and the light is emitted from the rear base 3752 from the inner peripheral surface. It is incident inside. The light incident on the rear base 3752 is reflected forward by the upper edge of the rear base 3752 and the plurality of diffusers, and is radiated from the front surface of the rear base 3752 to the front. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear-decorative body decorative substrate 3753 are made to emit light, the upper edge of the rear-decorative body 3750 (rear-decorative lens 3751) and the range of a predetermined width upward from the lower edge are light-emitting decorations. Can be made to.

A plurality of side view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753. The surface of the post-decorative decorative substrate 3753 is subjected to white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the rear decorative lens 3751 can be made to emit light more brightly by reflecting light, and the rear decorative decorative substrate 3753 is made difficult to see from the front. The rear-decorative body decorative substrate 3753 can make the rear-decorative lens 3751 emit light when a plurality of mounted LEDs are made to emit light.

The left unit 3760 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the left guide shaft 3602, and rotatably supports the first rotating decorative body 3710. Further, the left unit 3760 cooperates with the left rack gear 3635 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 to rotate the first rotating decorative body 3710 around the axis in the front-rear direction as it slides in the vertical direction. Further, the left unit 3760 is capable of lifting the left end side of the right unit 3780 upward via the connecting guide 3790.

As shown in FIG. 194, the left unit 3760 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the left guide shaft 3602, and is rotatably supported by the barrel portion 3712a of the first base 3712 in the first rotary decorative body 3710. A spur gear-shaped first decorative gear 3762, which is provided behind the left slide base 3761 and is attached to the rear end of the barrel portion 3712a of the first base 3712 that penetrates the left slide base 3761, and the first A spur gear-like small diameter that meshes with the decorative gear 3762 from the left and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761, and the first transmission gear 3763 from the left. A speed change gear 3764 having a spur gear-shaped large diameter gear 3764b that rotates integrally with the gear 3764a and the small diameter gear 3764a and rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761, and the large diameter gear 3764b of the speed change gear 3764 to the left. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3765 that is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761 and a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3765 that is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761 and is meshed with the second transmission gear 3765 from the left. A spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3766, and a spur gear-shaped fourth transmission gear 3767 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3766 from the left and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761. A spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3768 that meshes with the fourth transmission gear 3767 from the left and meshes with the left rack gear 3635 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 from the right and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761. Have.

Further, the left unit 3760 is behind the first decorative gear 3762, the first transmission gear 3763, the transmission gear 3764, the second transmission gear 3765, the third transmission gear 3766, the fourth transmission gear 3767, and the pinion gear 3768. It is connected to the gear cover 3769 attached to the rear side of the left slide base 3761 so as to cover it, and to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 attached to the rear side of the gear cover 3769 and attached to the first rotating decorative body 3710. It has a wiring cover 3770 that covers a part of the wiring EC from the rear.

The left slide base 3761 is provided on the left side of the base body 3761a, which is formed in a shallow box shape in the front-rear direction with the rear side open, and the left guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. It has a left slide support portion 3761b and a shaft support portion 3761c that rotatably supports the shaft cylinder portion 3712a of the first base 3712 in the first rotating decorative body 3710 that penetrates the base body 3761a back and forth. The left slide base 3761 can rotatably support the first rotating decorative body 3710 around the axis in the front-rear direction by inserting the barrel portion 3712a of the first base 3712 into the shaft support portion 3761c. The left slide base 3761 is attached to the left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 on the rear side of the left slide support portion 3761b.

The first decorative gear 3762 is attached to the rear end of the cylindrical shaft cylinder portion 3712a in the first base 3712 of the first rotating decorative body 3710, and has a through hole penetrating the front and rear in the central portion. ing. A plurality of wiring ECs can be connected to the first rotating decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 through the through hole of the first decorative body gear 3762 and the cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a. The pinion gear 3768 is provided so that the left side protrudes to the left from the left end of the left slide base 3761 so as to mesh with the left rack gear 3635.

The gear cover 3769 has a left unit pin 3769a that projects rearward from the vicinity of the left end in a columnar shape. The left unit pin 3769a is slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790.

In the left unit 3760, the left slide base 3761 is attached to the left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the left spiral shaft 3331 is appropriately directed by the back rear left lower left drive motor 3633. When rotated, it slides up and down together with the left elevating slider 3632. In the left unit 3760, the pinion gear 3768 protruding outward from the left end of the left slide base 3761 meshes with the left rack gear 3635. Therefore, when the left unit 3760 slides in the vertical direction, the pinion gear 3768 rotates. When the pinion gear 3768 rotates, its rotation passes through the fourth transmission gear 3767, the third transmission gear 3766, the second transmission gear 3765, the transmission gear 3764, and the first transmission gear 3763, and the first decorative gear 3762. The first rotating decorative body 3710 is rotated together with the first decorative body gear 3762. In the present embodiment, when the left unit 3760 slides from the lower moving end to the upper moving end, the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotates 360 degrees.

Further, in the left unit 3760, since the left unit pin 3769a is slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790, when the left unit 3760 is slid in the vertical direction, the left unit pin 3769a becomes the connecting slit 3791. After sliding to the moving end of, the connecting guide 3790 can be slid in the same direction via the left unit pin 3769a.

In the left unit 3760, a plurality of wiring ECs are connected to the first rotating decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 through the through holes of the first decorative body gear 3762. As described above, since the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotates 360 degrees with respect to the axis in the front-rear direction, a plurality of wiring ECs passing through the through holes of the first decorative body gear 3762 are previously opposite to the rotating direction. It is twisted 180 degrees in the direction. As a result, even if the first rotating decorative body 3710 is rotated (rotated), the plurality of wiring ECs are prevented from being twisted more than necessary.

The right unit 3780 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the right guide shaft 3602, and rotatably supports the second rotating decoration 3720, the third rotating decoration 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration 3740, respectively. It is a thing. Further, the right unit 3780 can rotate the second rotating decoration body 3720, the third rotating decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration body 3740 around the axis in the front-rear direction, respectively, as the slide moves in the vertical direction. it can.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the right unit 3780 is provided on the rear side of the right slide base 3781 and the right slide base 3781, which are long left and right and whose right end side is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the guide shaft 3602 on the right side. A slide rack 3782 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction within a predetermined range, and both left and right ends are attached to the right slide base 3781 and the slide rack 3782, respectively, and the slide rack 3782 is urged to the left. It has a rack spring 3783 and.

Further, the right unit 3780 includes a spur gear-shaped second decorative gear 3784 attached to the rear end of the barrel portion 3722a of the second base 3722 in the second rotating decorative body 3720 and rotated by the slide of the slide rack 3782, and a second decorative body gear 3784. A spur gear-shaped third decorative gear 3785 attached to the rear end of the barrel portion 3732a of the third base 3730 in the three-rotating decorative body 3730 and rotated by sliding the slide rack 3782, and a fourth in the fourth rotating decorative body 3740. It has a spur gear-shaped fourth decorative gear 3786 that is attached to the rear end of the barrel portion 3742a of the base 3742 and is rotated by the slide of the slide rack 3782.

Further, the right unit 3780 has a gear cover 3787 attached to the rear side of the right slide base 3781 so as to cover the slide rack 3782 from the rear, and one end side is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787 and the other end side is rotatably supported. A unit arm 3788 that extends outward from the gear cover 3787 and is slidably supported by the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, and one end side of the unit arm 3788 that is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787. It has a transmission gear 3789 that transmits rotation around the center to slide the slide rack 3782 in the left-right direction.

The right slide base 3781 is provided at the right end of a box-shaped base body 3781a that is long left and right and is open rearward, and a right slide support portion 3781b through which the right guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. And a pair of right unit slits 3781c that penetrates back and forth at the left end of the base body 3781a and extends up and down, and the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 is slidably inserted, and a cylindrical shape from the base body 3781a. It has three shaft support cylinders 3781d, which project forward and penetrate the inside of the cylinder back and forth.

The rear decorative body 3750 is attached to the front surface of the base body 3781a of the right slide base 3781. Each of the three shaft support cylinders 3781d of the base body 3781a is inserted into the passage port 3750a of the rear decorative body 3750 from the rear. Further, in the three shaft support cylinders 3781d, the shaft cylinder portion 3722a in the second base 3722 of the second rotating decoration body 3720, the shaft cylinder portion 3732a in the third base 3732 of the third rotating decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotation The shaft cylinder portion 3742a in the fourth base 3742 of the decorative body 3740 is inserted, and the shaft cylinder portion 3722a, the shaft cylinder portion 3732a, and the shaft cylinder portion 3742a can be rotatably supported.

Further, the right slide base 3781 is provided so as to project upward from the left vicinity of the right slide support portion 3781b in the base body 3781a, and the lower lock claw of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650. It has a lock groove 3781e to which the 3661c is locked. The lock groove 3781e is provided so that the shape of the front view is quadrangular and is recessed from the front to the rear.

Further, the right slide base 3781 is provided on the upper surface of the base main body 3781a and has a plurality of shock absorbing portions 3781f that can come into contact with the lower surface of the receiving portion 3652d of the decorative body base 3652 in the back rear upper decorative body 3650. ing. The shock absorbing portion 3781f is formed of a high-viscosity elastomer.

The slide rack 3782 is provided near the left end and has a left rack gear 3782a with the tooth tips facing upward, and a middle rack gear 3782b provided on the right side and above the left rack gear 3782a with the tooth tips facing downward. The right rack gear 3782c, which is provided to the right and below the rack gear 3782b and has the tooth tip facing upward, and the rear and lower side between the middle rack gear 3782b and the right rack gear 3782c, and the tooth tip is directed upward. It has a rear rack gear 3782d. The left rack gear 3782a, the middle rack gear 3782b, and the right rack gear 3782c of the slide rack 3782 are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction with the same length.

A second decorative gear 3784 meshes with the left rack gear 3782a of the slide rack 3782 from above. A third decorative gear 3785 meshes with the middle rack gear 3782b from below. A fourth decorative gear 3786 meshes with the right rack gear 3782c from above. A large-diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with the rear rack gear 3782d from above. As a result, when the slide rack 3782 slides in the left-right direction, the second decorative gear 3784, the fourth decorative gear 3786, and the transmission gear 3789 rotate in the same direction, and the third decorative gear 3785 is reversed. Rotate in the direction.

The second decorative gear 3784, the third decorative gear 3785, and the fourth decorative gear 3786 each have a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. Through this through hole, from the right unit 3780 side, the second rotating decorative substrate 3723 of the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative substrate 3733 of the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740. A plurality of wiring ECs can be connected to the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743.

The gear cover 3787 is a linear type with a plurality of opposed type wiring locking portions 3787a for supporting a plurality of wiring ECs connected to the first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 on the rear surface. 3787b, and a plurality of L-shaped wiring locking portions 3787c. A plurality of facing type wiring locking portions 3787a are provided at intervals in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper edge of the gear cover 3787. The linear type wiring locking portion 3787b is provided to the left of the portion that rotatably supports one end side of the unit arm 3788, and is provided with the free end (tip) facing upward. ing. A plurality of L-shaped wiring locking portions 3787c are provided on the left side of the linear type wiring locking portion 3787b at intervals in the left-right direction in a state of extending upward and then extending forward. There is.

The unit arm 3788 has a fan-shaped gear portion 3788a provided coaxially with the rotation shaft on one end side rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787. The small diameter gear 3789a of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with the gear portion 3788a. The other end side of the unit arm 3788 extends from one end side to the left, and is slidably inserted into a rotation slit 3604 that is provided on the lower side of the unit base 3601 and is long in the left-right direction. Further, the unit arm 3788 has a tubular portion formed between one end and the other end, and a plurality of wiring ECs are inserted therein.

The transmission gear 3789 has a spur gear-shaped small-diameter gear 3789a that meshes with the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788, and a spur gear-shaped large-diameter gear 3789b that rotates integrally in front of the small-diameter gear 3789a. The large-diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with the rear rack gear 3782d of the slide rack 3782 from above.

The right unit 3780 is integrated with the back rear upper decoration body 3650 by engaging the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decoration body 3650 with the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781. And can slide upwards together so that they can be lifted by the back-back-upper decoration 3650.

In the right unit 3780, under normal conditions, the unit arm 3788 extends to the left in parallel with the right slide base 3781. In this state, when the right unit 3780 slides upward, the other end side of the unit arm 3788 is inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, so that the other end side of the unit arm 3788 is along the rotation slit 3604. It moves to the right and rotates counterclockwise in the front view with one end side as the center. Then, the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, so that the transmission gear 3789 rotates in the clockwise direction via the small diameter gear 3789a meshing with the gear portion 3788a, and the transmission gear After meshing with the large-diameter gear 3789b of the 3789, the slide rack 3782 slides to the left via the rack gear 3782d. At this time, since the slide rack 3782 is urged to the left by the rack spring 3783, the slide rack 3782 slides lightly to the left without resistance.

When the slide rack 3782 slides to the left, the second decorative gear 3784 meshing with the left rack gear 3782a and the fourth decorative gear 3786 meshing with the right rack gear 3782c, respectively, in the clockwise direction. As it rotates, the third decorative gear 3785 meshing with the middle rack gear 3782b rotates in the counterclockwise direction. When the right unit 3780 is slid upward, the second rotating decoration 3720 and the fourth rotating decoration 3740 are rotated clockwise, and the third rotating decoration 3730 is rotated counterclockwise, respectively. Each can be moved upwards. When the slide rack 3782 slides from the right moving end to the left moving end, the second rotating decoration 3720, the third rotating decoration 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration 3740 rotate 180 degrees, respectively.

In the right unit 3780, since the other end side of the unit arm 3788 is slidably connected to the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the first rotating decorative substrate 3713 and the second of the back rear lower decorative body 3700. A plurality of wiring ECs connecting the rotating decorative body decorative board 3723, the third rotating decorative body decorative board 3733, the fourth rotating decorative body decorative board 3743, the rear decorative body decorative board 3753, and the peripheral control board 1510 are used. It is provided along the rear side of the unit arm 3788. This makes it difficult to see the plurality of wiring ECs connected to the right unit 3780 (back and rear lower decorative body 3700) from the front.

In this right unit 3780, the wiring EC passes through the through holes of the second decorative gear 3784, the third decorative gear 3785, and the fourth decorative gear 3786 from the rear, and the second rotating decorative body 3720 and the third rotating decoration are provided. It extends to the body 3730 and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740. Since the second rotating decoration 3720, the third rotating decoration 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration 3740 rotate 180 degrees around the axis in the front-rear direction as described above, the second decoration gear 3784, the third The wiring EC passing through the through holes of the decorative gear 3785 and the fourth decorative gear 3786 is twisted 90 degrees in advance in the direction opposite to the rotation direction. As a result, even if the second rotating decoration body 3720, the third rotating decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration body 3740 are rotated (rotated), the wiring EC is prevented from twisting more than necessary.

Further, in the right unit 3780, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of wiring ECs (harness WH3) aligned from the other end side to the one end side of the unit arm 3788 are arranged to the right (in front view) in the vicinity of one end side. It is bent to the left) and extends to the right along the gear cover 3787. The harness WH3 is inserted between the linear type wiring locking portion 3787b or the L-shaped wiring locking portion 3787c and the rear surface of the gear cover 3787. In the right unit 3780, the harness WH3 is bound together with the wiring locking portion 3787b at the wiring locking portion 3787b provided at the position closest to the rotation shaft of the unit arm 3788 (the bent portion of the harness WH3). It is tightened and bundled by the band CT. At this time, the harness WH3 is tightened with a strength that allows it to slide together with the binding band CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wiring locking portion 3787b extends. Since the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b is provided with a hook portion (not shown) protruding forward, the binding band CT does not come off from the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b together with the harness WH3. ..

In this way, at the wiring locking portion 3787b closest to the rotating shaft of the unit arm 3788 (the bent portion of the harness WH3) in the harness WH3, the wiring locking portion 3787b is tightened together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT. By rotating the unit arm 3788 by sliding the right unit 3780 (back rear lower decorative body 3700) in the vertical direction, even if a force for moving the harness WH3 acts via the unit arm 3788, the unit arm is bound. The band CT does not cause the harness WH3 to come off from the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the harness WH3 coming off.

In the right unit 3780, at the portion where the harness WH3 and the wiring locking portion 3787b are bound by the binding band CT, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT is similar to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 described above. Is attached in contact with the wiring locking portion 3787b. The lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with a portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3. In other words, the binding band CT is attached so that the wiring locking portion 3787b is located between the harness WH3 and the locking portion CTb. As a result, since the lock portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to facilitate the binding work and confirmation of binding by the binding band CT. In addition, the work of cutting the binding band CT can be facilitated. Further, since the contact of the lock portion CTb with the harness WH3 can be avoided, the harness WH3 bound by the binding band CT can be protected by the wiring locking portion 3787b.

Further, since the gear cover 3787 on which the wiring locking portion 3787b is formed is transparent, the portion of the harness WH3 supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b can be visually recognized from the outside (rear) through the wiring locking portion 3787b. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not all the wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3 are bundled by the binding band CT, and the binding work by the binding band CT can be facilitated. it can.

Further, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT is attached so that the binding band CT (the band portion CTa of the band portion CTa) is in oblique contact with the harness WH3. As a result, the contact area can be widened and the frictional resistance can be increased to make it difficult to move (slide) as compared with the case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH3 in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. it can.

Further, as shown in the figure, in the binding band CT in which the harness WH3 is bundled with the wiring locking portion 3787b, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa extends diagonally with respect to the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 3787b. It is installed so that it can be taken out. In other words, the cable tie CT is attached in a cross-shaped manner. As a result, while the harness WH3 is bundled with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the binding band CT approaches the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 3787b. By tilting the binding band CT, the tightening by the band portion CTa can be loosened, and the harness WH3 can be easily slid together with the binding band CT in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 3787b. Further, when the binding band CT is returned to the tilted state after sliding, the wiring locking portion 3787b can be tightened to return to the original difficult-to-slide state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 193, since the portion of the harness WH3 that is bent from the horizontal direction along the unit arm 3788 is twisted as a whole, the upper and lower parts of the right unit 3780 (back rear lower decorative body 3700) are twisted. By rotating the unit arm 3788 by sliding in the direction, even if a force acts on the harness WH3 via the unit arm 3788, the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3 do not come apart.

The connection guide 3790 connects the left unit 3760 and the right unit 3780 so as to be relatively movable in the vertical direction. The connecting guide 3790 penetrates back and forth and extends long vertically, and the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 in the left unit 3760 is slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 and the right side of the connecting slit 3791. It has a connecting pin 3792 that projects rearwardly in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780.

[5-10g-3. Operation of the back-and-forth production unit]
Next, the operation (movable effect) of the back-rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185, 195, 196, and the like. As described above, the back-rear effect unit 3600 includes a back-rear upper decorative body 3650 and a back-rear lower decorative body 3700 that are slidably supported in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 3602 separated to the left and right. are doing. In the normal state of the back-rear effect unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 185, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is located at a retracted position which is an upward moving end. When the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is in the retracted position, the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 is inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601 to move the back rear upper decorative body 3650 downward. Is regulated (locked). Further, a right elevating slider 3612 screwed into the right spiral shaft 3611 from below is in contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and the right elevating slider 3612 abuts the right elevating slider 3612. The back and upper decorative body 3650 is restricted from moving downward. That is, the lock mechanism 3660 and the right elevating slider 3612 prevent the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 from falling.

Further, in the back-rear upper decorative body 3650, the auxiliary upper slider 3614 is in contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 from above, and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 is brought into contact with the auxiliary upper slider 3614 by the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616. Are in contact with each other. Further, in the right elevating mechanism 3610, the right elevating first sensor 3617 detects the right elevating slider 3612.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is located at the retracted position, which is the downward moving end, as shown in FIG. 185. When the back and lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the character "disastrous" of the first rotating decorative body 3710 is tilted diagonally to the left, and the character "drama" of the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotation. The letters "times" of the decorative body 3730 and the letters "avoid" of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are each rotated 180 degrees. The first rotating decorative body 3710 and the third rotating decorative body 3730 are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction, respectively. The second rotating decoration 3720, the fourth rotating decoration 3740, and the left unit 3760 are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction, respectively, and are provided behind the first rotating decoration 3710 and the third rotating decoration 3730. There is. Further, a rear decorative body 3750 and a right unit 3780 are provided behind the second rotating decorative body 3720, the fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and the left unit 3760. After this, a back rear upper decorative body 3650 is provided above the rear decorative body 3750 and the right unit 3780.

In the state where the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 in the left unit 3760 is located at the downward moving end (lower end) of the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790. Further, the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 is located at the downward moving end (lower end) of the right unit slit 3781c in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780.

Further, in the state where the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is in the retracted position, the pinion gear 3768, which partially protrudes to the left from the left unit 3760, meshes with the left rack gear 3635 of the left elevating mechanism 3630. Further, the slide rack 3782 of the right unit 3780 is located at the moving end to the right, and the unit arm 3788 extends substantially horizontally in the left-right direction. The slide rack 3782 is urged to the left by a rack spring 3783. Further, in the left elevating mechanism 3630, the left elevating sensor 3634 detects the left elevating slider 3632.

When performing a movable effect of dropping the back rear upper decorative body 3650 from this normal state, first, in the right elevating mechanism 3610, the back rear right lower drive motor 3613 rotates the right spiral shaft 3611 to move the right elevating slider 3612. It is moved to the lower moving end (the position near the right slide support portion 3781b of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the back rear lower decorative body 3700). When the right elevating slider 3612 moves downward, it comes into contact with the auxiliary lower slider 3615 on the way, and moves to the lower moving end together with the auxiliary lower slider 3615 against the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616. As a result, the auxiliary spring 3616 is stretched for a long time to increase its urging force, and a strong urging force acts downward on the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 via the auxiliary upper slider 3614. Even in this state (fallable state), the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601 and locked, so that the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls. There is no such thing.

Then, when the lock release solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 is energized, the lock latch 3661 moves forward against the urging force of the lock spring 3662, and the upper lock claw 3661b comes out of the lock groove 3603 to release the lock. As a result, the back-back upper decorative body 3650 falls from the retracted position. At this time, on the back-rear upper decorative body 3650, the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616 that strongly urges downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614 acts on the right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652. Therefore, the back-back upper decoration body 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than the free fall. The auxiliary upper slider 3614 stops moving at a position downward to some extent after pressing the right slide support portion 3652c downward by the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616. Therefore, the auxiliary lower slider 3615 is in a state of being urged upward by the auxiliary spring 3616.

When the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls on the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 provided below (moves to the appearance position), the lower surface of the receiving portion 3652d of the decorative body base 3652 becomes the right slide base. The impact of the fall is absorbed by abutting on the plurality of shock absorbing portions 3781f on the upper surface of the 3781, and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is locked in the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781. It does not bounce upward on the top surface of the right slide base 3781.

As a result, the back-back upper decoration body 3650 falls at a speed faster than free fall, and does not bounce upward after falling, so a heavy movable effect (fall effect) that makes it feel like it is falling down. ) Can be shown to the player and can give a strong impact to the player.

In the state where the back-rear upper decoration 3650 is dropped and moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 195, the back-rear upper decoration 3650 and the back-rear lower decoration 3700 rear decoration 3750 are in contact with each other. It is located and forms a decorative body that imitates one large nata. Further, in this state, only a part of the first rotation decoration body 3710 is located in front of the back rear upper decoration body 3650, and the second rotation decoration body 3720, the third rotation decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotation decoration body are located. The decorative body 3740 is not located in front of the back rear upper decorative body 3650.

In the state where the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position and moved to the appearance position, the left spiral shaft 3631 is rotated by the back rear left lower drive motor 3633 in the left elevating mechanism 3630 and screwed onto the left spiral shaft 3631. When the combined left evacuation slider 3632 is slid upward, the left unit 3760 makes a first rotation via the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 attached to the left evacuation slider 3632. Slide upward with the ornament 3710. At this time, since the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 meshes with the left rack gear 3635, the pinion gear 3768 rotates as the left unit 3760 rises, and the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotates counterclockwise. It will rotate. Further, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 slides upward in the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790.

Initially, when the left unit 3760 was raised via the left elevating slider 3632, only the left unit 3760 (first rotating decoration 3710) was raised, and the right unit 3780 (second rotating decoration 3720, third rotating decoration 3730) was raised. , Fourth rotating decorative body 3740, and post-decorative body 3750) do not rise.

Then, when the left unit 3760 rises and the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 reaches the upward moving end (upper end) of the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790, the left unit pin 3769a passes through the connecting slit 3791. The connecting guide 3790 is lifted upward, and the connecting guide 3790 starts to rise. Even at this time, since the pinion gear 3768 meshes with the left rack gear 3635, the first rotating decorative body 3710 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction. When the connecting guide 3790 starts to rise by the left unit pin 3769a of the left unit 3760, the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 slides upward in the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780.

As a result, at the beginning when the connecting guide 3790 starts to rise by the left unit pin 3769a of the rising left unit 3760, only the left unit 3760 (first rotating decorative body 3710) and the connecting guide 3790 rise, and the right unit 3780 (the first). The bi-rotating ornament 3720, the third rotating ornament 3730, the fourth rotating ornament 3740, and the post-rotating ornament 3750) do not rise.

The left unit 3760 is further raised while lifting the connecting guide 3790 by the left elevating slider 3632, and the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 moves upward (upper end) of the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780. At the time of reaching, a force for lifting upward acts on the left end side of the right unit 3780 via the connecting pin 3792 and the right unit slit 3781c. Even at this time, since the pinion gear 3768 meshes with the left rack gear 3635, the first rotating decorative body 3710 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

At the same time, in the right elevating mechanism 3610, the right elevating slider 3612 is rotated by the back rear lower right drive motor 3613 to raise the meshing right elevating slider 3612, and the right elevating slider 3612 is moved to the back rear upper decorative body 3650. The right slide support portion 3652c of the decorative body base 3652 is brought into contact with the right slide support portion 3652c from below, and the right slide support portion 3652c is moved upward. At this time, the right elevating slider 3612 is subjected to an upward urging force by the auxiliary spring 3616 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 that is in contact with the right elevating slider 3612, so that the load applied to the ascent is reduced.

When the decorative body base 3652 (back rear upper decorative body 3650) is raised by the right elevating slider 3612 via the right slide support portion 3652c, the lower lock claw 3661c of the locking mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is used for the back rear lower decoration. Since it is locked to the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the body 3700, a force for lifting upward is applied to the right end side of the right unit 3780 via the lower lock claw 3661c and the lock groove 3781e. To do.

In this way, the left end side of the right unit 3780 is to be lifted upward from the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790, and the right end side of the right unit 3780 is to be lifted upward from the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650. The right unit 3780 will start climbing for the first time here due to the action of the force. In this state, the right unit 3780 is lifted by the back-rear upper decorative body 3650, and the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 are united and ascended.

When the right unit 3780 starts to rise, the second rotating decoration 3720, the third rotating decoration 3730, the fourth rotating decoration 3740, and the rear decoration 3750 supported by the right unit 3780 rise together. At this time, since the other end side of the unit arm 3788 extending to the left at the lower part of the right unit 3780 is slidably inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the unit arm 3788 is one end thereof. It rotates counterclockwise around the side, and the other end slides to the right in the rotation slit 3604.

When the unit arm 3788 of the right unit 3780 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slide rack 3782 slides to the left from the right moving end, and the slide rack 3782 slides the second rotating decorative body 3720 and the first The quadruple decorative body 3740 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the third rotating decorative body 3730 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Also at this time, since the left unit 3760 is raised, the first rotating decorative body 3710 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the engagement between the pinion gear 3768 and the left rack gear 3635.

At this time, since the slide rack 3782 is urged to the left by the rack spring 3783, the load applied to the rotation of the unit arm 3788 in the counterclockwise direction is reduced, and the second rotation decorative body 3720 is used. , The load applied to the rotation of the third rotating decorative body 3730 and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 is reduced.

Then, when the right elevating second sensor 3618 detects the right elevating slider 3612 in the right elevating mechanism 3610, the rotation of the right spiral shaft 3611 and the left spiral shaft 3631 by the back rear lower right drive motor 3613 and the back rear lower left drive motor 3633 is performed. When stopped, the ascending of the right elevating slider 3612 and the left elevating slider 3632 is stopped. In this state, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 are located at the central positions of substantially the center in the vertical direction. Further, the left elevating slider 3632 (left unit 3760) of the left elevating mechanism 3630 is located at the upward moving end.

In this state of the central position, as shown in FIG. 196, the character "disastrous" of the first rotating ornament 3710 is rotated 360 degrees and tilted diagonally to the left like the evacuation position, but half of the vertical direction. The above is raised so as to be located in front of the back rear upper decorative body 3650. In addition, the characters "drama" of the second rotating decoration 3720, the characters "times" of the third rotating decoration 3730, and the characters "avoiding" of the fourth rotating decoration are rotated 180 degrees in the vertical direction. Are correct, and nearly half of them in the vertical direction are located in front of the back-back-upper decoration 3650. As a result, a decorative body having the characters "disaster avoidance" is formed in the center of the large left and right nata, which is composed of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear decorative body 3750, in the vertical direction.

From this center position, in the lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decoration body 3650, the lock release solenoid 3663 is energized, the lock latch 3661 is slid forward, and the lower lock claw 3661c is moved to the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780. Unlock by pulling out from the lock groove 3781e. Then, the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated so that the right elevating slider 3612 is raised by the back rear right lower drive motor 3613 of the right elevating mechanism 3610, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is moved upward via the right elevating slider 3612. .. By moving the back rear upper decorative body 3650 upward with the lock mechanism 3660 released, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is separated from the back rear lower decorative body 3700, and only the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is released. Will rise.

At this time, since the right elevating slider 3612 is urged upward by the auxiliary spring 3616 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 abutting from below, the load applied to the ascent is reduced. Further, in the back rear upper decorative body 3650, since the lock mechanism 3660 (unlocking solenoid 3663) is provided in the vicinity of the right slide support portion 3652c supported by the right guide shaft 3602, the guide shaft is provided from the right slide support portion 3652c. The rotational moment applied to 3602 is suppressed, and the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 can be smoothly raised.

When the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised by the right elevating slider 3612 and the right elevating slider 3612 is detected by the right elevating first sensor 3617, the rotation of the right spiral shaft 3611 by the back rear lower right drive motor 3613 is stopped. Then, the ascending of the right elevating slider 3612 (back rear upper decorative body 3650) stops. As a result, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 returns to the state of the retracted position, which is the normal state.

On the other hand, in the back rear lower decorative body 3700 at the center position raised from the retracted position, the left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 does not rise any more. Therefore, when the lock by the lock mechanism 3660 is released, the left elevating mechanism At 3630, the left spiral shaft 3631 rotates in the reverse direction so that the left evacuation slider 3632 descends, and the back rear lower decorative body 3700 descends. At this time, the first rotating decoration body 3710, the second rotating decoration body 3720, the third rotating decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration body 3740 descend while rotating in the direction opposite to the rising direction.

Then, when the left elevating slider 3632 is detected by the left elevating sensor 3634, the rotation of the left spiral shaft 3631 by the back rear left lower left drive motor 3633 is stopped, and the left elevating slider 3632 (back rear lower decorative body 3700) is lowered. Stops. As a result, the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 returns to the state of the retracted position, which is the normal state.

[5-11. Directed by the game board]
Subsequently, the production by the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 197 to 202 and the like. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the game board showing the display screen of the effect display device in a blacked out state, and FIG. 197 (b) shows the display screen of the effect display device and the back front of the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship with the left back decorative sheet. FIG. 198 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back upper right decorative body, the back right middle decorative body, and the back right lower decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 199 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back rear left decorative body of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first appearance position, and FIG. 200 is a back view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the front view of the game board which shows the state which the rear left decorative body is moved to the 2nd appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back rear upper decorative body of the back rear effect unit in the back unit is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, and FIG. 202 is the back rear of the back rear effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the upper decorative body and the back rear lower decorative body are moved to the central position.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 137 and the like, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in the front is transparent, but a predetermined pattern is displayed behind the panel plate 1110. Since the rear cell 1130 (see FIG. 146) is provided, the display screen of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible.

In a normal state, the game board 5 has a back front upper first decorative plate 3201 and a back front upper second decorative plate 3201 of the back front upper effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 near the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The 3203, the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 at the retracted position in the back rear effect unit 3600 are visibly provided. The back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, and the back front upper decorative body 3650 are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction, respectively. The same logo is given according to the concept of the game board 5. The logos on the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203 are carved in a streak so that the letters become smaller as the rear decorative plate becomes smaller. The logo of the back front upper third decorative plate 3203 and the logo of the back back upper decorative body 3650 are provided in the same size. As a result, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective in which the characters of the logo increase from the rear to the front (see FIG. 197).

In this normal state, in front of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 in the retracted position in the back-rear effect unit 3600, the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, Since three decorative boards are provided, the back-back upper decorative body 3650 can be visually recognized through them, but it is possible to make the illusion that the back-back upper decorative body 3650 is a decoration applied to the three decorative boards. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the back and upper decorative body 3650 is movable.

Further, in a normal state, along the left side in the frame of the center accessory 2500, the three-dimensionally formed back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be seen, and the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be seen. Along the right side of the interior, the back right effect unit 3400's back upper right decorative body 3402, back right middle decorative body 3403, and back right lower decorative body 3404 can be seen side by side.

Further, in a normal state, the back rear left decorative body 3501 of the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front left effect unit 3300, and the back rear upper decoration of the retracted position of the back front left effect unit 3600. It is located behind each of the 3650 bodies and is invisible from the front.

Further, in a normal state, the center distribution unit 2520 can be seen on the lower side within the frame of the center accessory 2500. Behind the center distribution unit 2520, the back rear lower decorative body 3700 in the retracted position in the back rear effect unit 3600 is located, and the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is almost invisible from the front.

The effect as shown in FIG. 197 can be executed by using the back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment. In the back front left effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), a certain distance is provided between the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 and the effect display device 1600 of the back front left effect unit 3300. From the normal state, for example, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the pattern on the back surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the reflection pattern 3310 can be seen. (See FIG. 197 (a)). As a result, during the execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, the pattern on the back surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is displayed on the display screen by darkening or intentionally darkening the display screen. Since it is possible to show the player the effect of seeing the reflection pattern 3310 in the reflection, the player can be surprised by the faintly visible reflection pattern 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, something is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the pattern on the back surface of the back front left decorative sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decorative body 3301, the following effect can be exhibited. More specifically, in the normal state where the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, only the character (picture) having a predetermined expression of the back front left decorative body 3301 can be seen, and the back front left decorative body 3301 On the right side, the reflected pattern 3310 in which the characters (pictures) with different facial expressions of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 are reflected on the display screen cannot be seen. Then, when the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, the character of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 with a different facial expression from the back front left decorative body 3301 is reflected on the right side of the back front left decorative body 3301. Since the 3310 can be seen, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the face behind the character can be seen, and it is possible to entertain the player with the gap in the facial expression of the character. If this effect is performed, for example, before the jackpot game is executed, the effect can make the player strongly think that it may be a "loss", and then the player becomes a "big hit". You can surprise and enhance your interest.

As shown by the broken line in FIG. 197 (b), a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED capable of irradiating light from the rear toward the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 may be provided. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened by blackout or the like, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 becomes brighter by causing the light emitting means 3320 to emit light. The display screen can make it easier to see, and the reflective pattern 3310 can be made easier to see.

Alternatively, although not shown, when an LED capable of irradiating light backward is mounted on the rear surface of the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened by blackout or the like, the back front By emitting the LED on the rear surface of the left main decorative substrate 3305, the pattern on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 becomes bright, so that the pattern can be easily displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

Next, the effect as shown in FIG. 198 can be executed by using the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. In the back right effect unit 3400, from the normal state in which the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are lined up and down, to the appearance position by driving the back right drive motor 3405. When moved, the back right middle left decoration 3403 splits into two left and right, the back right middle left decoration 3403a and the back right middle right decoration 3403b, and the back right middle left decoration 3402, the back right middle left decoration 3403a, The back right middle right decorative body 3403b and the back right lower right decorative body 3404 are transformed into a form arranged at the apex of the rhombus. As a result, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are brought closer to the center side of the game area 5a (effect display device 1600), which surprises the player. It is possible to attract the player's attention to those decorations, and at the same time, it is possible to think that there is something good with the appearance of the decorations, which raises the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Next, the effect as shown in FIGS. 199 and 200 can be executed by using the back left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. In the back rear left effect unit 3500, from the normal state in which the back rear left decorative body 3501 is invisible from the front, the back rear left decorative body 3501 is driven to the right and downward by the back rear left drive motor 3503. When it is rotated in the (clockwise direction) and moved to the first appearance position, as shown in FIG. 199, substantially the entire back-rear left decorative body 3501 is to the right and back-back of the back front left decorative body 3301. It is located below the upper decorative body 3650 and is visible to the player, but a part of the imitated cutting edge is behind the back front left decorative body 3301 and below the back rear upper decorative body 3650. It is located and the overall shape is unclear.

As a result, when the back rear left decorative body 3501 moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body 3501 becomes visible, so that the player's interest is attracted to the back rear left decorative body 3501. Can be done. At this time, since a part of the back rear left decorative body 3301 is hidden and the overall shape is unclear, it is difficult to recognize that the back rear left decorative body 3501 is the cutting edge of Nata. The player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the back left decorative body 3501 moves to a position where the entire body can be seen. Then, when the back rear left decorative body 3501 is further rotated clockwise by the back rear left drive motor 3503 to move to the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 200, the back rear left decorative body 3501 becomes As the whole becomes visible, the left end side becomes inclined so as to protrude forward. As a result, the front surface of the back rear left decorative body 3501 is slanted with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the cutting edge of the nata imitated by the back rear left decorative body 3501 is the effect display device 1600. Since it looks like it is protruding diagonally forward from the display screen of, it can give a strong impact to the player and raise expectations for the game by making me think that there is something good. it can.

In this way, according to the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear left decorative body 3501 that cannot be seen in the normal state can be visually recognized in two stages, so to what stage the back rear left decorative body 3501 appears. Depending on whether or not it is possible, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. Then, when moving to the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body 3501 that has moved (rotated) in parallel with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the tip (left end) of the cutting edge protrudes forward. Because it moves, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that has never been seen on a pachinko machine so far, and it can have a strong impact on the player, and there may be something good. It can be strongly reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Next, the effect as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 can be executed by using the back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5. In the back rear effect unit 3600, after moving the right elevating slider 3612 to the lower moving end by driving the back rear right lower drive motor 3613 of the right elevating mechanism 3610, the lock mechanism 3660 in the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is unlocked. When the solenoid 3663 is energized, the lock by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 is released, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls and comes into contact with the back rear lower decorative body 3700 provided below from above (FIG. FIG. (See 201). At this time, since the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is urged downward by the auxiliary spring 3616, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than the free fall. Further, when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls and comes into contact with the back rear lower decorative body 3700 at the lower retracted position, the impact is absorbed by the shock absorbing portion 3781f and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 is locked. It is locked in the groove 3781e to prevent it from bouncing upward.

As a result, the back-back upper decoration body 3650 falls at a speed faster than free fall, and does not bounce upward after falling, so a heavy movable effect (fall effect) that makes it feel like it is falling down. ) Can be shown to the player and can give a strong impact to the player.

Then, after the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 falls and moves to the appearance position, the back-rear right lower drive motor 3613 of the right elevating mechanism 3610 causes the right elevating slider 3612, and the back-rear lower left drive motor 3633 of the left elevating mechanism 3630. When the left elevating slider 3632 and the left elevating slider 3632 are raised, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 are vertically combined and raised together to the center position. At this time, the first rotation decoration body 3710, the second rotation decoration body 3720, the third rotation decoration body 3730, and the fourth rotation decoration body 3740 of the back rear lower decoration body 3700 rotate about the axis in the front-rear direction. When it rises while reaching the center position, as shown in FIG. 202, the first rotation is centered in the vertical direction of a large left-right long nata composed of the back-rear-upper decorative body 3650 and the rear-rear decoration body 3750. The characters "disastrous" by the decorative body 3710, "drama" by the second rotating decorative body 3720, "times" by the third rotating decorative body 3730, and "avoidance" by the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are lined up side by side. A large decorative body will appear in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, and "tragedy avoidance" by the first rotating decoration 3710, the second rotating decoration 3720, the third rotating decoration 3730, and the fourth rotating decoration 3740. The characters "" can strongly make the player think that an advantageous gaming state such as "big hit" occurs, which can increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In addition, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3600, after dropping the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 to the appearance position, the lock mechanism 3660 unlocks the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 with the lock groove 3781e, and left. Instead of driving the back rear lower left drive motor 3633 of the elevating mechanism 3630, only the back rear lower right drive motor 3613 of the right elevating mechanism 3610 may be driven to raise only the back rear upper decorative body 3650. As a result, after the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 has fallen, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 rises in a state of being combined with the back-rear upper decorative body 3700. In addition to being able to entertain the person, it is possible to present a variety of combinations of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 and the like. FIG. 203 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. A section is formed on the circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5. A base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 2020 and the sub out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a is provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU includes the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of the predetermined registers of the main control MPU, and when the registers change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU. Only the MPU) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control"). It is described as "random number circuit"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU. Based on the control MPU and the clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port 2004, which detects the game ball B received in the first lower start port 2003. The first upper start port sensor 2524, the second start port sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2005, the general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, The game received by the gate sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, the first large prize opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007. The second major winning opening sensor 2602 that detects the ball B, the V winning opening sensor 2603 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008, and the losing opening sensor 2604 that detects the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. From the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B ejected from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor 1040 that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, and the like. The detection signal of is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch and the setting switching button provided on the setting change board is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are, they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first lower start port sensor 2101, the first upper start port sensor 2524, and the second start port sensor 2601 are mainly transmitted without passing through another substrate, that is, directly. It is input to the control board 1310, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2501, the first major winning opening sensor 3002, the second major winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, the loss opening sensor 2604, the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040. Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. There is.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. Drive signals to the solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the center distribution drive motor 2525 are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or their predetermined output. From the output terminal of the port, the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol display, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol display, second special hold of the function display unit 1400. Each drive signal is output to the number display and the round display without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby outputting various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In the present embodiment, the first lower start port sensor 2101, the first upper start port sensor 2524, the second start port sensor 2601, the gate sensor 2501, the first major winning opening sensor 3002, the second major winning opening sensor 2602, The V winning opening sensor 2603, the loss opening sensor 2604, and the out sensor 664 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation. The type of mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the gate 2002, so that the first lower starting port sensor 2101, the first (Ii) The detection of the game ball B by the start port sensor 2601 and the gate sensor 2501 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first lower start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2601, the first upper start port sensor 2524, and the gate sensor 2501.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the first big winning opening sensor The detection of the game ball B by 3002 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 3002. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 203, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration of the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is omitted, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are mounted on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. It has a stored sound ROM.

A plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip in the peripheral control IC, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door-side drive data for outputting the data, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[6-3c. Vibration alarm processing]
The vibration alarm processing by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of vibration alarm processing in the game board. The "vibration alarm processing" is illegal by the vibration sensor 1040 when the game ball B enters the center distribution unit 2520 through the upper warp passage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 as an accessory and satisfies a predetermined condition. When a vibration is detected, an alarm is issued to notify that a fraudulent act is being performed.

More specifically, in the "vibration alarm processing", first, the "game ball accessory flag" in step S101 is another omitted flowchart, and the distribution is on the IN side of the center distribution unit 2520 as the accessory. The flag is set by judging the consistency between the detection of the game ball B by the ball entry sensor 2527 and the detection of the game ball B by the first upper start port sensor 2524 and the distribution ball discharge sensor 2528 on the OUT side. .. In particular,
Number on the IN side> Number on the OUT side ... Flag ON
Number on the IN side = Number on the OUT side ... Flag OFF
Number on the IN side <Number on the OUT side ... A flag is set as if an inconsistency notification was executed.

When the in-feature flag is not ON (flag OFF) in step S101, step S101 is repeated. If the flag inside the accessory is ON in step S101, the ON / OFF of the “back-back-upper decorative body operating flag” is determined in the next step S102. When the back and back upper decorative body 3650 is operated (falling), the operating flag is turned on. When the operating flag is ON in step S102, the process returns to step S101. In step S102, when the operating flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S103.

In step S103, ON / OFF of the “pressing operation effecting flag” is determined. The effect during effect flag is turned ON during the effect by the press operation of the press operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3. In step S103, when the effecting flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and when the effecting flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In step S104, ON / OFF of the “vibration alarming flag” is determined. When the vibration alarm is executed, the alarming flag is turned ON. In step S104, when the issuing flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and when the issuing flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S105.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not there is a “vibration detection command from the main control board”. When the vibration sensor 1040 detects vibration, the main control board 1310 transmits a vibration detection command to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S105, if there is no vibration detection command, the process returns to step S101, and if there is a vibration detection command, the process proceeds to the next step S106.

In step S106, after the "reporting process" is executed for a predetermined period, the normal state is restored. The “reporting process” of step S106 is executed on the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, for example, the characters "vibration detection" are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the sound effect (siren) of the notification and the voice of "vibration detected" are repeated for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and the top center speaker and top side speaker provided in the door frame top unit 450, and the main body. Output is performed from the main body frame speaker 622 or the like provided in the frame 4. At this time, maximize the volume. Further, in the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is made to emit light in red, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 430 are displayed. The body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are made to blink red and white. Then, the normal state is restored by the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) or the reset by the staff of the game hall.

In this way, in the center distribution unit 2520 of the center accessory 2500, when the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause vibration so that the game ball B is distributed to the first upper start port 2004, vibration is generated. Since an alarm is issued by the information processing, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

At this time, since the operating flag of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is seen in step S102 and the effecting flag using the pressing operation unit 303 is seen in step S103, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection and notification of a warning due to vibration caused by the erroneous alarm or vibration of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, which makes the player uncomfortable due to the erroneous alarm and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

Further, in the center distribution unit 2520, as described above, the passage port 2532 of the crune 2530 has a non-circular shape, and the rolling surface portion 2531 is provided with peripheral surface portions 2531b having different angles so that the game ball B is provided on the peripheral wall portion 2533. It is difficult to make contact, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause an abnormal vibration, the rolling direction of the game ball B is changed by the abnormal vibration and the pachinko machine 1 is illegally invaded into the passage port 2532. Since this is prevented, it is possible to double-protect against fraudulent activities in combination with vibration alarm processing, so it is possible to reliably prevent the achievement of fraudulent activities and further deter against fraudulent activities. It is possible to provide a powerful pachinko machine 1.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball B The flow speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the left side of the center accessory 2500, that is, the inside It circulates between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513 and the entrance of the lower warp passage 2512 are always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crune 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The game ball B supplied to the crune 2530 turns in the dish-shaped croon 2530 and then is discharged to the lower first taxiway 2521, rolls to the right along the inclination of the first taxiway 2521, and is predetermined. The center distribution piece 2523, which advances and retreats in the rhythm of, is distributed to either the first upper start port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). The game ball B distributed to the first upper start port 2004 is accepted by the first upper start port 2004.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided in the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2514 in the left-right direction, and is discharged to the central discharge portion 2514a or the side. It is discharged from any of the parts 2514b so as to return into the game area 5a. Since the central release portion 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first lower start port 2003, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2514a has a high probability of being the first. It is accepted by the lower start port 2003. The game ball B released from the left and right side discharge portions 2514b of the central discharge portion 2514a may be received by the first lower start port 2003 with a certain probability.

When the game balls B are received in the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are received from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change" (Probability change) hits, "time reduction (time reduction) hits", "probability change time reduction hits", "probability change time reduction no hits", "second big hit", etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time).

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004 (special variation time). ), If the game ball B is received in the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so the first lottery was drawn first. (I) Until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol is completed, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended. The number of pending first special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first lower starting port is started. Even if the game ball B is accepted at the opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 or the obstacle nail. There is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the sub-out port 2021 (left sub-out port 2021a), the first lower starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, the upper right of the center accessory 2500. It passes through either the upper right first guide passage 2541a or the upper right second guide passage 2541b of the guide passage group 2541. The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right guide passage group 2541 circulates either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 that is provided at intervals downward. Then, it is discharged above the attacker unit 2600.

A plurality of obstacle nails are planted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542. Further, the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 has a large entrance, and a gate 2002 is provided at a part of the entrance. Therefore, the game ball B that has passed through the upper right guide passage group 2541 passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability after coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002 circulates in the lower right first guide passage 2542a.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2501, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the second start is performed. The second starting port 2005 closed by the mouth door body 2631 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2005. ..

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2005 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. In addition, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right guide passage group 2542 flows down to any of the attacker upper shelf portion 2612, the central exit 2605, and the right exit 2606 of the attacker unit 2600. The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf of the attacker 2612 is guided to the left, passes through the attacker right guidance passage 2625, and is discharged to the left of the second prize opening 2007. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 is not accepted by the second starting port 2005 and the second major winning opening 2007.

A second major winning opening 2007 is provided downstream (lower) of the central opening 2605 of the attacker unit 2600, and a guide piece 2636 of the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 is provided between the attacker unit 2600 and the second major winning opening 2007. It is provided so that it can move forward and backward. That is, a second starting port 2005 and a second winning opening 2007 are provided downstream of the central port 2605. On the other hand, the downstream of the right opening 2606 joins the central opening 2605 side at a portion below the second starting opening 2005, and only the second major winning opening 2007 is provided. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down to the central opening 2605 may be accepted by the second starting port 2005 or the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the right mouth 2606 may be accepted by the second big winning opening 2005. May be accepted in mouth 2007.

Further, of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542, the central exit 2605 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided below the lower right first guide passage 2542a. , The lower right first guide passage 2542a is more likely to be accepted by the central port 2605, that is, the second starting port 2005 than the lower right second guide passage 2542b.

When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2005 of the attacker unit 2600, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game balls B from the payout device 580 is released from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition to being paid out to 201, in the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)" A lottery will be held for "hits", "time reduction (time reduction) hits", "probability change time reduction hits", "probability change time reduction no hits", "second big hits", etc.). If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the player takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. Suggested in.

In the present embodiment, the second start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the second special until the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the second starting openings 2005, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the second starting opening 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 depends on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, so that the game ball B per unit time for the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005. Even if the number of acceptances is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is rarely executed. , It is possible to make the player positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, or the second start port 2005. As a result, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B can be accepted.

The game ball B, which has flowed down to the central port 2605 or the right port 2606 of the attacker unit 2600 and was not accepted by the second starting port 2005, is placed on the second large winning opening door body 2651 that closes the second large winning opening 2007. It flows down and is guided to the left by the second prize-winning door body 2651 and discharged to the area downstream of the attacker right guidance passage 2625.

Then, when the game ball B flows down at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game ball B is released. It will be accepted in the second prize opening 2007. When the game balls B are received in the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It is paid out to 201.

Further, the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 is distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 by the V distribution unit 2660 provided downstream. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2008, a "big hit" game in which the first big winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern is executed.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the attacker unit 2600 and circulated through the attacker right guidance passage 2625, and the game ball B that has not been accepted by either the second start opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2007 have a high probability of being the first. It flows down onto the first big prize opening door body 2641 that closes the big winning opening 2006. A general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided on the way, and there is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 will be accepted. In addition, a sub-out opening 2021 (right sub-out opening 2021b) is provided on the right side of the first large winning opening 2006, and the first large winning opening 2006 (first large winning opening 2006) is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B that did not flow down onto the door body 2641) is accepted. Further, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the first prize-winning door body 2641 is discharged from the left end side of the first prize-winning door body 2641 and is accepted into the out opening 2020 (right out opening 2020b).

Then, when the game ball B flows down at the timing when the first large winning opening 2006 can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game ball B is released. It will be accepted in the first prize opening 2006. When the game balls B are received in the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It is paid out to 201.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "big hit", or when the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening 2008, the first big winning opening 2006 is used for the game. A predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) has passed after the ball B is in an open state where it can be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the first prize opening 2006. When any of the conditions of, is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball B is in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "Big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "Big hit" or the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol is changed. And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the production image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("short time hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 After making the game ball B acceptable in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In this way, when the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The pattern rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the lottery result of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

The time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) and the time for suggesting the lottery result for the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation-type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed by operating the production operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, effect display device 1600, start port display unit 2110, back front upper effect unit 3200. , Back front left effect unit 3300, back right effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear effect unit 3600, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. It is also possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second embodiment of the door frame]
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 to 213 and the like. 205 is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment, FIG. 206 is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment as viewed from the front right. FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment as viewed from the rear. FIG. 210 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment disassembled into a door frame top ad unit and others and viewed from the front, and FIG. 210 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 211 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 211 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 212 (a) is a side sectional view of the upper part of the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 212 (b) is an exploded side sectional view showing the door frame top ad unit and others in (a). FIG. 213 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a main part viewed from behind by disassembling the right side panel and the right side decorative sheet from the door frame right side unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 213 (b) is a right side view. It is a perspective view which looked at the side panel from the left rear.

In the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, the door frame top unit 450 is newly provided with the door frame top add unit 490 with respect to the door frame 3 of the above (first embodiment). Further, in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, the shapes of the door frame right side base 431 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame right side unit 430 are changed, and the right side right lens 441 is eliminated. So, the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 are newly added. Further, in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, a lock lever 444 for making the right side panel 442 removable is newly added to the door frame base unit 100. Other parts are the same as those of the door frame 3 of the first embodiment, and parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The door frame 3 of the second embodiment includes a door frame top add unit 490 that can change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 by attaching the door frame top unit 450 so as to cover the door frame top unit 450 without removing the door frame top unit 450. A transparent right side panel 442 that is detachably provided on the right side of the door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430, and is provided between the right side panel 442 and the door frame right side base 431. It has a right side decorative sheet 443 on which a predetermined pattern is applied, and a lock lever 444 which is provided on the door frame base unit 100 and can lock the right side panel 442 in a detachable manner.

[8-1. Door frame top ad unit]
The door frame top add unit 490 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. The door frame top add unit 490 makes it possible to change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 without removing the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top ad unit 490 includes a door frame top ad decorative body 491 formed so as to cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front and above, and the upper and lower sides of the door frame top ad decorative body 491. A flat plate-shaped top plate support plate 492 that can close the opening 491d that penetrates in the direction and a top plate support plate 492 that are slidable in the front-rear direction, and the rear end can be attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100. The top ad top plate 493 that is attached to the top ad top plate 493, the two mounting screws 494 that slidably attach the top ad top plate 493 to the top plate support plate 492, and the door frame base unit 100 on the rear end side of the top ad top plate 493. It has a plurality of hand-cranked screws 495 and for mounting on the door.

The top ad decoration body 491 is formed so that the door frame top decoration body 453 can be covered from the front, and is curved in a semi-arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction bulges forward and the center in the left-right direction. Is curved so as to bulge forward, and is provided in front of a semi-tube-shaped decorative body main body 491a that is open to the rear and a central front surface of the decorative body main body 491a in the left-right direction (here, a predetermined shape (here, here). A central decorative body 491b formed in a shape imitating Nata), a lid portion 491c extending rearward from the upper end side of the decorative body main body 491a in a flat plate shape, and penetrating up and down near the center of the lid portion 491c. It has an opening 491d and a locking claw 493c of the top ad top plate 493 and a locked portion 491e which are provided on both the left and right sides of the opening 491d in the lid 491c and can be locked. ..

The decorative body main body 491a of the top ad decorative body 491 is provided with a three-dimensional decoration protruding forward as if the glass is broken on the front side, and has translucency. The central decorative body 491b is formed in a shape imitating Nata, and is formed so that the blade is pierced into the decorative body main body 491a with the handle extending diagonally to the upper right. The opening 491d is provided in a quadrangle that is long on the left and right.

The top plate support plate 492 is formed so that the opening 491d of the top ad decorative body 491 can be closed from above. The top plate support plate 492 is formed so as not to fall downward when the opening 491d is closed. The top plate support plate 492 has a pair of boss portions (not shown) that project downward from the lower surface in a columnar shape and are separated from each other to the left and right. By inserting this boss portion into the slit 493b of the top ad top plate 493, the top ad top plate 493 can be slidably supported in the front-rear direction. Further, in this boss portion, a mounting screw 494 is screwed into the lower end, and the mounting screw 494 prevents the top ad top plate 493 from falling from the top plate support plate 492.

The top ad top plate 493 is formed to have the same size as the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450, and is a flat plate-shaped top plate main body capable of closing the opening 452a of the top top cover 452. From 493a, a pair of slits 493b that penetrate in the vertical direction and extend in the front-rear direction in the top plate main body 493a, and a boss portion of the top plate support plate 492 is slidably inserted, and a pair of slits 493b. Is also provided on the outside in the left-right direction, and the locking claw 493c that can be locked with the locked portion 491e of the top ad decoration body 491 and the top plate body 493a project rearward from the rear side and are spaced in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of (three in this case) mounting pieces 493d, which are provided apart from each other.

The three mounting piece portions 493d of the top ad top plate 493 are inserted from above into the groove portion 464a provided on the rear surface of the speaker box 464 in the door frame top unit 450. The speaker box 464 is provided between the door frame top base 451 and the door frame top decorative body 453, and is attached to the front surface of the door frame top base 451. In this speaker box, a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers are mounted diagonally downward and forward, and the inside is an enclosure capable of amplifying sound. The groove portion 464a of the speaker box 464 is recessed from the rear surface so as to be opened upward and rearward, and when assembled to the door frame 3, a space into which the mounting piece portion 493d can be inserted with the door frame base unit 100 is provided. Form.

When the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached to the door frame 3, the top ad top plate 493 is attached to the opening 452a of the top top cover 452 so as to replace the existing door frame top top plate 468. The screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 is screwed into the mounting piece portion 493d from the rear of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the top ad top plate 493 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the rear end side of the top plate main body 493a, and further has a recess 493e notched forward in a curved shape. The recess 493e serves as a finger hook when the door frame top ad unit 490 (top ad top plate 493) is attached / detached from the door frame 3, and the workability of attachment / detachment is improved.

The hand screw 495 has a head 495a that can be picked up by an operator's finger, and a screw portion 495b that protrudes from the head 495a. The head 495a of the hand screw 495 is provided with a cross-shaped groove, and can be turned by a + screwdriver.

In the door frame top ad unit 490 of the present embodiment, the top ad top plate 493 is located below the lid portion 491c of the top ad decorative body 491. That is, the lid portion 491c of the top ad decorative body 491 is located between the top plate support plate 492 and the top ad top plate 493. The door frame top ad unit 490 is provided so that the rear end of the top ad top plate 493 is located behind the rear end of the lid portion 491c of the top ad decorative body 491. A state in which the boss portion of the top plate support plate 492 is located at the rear end of the slit 493b of the top ad top plate 493 (a state in which the top ad top plate 493 is located at the forward moving end with respect to the top plate support plate 492. ), The locking claw 493c of the top ad top plate 493 is locked to the locked portion 491e of the top ad decorative body 491. As a result, the boss portion and the slit 493b regulate the relative movement of the top ad top plate 493 forward, and the locked portion 491e and the locking claw 493c regulate the relative movement of the top ad top plate 493 to the rear. Relative movement is regulated. Therefore, when the locked portion 491e and the locking claw 493c are released from the lock, the top ad top plate 493 can be pulled out rearward within the length of the slit 493b.

Next, the installation of the door frame top add unit 490 will be described. First, the door frame top top plate 468 (see FIG. 210 (a)) of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 projects rearward from the rear end side and is provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has two mounting pieces (not shown). The three mounting pieces of the door frame top plate 468 are provided at the same positions as the three mounting pieces 493d of the top ad top plate 493. The front end of the door frame top top plate 468 is locked to the front end of the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and the rear end mounting piece is inserted into the groove 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464. It is attached by screwing the threaded portion 495b of the hand screw 495 that penetrates the frame base unit 100 from the rear.

Therefore, in the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3, a plurality of door frame top top plates 468 that close the opening 452a of the top top cover 452 are screwed from the rear in the upper part of the door frame base unit 100. By removing the hand screw 495, only the door frame top top plate 468 can be easily removed. By removing the door frame top top plate 468, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, which are provided inside the door frame top unit 450 through the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, The door frame top right decorative board 457, a pair of top center speakers, a pair of top side speakers, a door frame top relay board, and wiring ECs and connectors connected to them can be confirmed. That is, the door frame top top plate 468 is a lid of the inspection port. In FIG. 210 and the like, the speaker box 464 and the like provided inside are shown opaquely, but they are actually transparent and the inside can be visually recognized well.

To attach the door frame top add unit 490, first remove the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, and then remove it above the door frame top top plate 468 by lifting the rear end side upward. At this time, in the door frame base unit 100, a concave portion 101k that is recessed rearward in a curved shape is formed near the center in the left-right direction of the portion facing the rear end side of the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame base 101. Therefore, the door frame top top plate 468 can be easily removed by using the recess 101k as a finger hook.

After removing the door frame top top plate 468, the door frame top ad unit 490 is positioned in front of the door frame top unit 450 and slanted so that the rear end side is located upward, and the decoration of the top ad decorative body 491 is performed. After covering the body body 491a on the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front, the rear end side is moved downward, and the three mounting pieces 493d are placed on the groove portion 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464. insert. As a result, the top ad top plate 493 is in a state of closing the opening 452a of the top top cover 452. Then, from the rear of the door frame base unit 100, the screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 is passed forward and screwed into the mounting piece portion 493d of the top ad top plate 493 to be tightened. As a result, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame 3.

With the door frame top ad unit 490 attached, the LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are made to emit light to emit light. By illuminating the frame top decorative body 453 with light emission or irradiating light forward with the light guide shaft portion 469 (see FIG. 212), the decorative body main body of the top ad decorative body 491 having translucency by the light. The 491a can be decorated with light emission, and a predetermined light emission effect can be shown to the player.

Further, the decorative body main body 491a of the top ad decorative body 491 covers the semi-tube-shaped door frame top decorative body 453, but does not cover the top lower cover 465, so that the internal speaker box 464 is passed through the top lower cover 465. The sound from the top center speaker and top side speaker attached to the door can be output to the outside without being attenuated.

According to the door frame top add unit 490 of the present embodiment, the door frame top top plate 468, which is a lid for maintenance of the door frame top unit 450, is removed and replaced with the door frame top top plate 468. Since the top add unit 490 can be attached, the door frame top add unit 490 can be attached without removing the door frame top unit 450. At this time, since the door frame top ad unit 490 has a top ad decorative body 491 that covers the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front, the decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453 is provided. Can be hidden and the decoration of the top ad decoration body 491 can be newly shown to the player. Therefore, even if the door frame top unit 450 is not removed from the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be changed by attaching the door frame top add unit 490. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of changing the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3. That is, the door frame top add unit 490 can change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 at low cost.

Further, as described above, by attaching the door frame top ad unit 490, the decoration on the upper part of the door frame 3 can be easily changed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 can be changed by changing the specifications or the model. At the time of replacement, it is possible to attach the door frame top ad unit 490 corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5. As a result, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed at low cost, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top top plate 468 are attached by the hand screw 495, the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top top plate 468 can be attached without tools such as a driver. It can be easily removed. Therefore, even in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the door frame top ad unit 490 can be easily attached, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, since the door frame top add unit 490 does not have electronic parts such as a decorative board, it is not necessary to connect the wiring EC when attaching to the door frame 3, and the time and effort required for attachment is easy. Can be. Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 does not have an electronic component, even if the door frame top ad unit 490 is damaged for some reason and the top ad decorative body 491 or the like comes off, the wiring EC or the top ad decorative body 491 or the like hangs down. There is no such thing.

Further, in the door frame top ad unit 490, since the top ad decorative body 491 that covers the door frame top decorative body 453 from the front has translucency, the door frame top decorative body 453 is luminescently decorated to be topped. The ad decoration body 491 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the light emitting effect of the door frame top unit 450 before the door frame top add unit 490 can be used as it is, and the same light emitting effect as before the door frame top unit 450 can be enjoyed by the player. Further, it is not necessary to change the program for producing the light emission, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached from the rear side of the door frame 3 by the hand screw 495, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 is operated from the outside. This is not possible, and it is possible to prevent the door frame top ad unit 490 from being illegally removed. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the main body frame base 501 is located behind the hand screw 495, so that the hand screw 495 is generated by vibration or the like acting on the pachinko machine 1. Even if it loosens, it does not come off so as to fall off rearward, and the door frame top add unit 490 can be maintained attached.

Although not shown, the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 is formed with a recess into which the hand screw 495 is inserted when the door frame 3 is closed. The recess of the main body frame base 501 may be brought into contact with the outer circumference of the head portion 495a of the hand screw 495. As a result, resistance can be applied to the hand screw 495 in the rotation direction, so that the hand screw 495 can be made difficult to loosen.

Further, although not shown, the door frame top add unit 490 may be provided with a through hole penetrating the front and rear at a position corresponding to the light guide shaft portion 469. As a result, the tip of the light guide shaft portion 469 is directly exposed to the front through the through hole. Therefore, even if the door frame top add unit 490 is attached, a high-brightness light emission effect using the light guide shaft portion 469 is played. Can be shown to others. Further, the door frame top add unit 490 is provided with a light guide portion for guiding light from the light guide shaft portion 469 or the like, and the light guide portion is used to imitate an arbitrary position of the door frame top add unit 490 (for example, Nata). The central decorative body 491b) may be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, although not shown, since the central decorative body 491b of the top ad decorative body 491 in the door frame top ad unit 490 has a shape imitating the nata, the blade portion of the nata in the central decorative body 491b is a mirror. When a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks into the central decorative body 491b (Nata) from below, the mirror-shaped part of the central decorative body 491b (imitation of the blade of Nata). The game board 5 may be reflected in the part). Specifically, for example, a pattern of a light guide plate such as the back front upper first decorative body 3201 in the back front upper effect unit 3200, an effect image displayed on a specific part on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like. May be reflected and visible. When the effect image of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is projected, mirror writing may be displayed on the display screen and reflected on the portion of the blade of the nata of the central decorative body 491b so that it can be read correctly. As a result, the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in order for the player to look into the central decorative body 491b from below, a guide for looking into the central decorative body 491b from below may be displayed or notified.

Further, although not shown, the central decorative body 491b of the top ad decorative body 491 in the door frame top ad unit 490 is designated by printing or sticking a sticker on the lower surface of the portion imitating the blade of Nata. A pattern may be applied. Specifically, for example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate of the back front upper first decorative body 3201 or the like is reflected and reflected on the portion of the central decorative body 491b that imitates the blade of Nata. A pattern may be applied. As a result, even though the light guide plate of the game board 5 does not display the pattern, when looking up at the central decorative body 491b, it is possible to make the pattern of the light guide plate appear to be reflected in the part imitating the blade. , The player can be surprised and wondered, and the player can be entertained.

Further, the lower surface of the portion of the central decorative body 491b that imitates the blade of Nata may be provided with a pattern of the eyes (face) of a predetermined character according to the concept of the game board 5. As a result, when the player playing the game in the pachinko machine 1 notices the pattern of the eyes on the lower surface of the central decorative body 491b, the player always feels as if he / she is seen by a predetermined character. it can.

Further, although not shown, a portion that guides the light from the LED mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 to imitate the blade of Nata in the central decorative body 491b. The pattern on the lower surface of the door may be made capable of emitting light.

Further, a predetermined pattern (or moving image) is projected from the game board 5 side or the door frame right side unit 430 side on the lower surface of the portion of the central decorative body 491b that imitates the blade of Nata, like a projector. You can do it. At this time, the part of the central decorative body 491b that imitates the blade of Nata is made like a mirror to reflect the pattern projected on the central decorative body 491b, and the player's hands and feet, the upper plate 201, and the like. It may be projected onto the effect operation unit 301 or the like.

Further, in the door frame top ad unit 490 of the present embodiment, since the central decorative body 491c of the top ad decorative body 491 protrudes greatly forward, "overhead caution" is aroused to the portion visible to the player. It is desirable to provide a guide display (for example, a sticker) or a cautionary note (for example, a sticker) to be careful not to touch the central decorative body 491c that imitates the blade of Nata.

[8-2. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 213 and the like. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200 as in the above (first embodiment), and the right outer side of the game area 5a is viewed from the front. It is for decoration. In the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 is formed as a flat surface having no reflector portion 431a. Although not shown, a reflector portion 431a recessed so as to be opened forward and to the left is provided on the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431. Further, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is decorated with a polka dot pattern by two-color molding or the like, is provided only in the vicinity of the lower portion of the door frame right side unit 430 from the lower end to a predetermined height.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a transparent right side panel 442 that is detachably provided on the right side of the door frame right side base 431 behind the tubular door frame right side decorative body 435 and a right side panel. The right side decorative sheet 443, which is provided between the 442 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a predetermined pattern, and the right side panel 442, which is provided on the door frame base unit 100, are non-detachably locked. It has a lock lever 444 and a lock lever 444.

The door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430 is formed from a plurality of locking grooves 431b provided at intervals in the vertical direction on the front end edge and the rear end edge, and from the upper surface of the door frame right side base 431. It has two projecting pieces 431c, and two protruding pieces. The locking piece 442b and the locking piece 442c of the right side panel 442 are inserted into the locking groove 431b of the door frame right side base 431. Further, the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431 is inserted into the slit 442e of the right side panel 442.

The right side panel 442 includes a flat panel main body 442a, a lock piece 442b extending flatly from the upper part of the rear end side of the panel main body 442a to the left, and a lock piece 442b at the rear end side of the panel main body 442a. From the locking piece 442c, which is provided at a space below the front end and the front end side at intervals in the vertical direction and extends to the left in a flat plate shape shorter than the locking piece 442b, and from the upper end side of the panel body 442a. It has an upper wall portion 442d extending in a flat plate shape to the left and two slits 442e penetrating the upper wall portion 442d.

The panel body 442a of the right side panel 442 is formed long in the vertical direction. The front end side of the panel body 442a is formed in a shape along the rear end edge of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the rear end side is formed in the vertical direction so as to be in front of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. It is formed. The lock piece 442b and the plurality of locking pieces 442c are provided at a portion corresponding to the locking groove 431b of the door frame right side base 431. The plurality of locking pieces 442c are formed in an inverted L shape whose tips are bent downward.

In the right side panel 442, with the upper wall portion 442d positioned slightly above the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431, a plurality of locking pieces 442c are placed in the locking groove 431b of the door frame right side base 431. The panel body 442a is brought into contact with the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 via the right side decorative sheet 443, and then slid downward so that the projecting piece 431c is inserted into the slit 442e. As a result, a plurality of locking pieces 442c can be locked in the locking groove 431b.

The right side decorative sheet 443 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and a predetermined pattern is printed on the right side decorative sheet 443. As the material of the right side decorative sheet 443, "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " Examples thereof include "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact resistant polystyrene resin", and "polyvinyl chloride".

The lock lever 444 is provided in the upper right corner (upper left corner in the rear view) on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end side is rotatably supported around an axis in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the lock lever 444 can be unlocked by rotating the lock lever 444 so that the rear surface thereof rises vertically and the upper end side moves rearward in the locked state. Although not shown, the lock lever 444 has a lock protrusion protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end, and when the lock lever 444 is in the locked state, the lock protrusion abuts on the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442 from above, and the lock piece The upward slide of the 442b (right side panel 442) is restricted, and the right side panel 442 can be made unattachable (locked).

In the state where the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment is assembled in the door frame 3, a plurality of locking pieces 442c of the right side panel 442 are locked in the locking grooves 431b of the door frame right side base 431. At the same time, the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431 is inserted into the slit 442e, and the movement to the right is restricted. Further, the lock protrusion of the lock lever 444 at the lock position is in contact with the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442 from above, and the upward movement is restricted. As a result, the right side panel 442 is in a non-detachable state.

When removing the right side panel 442, the upper end of the lock lever 444 is pulled backward on the rear side of the door frame 3 so that the lock lever 444 is tilted. As a result, the lock protrusion (not shown) moves away from the upper side of the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442, and the restriction (lock) for the upward movement of the right side panel 442 is released. In this state, the right side panel 442 is slid upward to pull out the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431 from the slit 442e of the upper wall portion 442d, and the plurality of locking pieces 442c and the locking groove 431b are formed. Release the lock. Then, when the right side panel 442 is moved to the right, the locking piece 442c and the locking piece 442b are removed from the locking groove 431b, and the right side panel 442 is removed from the door frame right side base 431. By removing the right side panel 442, the right side decorative sheet 443 can also be removed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 of the door frame right side unit 430 can be removed by operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3. , When replacing the game board 5 due to a specification change, model change, etc. in the pachinko machine 1, the right side panel 442 and the pattern which are decorated corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5 are given. By replacing it with the right side decorative sheet 443, the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 can easily respond to model changes, etc., and provides a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. It can be made easier.

Further, since the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 that form most of the right side surface of the door frame right side unit 430 can be easily replaced, the entire door frame right side unit 430 does not need to be replaced. However, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed by simply replacing the pachinko machine 1 with a right side decorative sheet 443 having a different pattern, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided at low cost and with high appeal.

Further, the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 can be easily removed by simply opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3. Workability on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be improved, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, since the lock lever 444 is provided in the upper right corner on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the main body frame base 501 is behind the lock lever 444. The lock lever 444 is positioned so that it cannot rotate. As a result, the lock by the lock lever 444 is not released by vibration or the like acting on the pachinko machine 1, or the lock lever 444 is not illegally operated to release the lock.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The unit base 3601 of the back-back effect unit 3600 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is used as the fixed base of the present invention, and the back-back lower decorative body 3700 of the present embodiment is used as the movable decorative body of the present invention. The first rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3713, the second rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3723, the third rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3733, the fourth rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3743, and the rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 in the embodiment are the electrons of the present invention. The gear cover 3787 attached to the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 of the present embodiment is attached to the movable base of the present invention, and the wiring locking portion 3787b of the present embodiment is attached to the harness support portion of the present invention. The unit arm 3788 in the embodiment corresponds to the arm of the present invention, the binding band CT in the present embodiment corresponds to the movement restricting means of the present invention, and the harness WH3 in the present embodiment corresponds to the harness of the present invention, respectively.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back-back lower decoration body 3700 that moves according to the progress of the game is provided in the back-back lower decoration body 3700. The harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs connected to the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 and the like is supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 of the right unit 3780. Then, one end side is aligned with the unit arm 3788 connected to the gear cover 3787 so as to extend outward from the gear cover 3787, and is guided from the other end side of the unit arm 3788 to the unit base 3601 side. There is. Then, when the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is moved according to the progress of the game, the unit arm 3788 is relatively displaced (rotated) by the movement of the back rear lower decorative body 3700. Therefore, the unit arm 3788 in the harness WH3 The portion close to one end side of the rear rear part is moved most by the movement of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, and the harness WH3 is easily disengaged at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788. At this time, since the wiring locking portion 3787b is bundled by the binding band CT to regulate the movement of the harness WH3, the harness WH3 is tensioned by moving the back rear lower decorative body 3700 according to the progress of the game. Even if the harness WH3 tries to move away from the wiring locking portion 3787b due to the action of the above, the binding band CT can prevent the harness WH3 from moving along the wiring locking portion 3787b. It is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the stop portion 3787b. Further, since the harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is restricted from moving within the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the wiring ECs are separated from the harness WH3 one by one at the wiring locking portion 3787b. It is possible to prevent a part of the loose wiring EC from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being easily disconnected from the wiring locking portion 3787b. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a problem caused by the harness WH3 being detached from the back-rear lower decorative body 3700, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is possible to surely entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back-back lower decorative body 3700, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most likely to move due to the movement of the back rear lower decorative body 3700. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the wiring locking portion 3787b due to the movement of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, and reliably prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the wiring locking portion 3787b. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably producing the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most easily moved by the movement of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, the back rear lower Even if a force that tries to move the harness WH3 acts due to the movement of the decorative body 3700, the force is blocked at the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b where the binding band CT is provided, and the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753. It is possible to avoid acting on the equal side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753, etc. when the back-rear decorative body 3700 is moved, so that the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753, etc. can be reliably used. It can be operated, and the effect of the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 can be entertained by the player in a good state and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the force for moving the harness WH3 can be cut off by the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788, the wiring locking in the harness WH3 is performed. The portion between the portion 3787b and the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 and the like can be made difficult to move. As a result, it is omitted to provide the binding band CT in the wiring locking portion 3787c provided between the wiring locking portion 3787b provided with the binding band CT and the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the labor required for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the back rear lower decorative body 3700, a wiring locking portion 3787b is provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 so that the harness WH3 runs along the rear surface of the gear cover 3787, and the harness WH3 extending outward from the gear cover 3787 is united. Since the vehicle is guided to the unit base 3601 side along the arm 3788, the harness WH3 connected from the front player side to the back rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 is attached to the gear cover 3787. It can be hidden by a unit arm 3788 or the like to make it difficult to see, and the back and rear lower decorative body 3700 can be made to look good and entertain the player.

Further, since the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b for supporting the harness WH3 is a free end, the harness WH3 can be easily inserted from the open free end side of the wiring locking portion 3787b, and workability can be achieved. Can be improved. At this time, since a hook portion (not shown) protruding toward the gear cover 3787 is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, the harness WH3 is provided together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT. When the binding band CT is tightened and bundled, even if the binding band CT slides together with the harness WH3 in the direction of the free end of the wiring locking portion 3787b, further sliding is prevented by contacting the hook portion, and the binding band It is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b together with the CT, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of surely exerting the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is fastened to the wiring locking portion 3787b extending from the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 in the back rear lower decorative body 3700 with a binding band CT together with the wiring locking portion 3787b. Since they are bundled together, the sliding resistance between the harness WH3 and the wiring locking portion 3787b can be increased by tightening with the binding band CT, and the harness WH3 can be made difficult to come off from the wiring locking portion 3787b. Further, since the harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the wiring ECs are separated from the harness WH3 one by one at the wiring locking portion 3787b. This does not mean that it is possible to prevent a part of the loose wiring EC from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 3787b, and it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being easily disconnected from the wiring locking portion 3787b. be able to.

Further, since the harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the harness WH3 is wired while being bundled by the binding band CT depending on the tightening force by the binding band CT. The locking portion 3787b can be slid in the longitudinal direction. As a result, when it is desired to check the gear cover 3787 hidden by the harness WH3 and the members in front of the gear cover 3787 during maintenance of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, the harness is not bundled by the binding band CT in the conventional technique. Whereas the work was carried out by moving (sliding) the wiring ECs one by one from the WH3, in the present embodiment, a plurality of wiring ECs (harness WH3) can be slid at one time, and the confirmation work is easy. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the binding band CT is composed of a band portion CTa for bundling the harness WH3 and a lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, can be inserted in only one direction, the wiring locking portion. By simply inserting the tip of the band portion CTa wound around the 3787b and the harness WH3 into the lock portion CTb and pulling it, the wiring locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be locked in a tightened state. You can improve your sex. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 3787b, a force that rotates around the axis of the harness WH3 acts on the binding band CT for some reason. However, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the wiring locking portion 3787b, it is possible to prevent the binding band CT from rotating around the axis of the harness WH3, and the binding band CT can be prevented from rotating. It is possible to prevent the tip of the lock portion CTb and the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb from coming into contact with other members, thereby preventing the cause of a malfunction.

Further, since the harness WH3 supported through the wiring locking portion 3787b can be visually recognized from the rear of the back rear lower decorative body 3700, all the wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3 can be moved by the binding band CT. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is regulated, it is possible to prevent the shipment of defective products in which some wiring ECs have come off, and it is easy to confirm the binding band CT in maintenance and the like. be able to.

Further, since the harness WH3 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 3787b, the work of restricting the movement of the harness WH3 by the binding band CT (binding work by the binding band CT) can be easily performed, and the workability can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, since the harness WH3 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 3787b, for example, the binding band CT has low light transmission and has a color different from that of the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3. Then, when the harness WH3 (plurality of wiring ECs) and the band portion CTa are viewed through the wiring locking portion 3787b, it is possible to clearly see that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH3. The binding of the harness WH3 can be surely confirmed, and the wiring locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be easily bound by the binding band CT.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, the contact area is widened as compared with the case where the band portion CTa is brought into contact with the harness WH3 in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. The frictional resistance between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 can be increased. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH3 by the binding band CT can be sufficiently regulated, and the harness WH3 and the wiring EC can be prevented from coming off from the wiring locking portion 3787b to avoid the occurrence of a defect.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH3, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH3 is tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH3 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. Therefore, depending on the strength of the force, the wiring EC The insulating coating film that covers the wiring may deteriorate at an early stage, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuit may easily occur. On the other hand, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, the band portion CTa is wound in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3 to be brought into contact with the harness WH3. Therefore, the contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 (wiring EC) can be widened. Therefore, even if the binding band CT is tightened with the same strength, the force acting by the tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small by making the contact at an angle to widen the contact area. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and the occurrence of problems such as electric leakage and short circuit can be suppressed.

Further, the wiring locking portion 3787b is extended from the gear cover 3787 in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the harness WH3 in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3 when a tension is applied to the harness WH3. Therefore, even if the harness WH3 is pulled or the harness WH3 is pulled at the time of moving the back rear lower decorative body 3700 according to the progress of the game, assembling the pachinko machine 1, maintenance, etc., the wiring locking portion In 3787b, the harness WH3 moves in the direction opposite to the tip, and the harness WH3 does not come off from the wiring locking portion 3787b, so that the pachinko machine 1 capable of surely exerting the above-mentioned action and effect can be provided. it can.

Further, if a plurality of wiring ECs (insulation coatings) connected to the back-rear decorative body decorative substrate 3753 of the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 are made a bright but inconspicuous color such as white or gray, the back-rear lower decorative body is decorated. Even if the portion of the harness WH3 that is not supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b protrudes outward from the front projection range of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 when the movable effect by the body 3700 is executed, the wiring is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the protrusion of the EC (harness WH3), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the movable effect by the back-rear lower decorative body 3700.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 3787b is extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, the wiring locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 are compared with the case where the wiring locking portion 3787b is a rod shape. Since the contact area of the tablet can be widened, the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to exert the action and effect of the binding band CT, and it is possible to reliably regulate the movement of the harness WH3 and further avoid the occurrence of defects.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 3787b is extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, a plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3 in the wiring locking portion 3787b are along the surface of the wiring locking portion 3787b. It becomes easy to spread as if lined up. This makes it easier to dissipate heat from the wiring EC. Further, in this case, since the harness WH3 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 3787b, it is possible to easily confirm the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH3 one by one through the wiring locking portion 3787b.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3 (the portion far from the gear cover 3787), the following excellent features are obtained. It is possible to exert the effect. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wiring locking portion 3787b that is in contact with the harness WH3, the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the gear cover 3787. It is necessary to pull in the direction of, and the gear cover 3787 becomes an obstacle, which makes the bundling work difficult. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the harness WH3 in the wiring locking portion 3787b on the opposite side to the harness WH3, the lock portion CTb is used when the harness WH3 is bundled by the binding band CT. By pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb in the direction away from the gear cover 3787, the wiring locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be tightened for workability. Can be further improved.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side as described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to check the work.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the wiring locking portion 3787b is formed between the harness WH3 and the lock portion CTb. Since it is interposed, the wiring locking portion 3787b can be used as a blocking wall that blocks the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT from coming into contact with the harness WH3. As a result, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled and bundled, the wiring EC of the harness WH3 is in contact with the lock portion CTb. A part of the wiring EC may be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa to which the wiring EC is pulled, and the insulating coating of the wiring EC may be broken. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 3787b on the side opposite to the harness WH3, that is, the wiring locking portion 3787b is between the harness WH3 and the lock portion CTb. Since the harness WH3 (wiring EC) is not in contact with the lock portion CTb, even if the tip of the band portion CTa through which the lock portion CTb is inserted is pulled, the wiring EC is performed together with the band portion CTa. A part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the lock portion CTb, the insulation coating of the wiring EC can be prevented from being torn, and the harness WH3 bound by the binding band CT can be protected.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the harness from the wiring locking portion 3787b is used for maintenance and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1. When removing the WH3, the work of cutting the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be facilitated. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator side, a cutting tool such as a nipper is guided along the lock portion CTb to damage other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without the band portion CTa.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely contacted with the harness WH3, the flat plate-shaped or strip-shaped wiring locking portion 3787b is brought together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT. When the harness WH3 is bundled, since the wiring locking portion 3787b has a width, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT can be automatically brought into contact with the harness WH3 at an angle, as described above. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits various effects.

Further, since the hook portion is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, if the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b is formed obliquely so as to move away from the gear cover 3787 toward the tip including the hook portion, the wiring is locked. The harness WH3 and the binding band CT can be easily inserted between the wiring locking portion 3787b and the gear cover 3787 from the tip end side of the portion 3787b, and the workability can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the door frame top provided on the upper part of the outer periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 is initially provided. It is used so that the entire unit 450 can be seen. That is, it is used in a state where the door frame top add unit 490 is not attached. In this initial state, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are appropriately made to emit light, the door frame top unit 450 The door frame top decorative body 453 can be light-emitting decorated, and the player can be entertained by the light-emitting effect of the door frame top unit 450. Then, for example, a change (model change) of the game board 5 provided in the main body frame 4, a full model change or a minor change, a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, a holding of an event in the game hall, etc. are triggered. The door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame top unit 450. Specifically, after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3 to remove the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 to cover the top. Make the opening 452a of 452 visible. Next, after fitting the top ad top plate 493 of the door frame top ad unit 490 into the opening 452a, the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3 to rotate the top ad top plate 493 mounting piece. The top ad top plate 493 is attached (fixed) by screwing it into the portion 493d. After that, by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 to which the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached can be obtained. When removing the top ad top plate 493, it can be returned to the initial state by attaching the door frame top plate 468 to the opening 452a after removing the top ad top plate 493 in the reverse procedure of the above. When the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame top unit 450 in this way, the decoration of the portion to which the door frame top add unit 490 is attached can be changed, so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be significantly changed. The changed appearance can strongly attract the player's attention and enhance the appeal to the player. Further, with the door frame top add unit 490 attached, the door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. When a plurality of LEDs are appropriately emitted, the door frame top ad unit 490 can be light-emitting and decorated via the door frame top unit 450, and the light emitting effect of the door frame top ad unit 490 entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, with the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 as they are, the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained by simply attaching the door frame top ad unit 490 so as to cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front. Since the appearance can be significantly changed, it is not necessary to remove the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 and replace them with another one, and the cost for changing the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Therefore, by attaching the door frame top ad unit 490, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of enhancing the appealing power to the player at low cost.

Further, the opening 452a of the top top cover 452 of the door frame top unit 450 is provided on the peripheral surface of the door frame top unit 450 opposite to the central side of the door window 101a, that is, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the opening 452a (door frame top top plate 468 or top ad top plate 493) of the door frame top unit 450. Therefore, even if an undecorated door frame top top plate 468 or top ad top plate 493 is used, deterioration of the appearance can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the door frame top ad unit 490 can be exhibited. In addition, an inexpensive door frame top top plate 468 and top ad top plate 493 that are not decorated can be used, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame top top plate 468 is removed from the opening 452a of the top top cover 452 in the door frame top unit 450, and then the top ad top plate 493 is fitted into the opening 452a to attach the door. Compared to the case where the frame top unit 450 and the door frame 3 are sandwiched from the front and back and the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached, the rear end of the door frame top ad unit 490 protrudes from the outer periphery of the door frame 3. Since there is nothing wrong with it, the door frame top ad unit 490 can be made to look like it was attached to the pachinko machine 1 from the beginning instead of being attached later, which makes the player feel disappointed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the door frame top ad unit 490 attached, and to fully exert the decorative effect of the door frame top ad unit 490 to enhance the appeal to the player. Can be done.

Further, the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached so as to cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame top ad unit 490 is light-emittingly decorated via the door frame top unit 450. Therefore, the door frame top ad unit 490 is not provided with an LED (decorative board) for light emission decoration, and there is no need to connect the wiring EC to the door frame top ad unit 490. Even if the frame top ad unit 490 is detached from the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top ad unit 490 does not hang down due to the wiring EC, and the door frame top ad unit 490 in the door frame top unit 450 does not cause the door frame top ad unit 490 to hang down. Only the decoration of the covered door frame top decorative body 453 becomes visible, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 does not deteriorate, and the use of the pachinko machine 1 can be continued without any problem.

Further, since the door frame top add unit 490 can be attached or detached by rotating the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, the door frame 3 can be attached to or detached from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the closed state, the door frame top top plate 468 and the door frame top ad unit 490 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be removed, and the door frame top top plate 468 and the door frame top ad unit 490 are removed. It is possible to avoid mischief that may be removed, fraudulent acts through the opening 452a of the top cover 452 that appears by removing the door frame top top plate 468 and the door frame top ad unit 490, and the like.

Further, the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 can be removed by rotating the manual screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, and the door frame top can be removed from the front, up, down, left and right directions. Since the top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 cannot be removed, even if some force acts on the top ad top plate 493, it can be made difficult to be removed from the door frame top unit 450. Further, since the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 are attached by the hand screw 495, the attachment strength of the door frame top add unit 490 is increased as compared with the case where the door frame top ad unit 490 is attached by locking. be able to. Therefore, even if some force acts on the top ad top plate 493, it can be made difficult to come off from the door frame top unit 450. Therefore, the door frame top top plate 468 and the door frame top ad unit 490 come off during the game. , It is possible to surely prevent the game from being interrupted and deteriorating the player's interest, and to allow the player to enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 in a good state and suppress the decrease in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, since the door frame top ad unit 490 is light-emittingly decorated via the door frame top unit 450, a program for directing the door frame top unit 450 to perform a light-emitting effect is provided for the door frame top ad unit. It can be used as it is even when the 490 is attached, and an increase in cost for changing the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 is light-emitting decorated via the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top ad unit 490 is not provided with an LED (decorative substrate) for light-emitting decoration. , The cost of the door frame top ad unit 490 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of enhancing the appeal to the player at a low cost can be provided. Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 is not provided with an LED (decorative substrate), it is not necessary to connect the wiring EC when installing the door frame top ad unit 490, and it takes time and effort to attach / detach the door frame top ad unit 490. Can be made easy.

Further, since the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 are attached by the hand screw 495, the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad do not need to be used with a tool such as a driver or a wrench. Since the top plate 493 can be easily attached and detached, the time and effort required for attaching the door frame top ad unit 490 can be facilitated, and the cost for changing the decoration in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. it can.

Further, the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 are attached by the hand screw 495, and the head 495a of the hand screw 495 is accommodated in the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Since the possible recess is provided, when the pachinko machine 1 in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 is used, an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted from the outside to rotate the hand screw 495. Even if it is attempted to be performed, since the head of the hand screw 495 is housed in the groove of the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from reaching the head of the hand screw 495, and the hand screw 495 can be used. It is possible to prevent the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 from being removed by being turned, and the opening 452a from which the door frame top top plate 468 and the top ad top plate 493 are removed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the door.

When attaching / detaching the door frame top plate 468 or the top ad top plate 493, it is desirable that the hand screw 495 does not come off from the door frame 3. As a result, when attaching / detaching the door frame top top plate 468 or top ad top plate 493, the hand screw 495 that has come off the door frame 3 may be lost, or it may invade the main body frame 4 and cause a problem. It is possible to avoid becoming or doing.

Further, it is desirable that the main body frame 4 is provided with a contact portion that comes into contact with the head 495a of the hand screw 495 when the door frame 3 is closed. As a result, in the state of use of the pachinko machine 1 in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 is attempted to be rotated by vibration acting on the pachinko machine 1 or contact with an illegal tool. Even if the force is applied, the contact portion is in contact with the head 495a, so that resistance can be given to the rotation of the hand screw 495, so that the hand screw 495 will rotate. It can be suppressed, and the hand screw 495 can be disengaged without permission, or the hand screw 495 can be resisted against fraudulent acts.

Further, the door frame top add unit 490 is mounted on the light or the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 via the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. A light guide means capable of guiding direct light from a plurality of LEDs is provided, and the top ad decoration in front of the portion where the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame top add unit 490 is light-emitting and decorated by the light guide means. A portion (for example, the central decorative body 491b) different from the decorative body main body 491a of the body 491 may be made capable of light emitting decoration. As a result, even if the door frame top ad unit 490 is not provided with an LED for luminescent decoration, any part where the light from the door frame top unit 450 can be guided by the light guide means to enhance the decoration effect is luminescently decorated. Therefore, it is possible to present a light emitting effect that can entertain the player more, and it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player. ..

Further, since the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 can be removed by rotating the manual screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, for example, different decorations are applied. By preparing another door frame top top plate 468 and replacing it with the door frame top top plate 468, the decoration of the part of the door frame top top plate 468 in the door frame top unit 450 can be easily changed. .. This also makes it possible to change the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost, and it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player by changing the appearance.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the rear cell 1130 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the game board 5. When the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached through the support hole 1131 of the rear surface cell 1130 provided in the rear portion of the center accessory 2500 or the like, the rear surface cell 1130 is the flat plate-shaped main body piece 1141 of the game panel 1100 and the cell fixing piece 1140. It is located between and, and the movement to the rear is restricted by the main body piece 1141. At this time, since the outer shape of the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the main body piece 1141 is smaller than the inner shape of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 and the protrusion 1142 Since a gap is formed between the outer circumference and the outer circumference, the rear cell 1130 can be moved in the direction (vertical direction and horizontal direction) along the rear surface of the game panel 1100 within the range of the gap, and the temperature and humidity can be adjusted. It is possible to absorb the relative shrinkage difference of the rear cell 1130 with respect to the game panel 1100 due to the environment such as. Further, since the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the main body piece 1141 protrudes longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130, the thickness between the game panel 1100 and the main body piece 1141 is larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130. Since a gap is formed, the rear cell 1130 can be moved in the front-rear direction within the range of the gap, and even if the rear cell 1130 undulates in the front-rear direction due to an environment such as temperature or humidity, the gap causes the rear cell 1130 to move in the front-rear direction. The waviness can be absorbed. Therefore, even if the sheet-shaped rear cell 1130 provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 expands and contracts more than the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the rear cell 1130 However, the cell fixing piece 1140 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 through the support hole 1131 movably supports the game panel in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction within a certain range. Since it is supported in a state where it can be expanded and contracted with respect to 1100, the rear cell 1130 can be freely expanded and contracted. Therefore, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, wrinkles and cracks do not occur in the rear cell 1130, and the decorative effect of the rear cell 1130 can be maintained, so that the rear cell visible through the transparent game panel 1100 can be maintained. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the pattern of 1130, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) in the rear cell 1130 is provided in a portion behind the center accessory 2500 or the like provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, a predetermined pattern is extracted. The support hole 1131 can be made difficult to see by the front center accessory 2500 or the like, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) being visible can be suppressed, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be suppressed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can improve the appearance and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is provided on the game panel 1100 in a state where it can be expanded and contracted by using the cell fixing piece 1140 and is not attached to the game panel 1100 as in the conventional technique, the transparent game panel 1100 is decorated. It is possible to easily reduce the time and effort required for the pachinko machine 1 and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, in the game panel 1100 to be cut, the rear cell 1130 can be attached by using the cell fixing piece 1140 after the cutting, so that the rear cell 1130 is not damaged during the cutting of the game panel 1100. Absent. Further, the machined surface is not roughened due to the difference in material between the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130, and the finishing process after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel 1100 formed so as to have the opening 1112 by cutting or injection molding, since the rear cell 1130 is not attached, the labor required for the attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the rear cell 1130 can be provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 more easily than the conventional technique, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is provided behind a part of the game panel 1100, the amount of the rear cell 1130 used can be reduced as compared with the case where the rear cell 1130 is provided on the entire surface of the game panel 1100. It can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is transparent, it is difficult for the player to see the game panel 1100. Therefore, when looking inside the game area 5a, a decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100, etc. Therefore, depending on the player, it becomes difficult to focus on the game ball B circulating in front of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B becomes difficult to see, which reduces the interest in the game. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent game panel 1100, the player can move in the game area 5a. When viewed, it becomes easier to focus on the pattern of the rear cell 1130. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused, and the inside of the game area 5a is focused. It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the game ball B in circulation, to entertain the movement of the game ball B, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern is provided on a part of the rear of the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the rear cell 1130 is provided rearward by the pattern of the rear cell 1130. The decoration can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, if a decorative body capable of luminescent decoration is provided behind the rear cell 1130, the player is not aware of the presence of the decorative body by the pattern of the rear cell 1130 when the decorative body is not luminescent decorated. Can be done. Then, when the decorative body is light-emitting decorated according to the progress of the game, the rear cell 1130 is light-emitting decorated by the light from the rear decorative body, so that the player cannot foresee the existence of the decoration. It is possible to make the player aware of the existence of the body, to surprise the player greatly, to make the player strongly think that an opportunity has arrived, and to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the decorative body provided behind by the rear cell 1130 can be hidden so as not to be seen from the player side, the game panel can be hidden from the state invisible by the rear cell 1130 as a decorative body. When the movable decorative body is moved according to the progress of the game so that it can be visually recognized through the opening 1112 penetrating the front and back of the 1100, the movable decorative body appears according to the progress of the game. I can show you. Therefore, the appearance of the movable decorative body can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous to the player. ) Can be strongly thought to occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is supported on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 by the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached to and detached from the game panel 1100 by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the game panel 1100. Can be made to. As a result, by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the game panel 1100, the rear cell 1130 having a different pattern can be attached to or replaced with the game panel 1100, so that the specifications and model of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. It is possible to easily deal with the above, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separated, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when a decorative film is attached to a game panel as in the conventional technique, if an opening is provided in the game panel, the portion of the opening in the decorative film is cut off, so that the inside of the opening is filled with the decorative film. I couldn't decorate it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separated, even if the game panel 1100 is provided with the opening 1112, a part of the rear cell 1130 is partially covered with the opening 1112. By extending inward, the inside of the opening 1112 can be decorated, the pachinko machine 1 having a different appearance from the conventional one can be obtained, and it is easy to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Can be done. At this time, in the center accessory 2500 or the like attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, a part of the rear cell 1130 is extended behind the portion on the center side of the peripheral edge of the opening 1112. The portion of the center accessory 2500 can be decorated from behind by the pattern of the rear cell 1130, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since the cell fixing piece 1140 is made transparent, the cell fixing piece 1140 can be made difficult to see from the front through the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, and the deterioration of the appearance in the game area 5a can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, since the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided with a positioning pin 1144 that protrudes forward from a position different from the protrusion 1142 in the main body piece 1141 and is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The cell fixing piece 1140 can be made non-rotatable around the axis in the front-rear direction by the mounting screw and the positioning pin 1144 screwed into the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 1143. Therefore, when the cell fixing piece 1140 rotates for some reason, the cell fixing piece 1140 comes into contact with other members to cause a problem, or the cell fixing piece 1140 becomes easily visible to the player, so that the cell fixing piece 1140 is in the game area 5a. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unattractive.

Further, since the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 is provided behind the peripheral wall portion 2511a projecting forward in the center base 2511 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 is transparently formed. However, the peripheral wall portion 2511a projecting forward in a wall shape makes it difficult to see the rear support hole 1131 due to the diffuse refraction of light, and the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) looks good. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress deterioration, improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 provided in the attacker unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 have a flat plate shape. The guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are provided so as to overlap at least a part of the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening / closing link 2637, and the opening / closing link 2647 in a plan view. , The dimensions of the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction can be reduced. Further, since the flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are provided so as to intersect the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647 in the front view, the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first large are provided. It is possible to reduce the vertical dimension of the winning opening opening / closing unit 2640. Further, since the flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are provided above or below the starting port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642, the guide piece 2636 and the first prize are won in a plan view. The mouth door body 2641 can be provided so that the starting port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 overlap each other, and the dimensions of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are reduced in the front-rear direction. It becomes possible. Further, since the flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are provided with a notch 2636b and a notch 2641b for avoiding contact with the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647, the opening / closing link is provided in a plan view. The 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647 can be brought as close as possible to the guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641. Since the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the space for arranging other members (decorative bodies) in the pachinko machine 1 is relatively wide. The space can be used to enlarge the decorative body or provide a new decorative body. Further, as described above, since the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit can be made smaller. The degree of freedom in arranging the 2640 can be increased, and the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be provided at positions different from those of the conventional pachinko machine. From such a thing, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having an unprecedented appearance, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 are provided with a notch 2636b and a notch 2641b for avoiding contact with the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647, the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 In order to reduce the size of the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640, the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening / closing link 2637, the opening / closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first prize opening door body 2641 are densely packed. Since the cutout portion 2636b and the cutout portion 2641b can prevent the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647 from coming into contact with the guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641, the starting port solenoid 2632 and The guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 can be advanced and retreated without any problem by the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the functions of the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are surely exhibited. be able to.

Further, in the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, a container-shaped unit case composed of a first case portion 2633, a first case portion 2634, a second case portion 2634, and a second case portion 2644. The 2635 and the unit case 2645 accommodate and support the starting port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening / closing link 2637, the opening / closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first prize opening door body 2641. It does not have a built-in decorative board on which a sensor for detecting the ball B and a light emitting means such as an LED are mounted, and the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are smaller. Can be transformed into. Further, since the sensor and the decorative board are not built in, the sensor and the decorative board can be arranged independently from the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the distribution route of the pachinko machine, save the design man-hours associated with the change of the distribution route (flow path), and reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and cope with the short delivery time.

By the way, in a unit having a built-in sensor in a case as in the conventional technology, in order to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit, a unit in which the sensor is not built-in is removed from the case depending on the model used. It is possible to use it. However, in this case, in order to obtain a mass production effect by diverting the unit to a plurality of models, both a unit in which the sensor is attached and a unit in which the sensor is removed are manufactured in the same unit. This makes it complicated to manufacture the unit, and it becomes difficult to obtain a sufficient mass production effect. In addition, if the same unit has a mixture of units with the sensor removed, there is a risk of accidentally assembling a unit without a sensor when assembling the pachinko machine, which may cause a malfunction. At the same time, it is necessary to check the unit at the time of assembly, which causes a problem that the cost increases due to the time and effort required. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are not provided (built-in) with a sensor or the like, they are used in the model to be used. Regardless, the same second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be used. Therefore, if only the same second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are manufactured. It is good and a sufficient mass production effect can be obtained. Further, since the same second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 do not have different functions, the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first large opening / closing unit 2630 and the first large are used when assembling the pachinko machine 1. It is not necessary to check the winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to an assembly error, and it is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly and reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, the starting port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 for advancing and retreating the guide piece 2636 and the first winning opening door body 2641 are used as solenoids. Compared with the case where the starting port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 are used as the drive motor, the response of the guide piece 2636 and the first winning opening door body 2641 to move forward and backward can be made faster. Further, since the plungers appear and disappear in the left-right direction from the solenoids as the starting port solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642, the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 are in the front-rear direction. The size can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure a space behind the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640. Therefore, it is possible to make the accessory or decoration behind the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 or the first prize opening opening / closing unit 2640 larger, or to arrange a new accessory or decoration behind. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by them, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the rear character or the like. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, the game ball B cannot be brought into contact with the guide piece 2636 and the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the first winning opening door body 2641. The game ball B is the guide piece 2636 or the first large when the guide piece 2636 or the first big prize opening door body 2641 is projected forward by the start port solenoid 2632 or the first attacker solenoid 2642. Even if the game ball B circulates on the winning door body 2641, the game ball B does not come into contact with the guide piece 2636 or the notch 2636b or the notch 2641b penetrating the first large winning door body 2641 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the distribution direction of the game ball B circulating on the guide piece 2636 and the first prize-winning door body 2641 changes, or the game ball B stops on the guide piece 2636 and the first prize-winning door body 2641. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a problem as to occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the occurrence of the problem and degrading the interest.

Further, in the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, the guide piece 2636 and the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the first winning opening door body 2641 are moved forward from the rear end side. Since it is provided in a notch shape so as to be recessed, the guide piece 2636 and the rear end side of the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b in the first prize opening door body 2461 are opened rearward, so that the guide piece 2636 and the guide piece 2636 The opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647 can be easily inserted into the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b from the rear end side of the first prize opening door body 2641, and the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first The labor required for assembling the large winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be facilitated, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the guide piece 2636 and the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the first prize opening door body 2641 have a notch shape that is open to the rear, so that the guide piece 2636 and the first prize are won. When the door body 2641 is projected forward, a part of the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647 can be projected rearward from the rear end side of the guide piece 2636 and the first prize-winning door body 2641. It will be possible. That is, the rear end side of the guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 can be positioned in front of the rear end of the opening / closing link 2637 and the opening / closing link 2647. As a result, the dimensions of the guide piece 2636 and the first prize opening door body 2641 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so that the second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640 can be further miniaturized. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, in the second start opening opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, the starting opening solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening / closing link 2637, the opening / closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first winning opening door The container-shaped unit case 2635 and unit case 2645 that accommodate and support the body 2461 are composed of the first case portion 2633 and the first case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and the first winning opening opening / closing unit 2640, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in this case, since the unit case 2635 and the unit case 2645 are composed of the first case portion 2633 and the first case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644, the starting port Solenoid 2632, first attacker solenoid 2642, open / close link 2637, open / close link 2647, guide piece 2636, first prize opening door body 2641 first case part 2633, first case part 2634, second case part 2634, second case It can be sandwiched between the parts 2644 and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, in the second start port opening / closing unit 2630, since the portion (detection unit) through which the game ball B in the second start port sensor 2601 passes and is detected is provided in front of the unit case 2635, the second start port sensor Since the detection unit of 2601 is located in front, the distance from the guide piece 2636 (second start port 2005) to the second start port sensor 2601 can be shortened as much as possible, and the winning game ball B can be swiftly moved. In addition to being able to detect the game ball B, the detection of the game ball B by the second start port sensor 2601 can be easily seen from the player side, and by visually recognizing the detection of the game ball B, the player's expectation for the game can be raised. It can be raised and entertained.

In addition, the first large winning opening decorative substrate 2672 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward is provided below the first large winning opening door body 2641 projecting forward, and the first large winning opening is provided. The light from the LED of the decorative substrate 2672 is irradiated from below to the game ball B on the first prize-winning door body 2641 through the notch 2641b of the first prize-winning door body 2641. As a result, the light from the LED of the first prize opening decorative substrate 2672 can be irradiated to the game ball B circulating on the first prize opening door body 2641 through the notch 2641b. It is possible to show the player the effect that the game ball B circulating on the first prize opening door body 2641 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen on a pachinko machine, and the player's interest is strong. It can be attracted, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back-back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has a back-back-top decoration lens 3651 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface. When the body 3650 is in the upper retracted position, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is positioned so as to straddle the upper front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by showing the effect image in good condition to the player. In this state, when the unlocking solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 is operated according to the progress of the game to release the restriction of the fall by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 moves to the lower appearance position. Fall. The back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is provided with a lock mechanism 3660 having an unlocking solenoid 3663, and also has a back-rear upper decorative lens 3651 and a back-rear upper decorative substrate 3653 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect display device 1600 is formed in a size that straddles the left and right sides, the weight of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is heavier than that of the elevating decorative body provided in the conventional pachinko machine. The back rear upper decorative body 3650 is urged downward by the auxiliary spring 3616. Therefore, when the restriction on the fall by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is released according to the progress of the game, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at a speed faster than the free fall due to the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616. However, it is possible to show the player the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 that falls at a faster speed than before. At this time, the large back and upper decorative bodies 3650 on the left and right fall while blocking the effect image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The fall of the rear upper decorative body 3650 (movable effect) can be surely noticed, and the movable effect of the back upper decorative body 3650 can be enjoyed.

Then, when the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 that has fallen from the retracted position comes into contact with the shock absorbing portion 3781f of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 provided at the appearance position, the shock absorbing portion 3781f Because the impact of the fall is absorbed, it is difficult for the back-back upper decorative body 3650 that has fallen to the appearance position to bounce upward. Further, if the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 reaches the appearance position and at the same time the ascent is restricted by the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661, the dropped back-rear upper decorative body 3650 rebounds upward at the appearance position. Can be prevented. For this reason, when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 stops at the appearance position without bouncing, so that the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is slammed. Or, it is possible to make it look like it has fallen down, and it is possible to show the player a powerful falling effect with a sense of weight, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. In addition, since the back and upper decorative body 3650 can show the player a powerful and high-impact falling effect with a feeling of weight, something good for the player by the falling effect of the back and upper decorative body 3650. It is possible to strongly think that there is, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game, to entertain the player, and to suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear upper decorative substrate 3653 according to the progress of the game, the back rear upper decorative lens 3651 on the front surface of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 can be brightly luminescent and decorated. It is possible to strongly attract the player's attention to the back-back upper decoration body 3650.

Further, by appropriately combining the falling effect (movable effect) of the back-rear upper decorative body 3650, the light-emitting effect by the light-emitting decoration, and the effect image by the effect display device 1600, various effects can be presented to the player. This makes it difficult for players to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Further, since the shock absorbing portion 3781f can absorb the impact caused by the fall of the back rear upper decorative body 3650, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back rear lower decorative body 3700 provided at the appearance position due to the impact caused by the drop, etc. It is possible to prevent the player from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the like, and also to prevent the back rear upper decorative body from being damaged. It is possible to entertain the player with the falling effect (movable effect) by the 3650 in a good state, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the lock latch 3661 is configured to be projected by the urging force of the lock spring 3662 to regulate the fall and rise of the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and the lower surface of the upper lock claw 3661b that regulates the rise in the lock latch 3661. The upper surface of the lower lock claw 3661c, which regulates the fall, is tilted so as to be higher toward the tip, and the upper surface of the lower lock claw 3661c is tilted so as to be lower toward the side edge. When dropped, the tilt of the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 causes the lock latch 3661 to automatically retract against the urging force of the lock spring 3662, and when the back rear upper decoration 3650 reaches the appearance position. , The retracted lock latch 3661 protrudes by the urging force of the lock spring 3662, the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e to immediately regulate the rise, and the back rear upper decorative body 3650 bounces upward at the appearance position. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised from the appearance position to the retracted position, the lock latch 3661 protruding from the inclined upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b is retracted against the urging force of the lock spring 3662. When the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 reaches the retracted position, the retracted lock latch 3661 protrudes by the urging force of the lock spring 3662, and the upper lock claw 3661b is inserted into the lock groove 3603 to prevent the fall. In this way, even if the unlocking solenoid 3663 is not driven, the pachinko machine can automatically regulate (lock) the fall and rise by raising and lowering the back and upper decorative body 3650, and has the above-mentioned effects. 1 can be surely embodied.

In addition, the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 makes it possible to regulate the rise from the appearance position, and at the appearance position, the back rear lower decoration body 3700 that comes into contact with the back rear upper decoration body 3650 and can move upward is provided. Therefore, after dropping the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 to the appearance position, the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised while the upward movement is restricted by the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661. , The lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 exerts a force to lift the back rear lower decorative body 3700 upward, so that the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back rear lower decorative body 3700 rise together. It will be. Therefore, if the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped and then raised, it will be raised together with the back-rear lower decorative body 3700, and it seems that the back-rear upper decorative body 3650 and the back-rear lower decorative body 3700 are united. Since the large ornament rises, it can surprise the player greatly, it can have an extremely strong impact, and it makes the player strongly think that there is something good, and expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when raising the back rear upper decorative body 3650 from the appearance position, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is urged upward by the auxiliary spring 3616, so that the load applied to the raising of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 Can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the game panel 1100, that is, behind the game area 5a where the game is played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine provided with the effect display device 1600 can be obtained, so that it is difficult for a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine to hesitate. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. Further, behind the game panel 1100, the back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided at a position on the left side away from the center of the effect display device 1600, so that the back front left effect unit 3300 is the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult for the effect image displayed on the display screen of the player to be disturbed, and it is possible to fully entertain the effect image to the player. Since the back front left decorative body 3301 is provided on the front surface of the back front left effect unit 3300, the front side of the effect display device 1600 and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the back front left decorative body 3301. , The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided with a back front left back decorative sheet 3308 facing rearward on the rear surface, but from the front player side, the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left decorative body). The back front left back decorative sheet 3308 cannot be seen through 3301). On the other hand, since the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back front left effect unit 3300, the back front left back decoration provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 by the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The decoration of the sheet 3308 can be reflected forward. That is, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. However, in the state where the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (normal state), the display screen is bright, so that the brightness cancels the reflection of the pattern on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308. Therefore, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is rarely seen.

In this state, if the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is intentionally darkened (for example, blacked out), the reflection of the pattern on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 becomes relatively bright with respect to the display screen. , The design of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be seen on the display screen. That is, when the display screen is darkened in the effect display device 1600, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, so that the effect displayed on the display screen. Compared with the image, the pattern (reflection pattern 3310) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible (see FIG. 197). At this time, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, the back surface reflected on the display screen when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened. The front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be easily seen by the player. For this reason, during the execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, the back front left of the rear surface of the effect unit 3300 can be darkened or the display screen can be intentionally darkened. Since the pattern (decoration) of the back decoration sheet 3308 can be shown to the player on the display screen, even if the appearance is similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 is displayed on the display screen. It is possible to show the player a production that has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, which reflects the pattern of the game, and it can strongly attract the player's attention and give a strong impact, and at the same time, something good. It is possible to make people think that there is something to do, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the design of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left production unit 3300 is different from the design of the back front left decorative body 3301, the display screen of the production display device 1600 is darkened. When the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is made visible to the player, the display screen is dark to the player, and the decoration is clearly different from the back front left decorative sheet 3301 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308). Can be recognized as being reflected, and can give a strong impact to the player. More specifically, in a normal state in which the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the front surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 has a predetermined expression. Only the character can be seen, and the character having a different facial expression as the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is not reflected on the display screen. Then, when the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, the characters of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 having a different facial expression from the back front left decorative body 3301 appear on the display screen so as to be adjacent to the back front left effect unit 3300. Since it appears to be reflected, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the face behind (separately) the character can be seen, and it is possible to entertain the player with the gap in the facial expression of the character. If this effect is executed before, for example, a player such as a jackpot game has an advantageous advantageous gaming state, the effect strongly makes the player think that the advantageous gaming state does not occur. It is possible to surprise the player and further enhance his interest by becoming an advantageous gaming state (“big hit”) after that.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, light is displayed on the display screen (front) of the effect display device 1600 from between the back front left effect unit 3300 and the effect display device 1600. When the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 can be sufficiently darkened, and the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be made difficult to enter. The pattern of the above can be easily reflected, and the reflected pattern (reflection pattern 3310) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be easily seen from the player side, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the reflective pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 reflected on the display screen can be seen faintly. By shortening the time for darkening the display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, depending on the player, the reflection pattern 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be noticed. As a result, the player can make the player grin or be surprised by noticing that the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, which makes the player feel like he has gained. Can entertain the player.

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, thereby pachinko. Since the reflection pattern 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be seen from the front of the machine 1, the positional relationship between the effect display device 1600 and the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308). Depending on the situation, it may be difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the reflected back front left back decorative sheet 3308, and the player sitting in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or the pachinko machine may be difficult to see. It is possible for the player in the vicinity of 1 to easily see the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the players can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 is selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to make it easier to play, and it is possible to entertain the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, the display screen is displayed only by the right eye of the left and right eyes of the player sitting in front. It is possible to hide the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 that has been crowded. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be seen only by the right eye, so the reflected pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is visible. Can be shown in an uncertain state, and a phantom-looking effect can be presented to the player, and the eerie feeling of the effect can be amplified to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the back box 3000 and the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back box 3000, the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet). Since the distance between the 3308) and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction can be made as long as possible, the back front left back decorative sheet reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. The pattern of 3308 can be made easy to see. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the effect of the above-mentioned effects on the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center distribution unit 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion higher than the radius of the game ball B on the outer peripheral edge through the upper warp passage 2513. The game ball B supplied near the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 of the crune 2530 provided with the 2533 is on the central surface portion 2531a of the rolling surface portion 2531 while being suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 due to the inclination of the peripheral surface portion 2531b. Will roll and enter the passage 2532. At this time, the shape of the passage port 2532 provided in the rolling surface portion 2531 is directed so that the longest opposed line connecting the two portions facing each other through the center extends in the front-rear direction. Since it has a circular shape (square in this case), it prevents the game ball B from turning around at the edge of the passage port 2532, and prevents the game ball B from being kicked by the passage port 2532. This allows the game ball B to quickly enter the passage port 2532. Therefore, since it is visible to the player that the center distribution piece 2523 provided downstream of the Kroon 2530 is moving back and forth, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to hit or shake the center distribution piece 2523. Even if the game ball B is attempted to enter the passage port 2532 at a desired timing so that the game ball B can be distributed to the first upper start port 2004, the game ball B moves to the passage port 2532 while the timing is measured. It is possible to prevent the achievement of cheating and reduce the burden on the game hall side due to cheating.

Further, since the passing port 2532 has a non-circular shape, it is possible to prevent (or prevent) the game ball B from being kicked by the passing port 2532 and entering another passing port 2532. It is possible to stabilize the approach probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B with respect to 2532, and it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the passage port 2532.

Specifically, in the Kroon 2530, the rolling surface portion 2531 has a dish shape with a low center, and one passage port 2532 is provided at the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. In this crune 2530, the game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rolling surface portion 2531 is suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b having a steeper angle than the central surface portion 2531a, and the outer circumference of the rolling surface portion 2531. It rolls in a circular shape while gradually reducing its turning radius from the vicinity, and enters the central passage port 2532. At this time, when the game ball B starts turning, the peripheral surface portion 2531b rolls so as not to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that abnormal vibrations such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 pass through the peripheral wall portion 2533. It is possible to avoid acting on the game ball B, and prevent fraudulent acts in which the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed toward the passage port 2532 due to abnormal vibration and the game ball B is illegally invaded into the passage port 2532. can do. Further, while the game ball B rolls in a circular shape, the passage port 2532 has a non-circular square shape. Therefore, when the turning radius of the game ball B gradually decreases, the passage port 2532 eventually reaches. When it comes into contact with any of the four corners outside the inscribed circle, the game ball B quickly enters (falls) toward the passage port 2532, and the game ball B turns around at the edge of the passage port 2532. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the game is played from the Kroon 2530 so that the game ball B is distributed to the first upper start port 2004 by the center distribution piece 2523, which is seen to move forward and backward by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1. Even if an attempt is made to control the timing at which the ball B falls, the game ball B will enter the passage port 2532 while the timing is being measured, so that the achievement of cheating can be prevented, and the game due to cheating can be prevented. The burden on the hall side can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (b), a plurality of passages including a specific passage port 2532 in which the rolling surface portion 2531 has a low center and a predetermined privilege is given near the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. When the mouth 2532 is provided, the game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 gradually changes its turning radius from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 while the contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533 is suppressed by the peripheral surface portion 2531b. It rolls in a circular shape while making it smaller, and enters any one of a plurality of passage ports 2532 provided near the center, and when the game ball B enters the specific passage port 2532, a predetermined privilege is given. It will be. At this time, when the game ball B starts turning, the peripheral surface portion 2531b rolls so as not to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that abnormal vibrations such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 pass through the peripheral wall portion 2533. It is possible to avoid acting on the game ball B, and prevent fraudulent acts in which the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed toward the passage port 2532 due to abnormal vibration and the game ball B is illegally invaded into the passage port 2532. can do. Further, even if a plurality of passage ports 2532 are arranged on the same circumference, since each passage port 2532 has a non-circular shape, the turning radius of the game ball B rotating in a circular shape is gradually reduced. Then, eventually, it comes into contact with any of the parts of the respective passage ports 2532 located outside the circumscribed circles in contact with the respective inscribed circles of the plurality of passage ports 2532, and the game ball B quickly contacts the passage. It will enter (fall) toward the mouth 2532, and the game ball B will turn around at the edge of the passage 2532, or the game ball B will be kicked by the passage 2532 and enter another passage 2532. There is nothing to relax. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to enter the desired passage port 2532 (specific passage port 2532), the game ball B is placed in another passage port 2532 before approaching the desired passage port 2532. If they come into contact with each other, they will enter the passageway 2532, so that the achievement of cheating can be prevented. Further, when the game ball B comes into contact with the passage port 2532, it enters the passage port 2532 and the game ball B is not kicked by the passage port 2532. Therefore, the approach probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B with respect to the passage port 2532. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the passage port 2532. Further, as described above, the game ball B is not kicked at the specific passage port 2532, and the game ball B in contact with the specific passage port 2532 can be made to enter the specific passage port 2532, which is a pity for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as in the distribution unit 2800 shown in FIG. 151 (c), the rolling surface portion 2803 is formed into a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction, and a passage port is formed near the downstream end of the rolling surface portion 2803. When the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are provided, the game ball B that rolls the rolling surface portion 2803 from the upstream side to the downstream side while suppressing the contact with the peripheral wall portion 2809 by the weir portion 2808. There is a possibility of entering the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802. Since the weir portion 2808 suppresses the contact of the game ball B with the peripheral wall portion 2809, the game ball B may cross the weir portion 2808 and come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2809. 2808 is a low height that the game ball B can overcome. As a result, while the game ball B is in contact with the weir portion 2808, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause an abnormal vibration, so that the weir portion 2808 sets the rolling direction of the game ball B as a winning opening. Even if the direction is changed to 2801, the weir portion 2808 will move relative to the game ball B so as to slip under the game ball B, and it is possible that a force acts on the game ball B in the direction of the winning opening 2801. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the game ball B is illegally invaded into the winning opening 2801. Then, when the game ball B tries to enter the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 have a non-circular shape, so that the game ball B is placed at the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802. Upon contact, the game ball B will promptly enter (fall) toward the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, and the game ball B will turn around at the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, or the game will be played. The ball B is not kicked by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 and enters another losing opening 2802 or the winning opening 2801. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to allow the game ball B to enter the winning opening 2801 at a desired timing, when the game ball B comes into contact with the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the winning opening 2801 And because it enters the loss mouth 2802, it is possible to prevent the achievement of cheating. Further, when the game ball B comes into contact with the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, it enters the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, and the game ball B is not kicked by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802. It is possible to stabilize the approach probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B with respect to 2801, and it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the winning opening 2801. Further, since the winning opening 2801 to which a predetermined privilege is given is provided, as described above, the game ball B is not kicked by the winning opening 2801, and the game ball B in contact with the winning opening 2801 is won as it is. Since it is possible to enter the mouth 2801, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfortunate, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to prevent the achievement of fraudulent activity, so that it is possible to recognize that it is useless to execute fraudulent activity, and the deterrent against fraudulent activity is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided. At this time, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a vibration sensor 1040, and an alarm can be notified for abnormal vibration by vibration alarm processing, so that the deterrent power against fraudulent activity can be further enhanced.

Further, as described above, the shape of the passage port 2532 can prevent the achievement of fraudulent acts due to abnormal vibration such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1, so that the vibration sensor 1040 for detecting abnormal vibration can be prevented. Can be omitted, and the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the passage port 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 has a non-circular shape, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the through hole of the crune as the rolling surface portion is circular, many players recognize that the through hole (passage port) is circular. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage port 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the crune 2530 has a non-circular shape, the player who is accustomed to the shape of the through hole in the conventional pachinko machine has been treated so far. A strong impact can be given to the passage port 2532 having a shape that has never been seen in a pachinko machine, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the passage port 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player strongly think that there may be something good when the game ball B enters the passage port 2532 of the crune 2530, the game ball is made to the rolling surface portion 2531 (crune 2530). When B is supplied, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the desired passage port 2532, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, in the Kroon 2530, since the passage port 2532 is provided so that the extension direction of the longest opposite line (diagonal line) in the non-circular passage port 2532 faces the front-rear direction, the left-right direction at the peripheral edge of the passage port 2532. It is possible to eliminate or reduce the portion extending in a straight line or in a curved shape having a small curvature. That is, each side portion constituting the peripheral edge of the passage port 2532 extends in a direction (oblique direction) intersecting with the left-right direction. In this way, since the edge (constituent side) of the passage port 2532 is extended in the diagonal direction, the edge (side) of the passage port 2532 extends in the left-right direction as compared with the case where the edge (side) of the passage port 2532 extends in the left-right direction. , The relative movement distance between the game ball B due to the abnormal vibration in the front-rear direction and the edge (side) of the passage port 2532 can be shortened, and the influence of the abnormal vibration can be reduced. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to enter the passage port 2532, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause abnormal vibration or impact in the front-rear direction, and the game ball B enters the passage port 2532. Even if you try to control by delaying or advancing the timing, the influence of the abnormal vibration or impact on the game ball B can be reduced, and the game ball B is immediately entered into the passage port 2532 to achieve cheating. Can be reliably prevented.

Further, since the diagonal extension direction of the passage port 2532 is directed to the front-rear direction, the shape of the passage port 2532 can be seen more easily when viewed from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Can be done. Therefore, since the rolling surface portion 2531 having a non-circular passage port 2532, which has never been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the pachinko machine, and it is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to be played. Can be made to.

Further, as described above, since the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the crune 2530 and the weir portion 2808 of the distribution unit 2800 are set to a low height that the game ball B can get over, the game ball B is the peripheral surface portion. By hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 in contact with 2531b or the weir portion 2808 to cause an abnormal vibration, the peripheral surface portion 2531b or the weir portion 2808 passes the rolling direction of the game ball B through the passage port 2532. Even if the direction is changed to, the peripheral surface portion 2531b and the weir portion 2808 will move relative to each other so as to sneak below the game ball B, and a force will be applied to the game ball B in the direction of the passage port 2532 and the winning port 2801. The action can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rolling direction of the game ball B from being directed toward the passing port 2532 or the winning opening 2801 due to an illegal abnormal vibration, and the game ball B is illegally directed to the passing port 2532 or the winning opening 2801. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that are invaded by.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2533 extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531 higher than the radius of the game ball B is provided, the game ball B falls out from the rolling surface portion 2531 by the peripheral wall portion 2533. This can be prevented, and the movement of the game ball B by the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage port 2532 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded into the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage port 2532 from the outside to perform an illegal act, the peripheral wall portion 2531 is provided. The intrusion of fraudulent tools can be prevented by the unit 2533, and the deterrent power against fraudulent activities can be further enhanced.

Further, even if the peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531, the peripheral surface portion 2531b can prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be hit or shaken. It is possible to prevent the abnormal vibration from acting on the gaming ball B via the peripheral wall portion 2533, and the rolling direction of the gaming ball B is directed toward the passing port 2532 due to the abnormal vibration, and the abnormal vibration is illegally directed to the passing port 2532. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that are invaded by.

Further, since the game ball B is supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 and the rolling surface portion 2803, the passage port 2532 is passed after the game ball B is supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 and the rolling surface portion 2803. Since it is possible to easily lengthen the rolling distance until the player enters the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the movement of the game ball B that rolls on the rolling surface portion 2531 or the rolling surface portion 2803 is further increased. It is possible to entertain the player for a long time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the game ball B is supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, and as described above, the rolling time of the game ball B on the rolling surface portion 2531 can be lengthened. Therefore, for example, Depending on the rolling time on the rolling surface portion 2531, the distribution timing of the game ball B on the downstream side of the passage port 2532 is matched with the execution timing for executing a predetermined effect by the effect device such as the movable decorative body or the effect display device. It can be made easier. Therefore, it is possible to fully exert the effect of the joint effect of the distribution of the game ball B and the effect device, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, the mounting boss 2515 and the attacker of the center base 2511 in the main body unit 2510 as a predetermined member are attached to the concave wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550. The binding pedestal is accommodated in a part of the mounting boss 2614 of the attacker base plate 2610 in the unit 2600, and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding pedestal 2550 is brought into contact with the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the rib 2618 of the attacker base plate 2610. The 2550 can be non-rotatably positioned at a predetermined position on the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610, and in this state, the mounting screws are mounted through the mounting holes 2553 penetrating the main body 2551 of the binding pedestal 2550. By screwing into the mounting boss 2614, the binding pedestal 2550 can be mounted on the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610. On the other hand, the binding pedestal 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570 can be attached to the predetermined member by screwing the mounting screw into the predetermined member through the respective mounting holes 2563 and 2573.

Then, the binding band CT is inserted into the annular band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 257 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, and the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, By tightening the wiring EC connected to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like together with the band holding portion 2572, the wiring EC can be bundled and held in a bundled state. At this time, since the binding band CT is inserted through the annular band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572, the binding band CT is inserted into the annular band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band. It does not come off from the holding portion 2572, and the plurality of wiring ECs can be reliably bound. For this reason, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are located at desired positions (positions where the mounting boss 2515 and the mounting boss 2614 are provided) on the predetermined members (center base 2511 and attacker base plate 2610). By attaching the above, a band holding portion 2552, a band holding portion 2562, and a band holding portion 2572 for holding the wiring EC at the desired position can be provided. That is, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 are placed at arbitrary positions on the predetermined members (center base 2511 and attacker base plate 2610). Can be provided.

More specifically, in the path (on the route) of a plurality of wiring ECs in the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), a harness support portion for holding the wiring EC in the predetermined member itself due to reasons such as size and shape. Even at a position where (corresponding to the band holding portion) cannot be formed, it is easy to secure a space for mounting the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 by using the mounting screws. Therefore, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 can be attached. Then, a plurality of binding pedestals 2550, binding pedestal 2560, and binding pedestal 2570 are attached on the path (route) of the wiring EC in the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), and the binding pedestal 2550 and the binding pedestal 2570 are attached. By having the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 257 of the 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570 hold the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be held on the desired route. Therefore, even if the wiring EC tries to move for some reason such as maintenance or vibration, the wiring EC can be maintained (held) on the desired route via the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570. Therefore, the wiring EC does not deviate from the desired route, it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from coming into contact with other members and disconnecting, and the wiring EC is desired so as to be difficult to see from the player side. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be surely held on the route of the above and can improve the appearance.

Further, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, a band holding portion 2552, a band holding portion 2562, and a band holding portion 2572 can be provided on a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610). Therefore, as compared with the case where the band holding portion is formed on the predetermined member itself, the cost required for the predetermined member can be reduced, and it is possible to easily respond to the design change and the model change. It is possible to suppress such an increase in cost.

Further, by screwing the mounting screw into the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610) through the mounting hole, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are attached to the predetermined member by the mounting screw. Since the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are detachably attached to the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 257 of the binding pedestal 2570 When the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are removed from the predetermined members while holding the plurality of wiring ECs, the plurality of wiring ECs can be separated from the desired route while being bundled. From this, for example, when checking the installation status of parts provided in the back of a plurality of wiring ECs (on the route) in maintenance, etc., a plurality of parts inserted in the gap by the harness support portion in the conventional technique. After removing the wiring ECs one by one from the gap, it was troublesome to insert them one by one into the gap and put them back in place. However, according to this configuration, the binding pedestal 2550 and the binding pedestal 2560 And, since multiple wiring ECs can be separated at once by simply removing the binding pedestal 2570, the above-mentioned troubles can be eliminated and it is easy to check the installation status of the parts behind the multiple wiring ECs. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, as described above, since the wiring EC is attached to a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610) via the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, when assembling the pachinko machine 1. After having a plurality of wiring ECs held in advance by the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 257 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, And the binding pedestal 2570 can also be attached to a predetermined member. As a result, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of wiring ECs are held and bundled by the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 257 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plurality of wiring ECs from interfering with the assembly, and by making the assembly work easy, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the wiring EC can be attached to the predetermined member simply by attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 to the mounting boss (mounting boss 2515 or mounting boss 2614) of the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610). Since the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 for holding can be provided, the mounting boss has a molding die (mold) as compared with the case where the band holding portion is directly provided on a predetermined member. Since the structure of the above can be formed without being complicated, the structure of the molding die (mold) for molding the predetermined member can be simplified, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Can be made to.

Further, the concave wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550 accommodates the mounting boss 2515 and the mounting boss 2614 of a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding pedestal 2550 is applied to the predetermined member. Since the rotation of the binding pedestal 2550 can be restricted by contacting the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2550 can be positioned with respect to a predetermined member, so that the workability required for attaching the binding pedestal 2550 can be improved.

Further, since the rotation of the binding pedestal 2550 can be restricted by bringing the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding pedestal 2550 into contact with a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the predetermined member. Even if the wiring EC is pulled by maintenance or the like after the wiring EC is held by the band holding portion 2552, the binding pedestal 2550 does not rotate and is held by the band holding portion 2552 by the rotation of the binding pedestal 2550. It is possible to prevent the direction (wiring direction) of the wiring EC from changing, and the wiring EC can be kept in the desired position, making the wiring EC difficult to see from the player side and looking good. A good pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are formed in the same color (transparent in this embodiment) as the predetermined members (center base 2511 and attacker base plate 2610), the binding pedestal is formed on the predetermined member. When the 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are attached, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated.

Further, since the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are attached to the attachment boss 2515 and the attachment boss 2614 of the predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), a plurality of binding pedestals are attached in advance to the predetermined member. By providing a boss, even if the path (route) through which the wiring EC passes is changed due to a design change or model change, the binding pedestal 2550, on the mounting boss on (or near the route) the changed route, By attaching the binding pedestal 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as described above, a plurality of mounting bosses are provided in advance on the predetermined members (center base 2511 and attacker base plate 2610), and the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal are provided on the mounting bosses on the desired route. By mounting the 2570, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and the like, so that the versatility of the predetermined member can be enhanced and the standardization of the predetermined member (part) can be promoted. Further, if the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 of the present embodiment are used, an extra portion for holding the wiring EC is provided in advance on a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610). Since it is only necessary to provide an extra mounting boss on the predetermined member in advance, it is possible to simplify the mold for molding the predetermined member.

Further, one binding pedestal 2560 is provided with a plurality of band holding portions 2562 in different directions, and when the binding pedestal 2560 is attached to a predetermined member (center base 2511 or attacker base plate 2610), the binding pedestal 2560 is attached. Since the wiring EC can be held by using the band holding portion 2562 in the direction corresponding to the direction of the wiring EC passing through the portion without having to fix and change the direction, the versatility of the binding pedestal 2560 is enhanced. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking extending the harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010. Since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT, the harness WH1 and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are tightened by the binding band CT. The sliding resistance between the wiring can be increased, and the harness WH1 can be made difficult to come off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Further, since the harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT, the harness is used in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The wiring ECs are not separated from the WH1 one by one, and it is possible to prevent some of the separated wiring ECs from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being easily disconnected from the stop portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the disconnection of the wiring EC.

Further, since the harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs is tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT, the harness WH1 is bundled by the binding band CT depending on the tightening force of the binding band CT. The harness WH1 can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 as it is. As a result, when it is desired to check the members hidden by the harness WH1 at the time of maintenance or the like, in the conventional technique of not bundling by the binding band CT, the wiring EC is moved (sliding) one by one from the harness WH1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of wiring ECs (harness WH1) can be slid at one time, the confirmation work can be facilitated, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, since the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the harness is provided from the open free end side of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The WH1 can be easily inserted and the workability can be improved. At this time, since the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a protruding toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are provided at the tips of the wiring lock portion 1603 and the wiring lock portion 3011, the binding band CT is used. When the harness WH1 is tightened together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 to form a bundle, the binding band CT is in the direction of the free ends of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 together with the harness WH1. Even if it slides to, further sliding is prevented by abutting against the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a, and the harness WH1 comes off from the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 together with the binding band CT. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent the wiring from being carried out and can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the binding band CT is composed of the band portion CTa and the lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, can be inserted in only one direction, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring By simply inserting the locking portion 3011 and the tip of the band portion CTa wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened. It can be locked in a closed state, and the workability of the binding work of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be improved. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, for some reason, the binding band CT is placed around the axis of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. Even if a rotating force acts, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, so that the binding band CT is in contact with the shaft core of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to prevent the cable tie from rotating around, and the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb can be prevented from coming into contact with other members, resulting in a defect. It can be prevented from becoming a cause.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the parts of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent features are obtained. It can exert an action effect. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, it protrudes from the lock portion CTb. It is necessary to pull the tip of the band portion CTa in the direction of the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010, and the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010 becomes an obstacle and the binding work becomes difficult. On the other hand, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the opposite side, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are brought into contact with each other by the binding band CT. When bundling, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side, and if the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is pulled away from the effect display device 1600 or the back box 3010, the wiring locking portion 1603 or The wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be tightened, and the workability can be further improved.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, as described above, the lock portion CTb Is facing the worker side, so it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to check the work.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are interposed between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It can be a blocking wall that blocks things from happening. As a result, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled and bundled, the wiring ECs of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 come into contact with the lock portion CTb. If this is the case, a part of the wiring EC may be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa to which the wiring EC is pulled, and the insulating coating of the wiring EC may be broken. On the other hand, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the opposite side, that is, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are interposed between them, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) are not in contact with the lock portion CTb, so that the band portion through which the lock portion CTb is inserted is inserted. Even if the tip of the CTa is pulled, a part of the wiring EC is not pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the band portion CTa, and the insulation coating of the wiring EC can be prevented from being torn. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 that have been made.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the parts of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, maintenance and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed. Therefore, when the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 is removed from the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011, the cutting work of the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be facilitated. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator side, a cutting tool such as a nipper is guided along the lock portion CTb to damage other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without the band portion CTa.

Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 projecting rearward from the binding band CT are provided as the protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT is provided. For some reason, other members hit the binding band CT under various circumstances such as assembling, transporting, installing, and installing in the game hall of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). It is possible to prevent contact with each other, prevent damage to the binding band CT (lock portion CTb), and prevent the harness WH1 and harness WH2 from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. be able to. Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect the other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to the other members due to the contact of the binding band CT can be prevented. It can be avoided and the occurrence of defects can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 can surely prevent the other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, the other members come into contact with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb) for some reason. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the damage of the lock portion CTb. Further, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 can prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, it is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged by the contact with the binding band CT. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

Further, in the state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear part of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in the island equipment of the game hall, other members, books, etc. The back cover 640 prevents other members such as the wiring EC and the game ball B connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side from contacting (contacting) the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by releasing the tightening of the band portion CTa by the locking portion CTb due to contact with other members or the like. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of defects caused by the binding band CT. Further, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of the tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be attached and detached from the lock portion CTb should be used. Can be done.

Further, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the binding band CT is provided as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the back box 3010 provided with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 is provided. When the other member moves from the rear toward the rear, the other member comes into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protective portion before the other member comes into contact with the binding band CT, and the other member further comes into contact with the binding band CT. It is possible to prevent the movement toward the binding band CT and prevent the contact of other members with the binding band CT. Therefore, since it is possible to avoid contact (contact) of other members with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb), the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT due to the contact with the other members and the like. The regulation is not lifted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect caused by the binding band CT. Further, since the peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protective unit for protecting the binding band CT, even if another member approaches the game board 5 from behind beyond the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 for some reason. As described above, since the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the binding band CT is further present, the binding band CT can be doubly protected.

Further, as a protective unit for protecting the binding band CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the binding band CT is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 provided with the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with the rear surface facing down during the assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 comes into contact with the workbench, so that the lock portion of the binding band CT The workbench does not come into contact with the CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transfer work of the game board 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520, so that the other game boards 5 are brought into contact with the lock portion CTb. Does not come into contact. Therefore, due to the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520, it is possible to prevent other members such as the work table and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being disengaged from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 due to the damage of the lock portion CTb, causing a problem.

Further, since the rear surface and the back box 3010 of the effect display device 1600 are made transparent and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are visually supported by the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the wiring is locked from the outside. Since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 supported through the portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized, all the wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled by the binding band CT and moved. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the wiring is regulated, it is possible to prevent the shipment of defective products in which some wiring ECs are disconnected, and it is easy to confirm the binding band CT in maintenance and the like. can do.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, it is possible to easily perform the binding work of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

Further, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the transparent wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT is made milky white with low light transmission, and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are made visible. Since the colors are different from those of the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the above (for example, gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.), the harness WH1 is passed through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. When looking at the band portion CTa of the harness WH2 (plural wiring EC) and the binding band CT, it is possible to clearly see that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the binding of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be surely confirmed, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound by the binding band CT. It can be easy.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is made to come into contact with the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, there is a case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In comparison, the contact area can be widened, and the frictional resistance between the binding band CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or harness WH2 can be increased. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be sufficiently regulated, and the harness WH1, the harness WH2, and the wiring EC can be prevented from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Can be avoided.

Further, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. Depending on the strength, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate at an early stage, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuit may easily occur. On the other hand, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at an angle, the band portion CTa is wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction and brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. The contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 (wiring EC) can be widened as compared with the case of doing so. Therefore, even if the binding band CT is tightened with the same strength, the force acting by the tightening can be widely dispersed and relatively small by making the contact at an angle to widen the contact area. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and the occurrence of problems such as electric leakage and short circuit can be suppressed.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a strip shape, the harness WH1 and the harness together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are provided by the binding band CT. When the WH2 is bundled, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 have a width, so that the band portion CTa of the binding band CT automatically and diagonally contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs are bundled by a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled. It is possible to prevent the plurality of constituent wiring ECs from being separated one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and to avoid contact with other members of the separated wiring ECs. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled and bound at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the specific binding band, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move in the longitudinal direction for some reason. When pulled, the lock portion of the specific binding band comes into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT as the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move, and the specific binding band further increases the number. The movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be prevented.

Further, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 composed of a plurality of wiring ECs are bound by a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the outer periphery of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 is circular. A plurality of wiring ECs are gathered so as to approach the above, and the band portion of the specific binding band extends in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be compactly bundled at the portion of the specific binding band, so that the parts provided behind the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the portion of the specific binding band provided at the portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the direction in which the band portion of the specific binding band is orthogonal to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (longitudinal direction). It extends to. On the other hand, in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. The direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend with respect to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be different between the portion of As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by confirming the position and number of the band portion CTa and the band portion in the extending direction, it is easy to confirm whether or not the work is carried out according to the work manual. Can be confirmed in. In this case, the color of the binding band CT of the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion 3011 may be different from that of the specific binding band, so that the binding work can be easily confirmed. it can.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, there is a case where the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are rod-shaped. In comparison, the contact area between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be increased, so that the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to exert the action and effect of the binding band CT as the movement regulating means, and it is possible to reliably regulate the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 and further avoid the occurrence of defects.

Further, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a flat plate shape or a strip shape, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are used in the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Since the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the wiring can be easily spread so as to line up along the surfaces of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, it is possible to easily dissipate heat from the wiring EC. At this time, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the plurality of wiring ECs constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be connected to the wiring locking portion 1603. It can be easily confirmed one by one through the wiring locking portion 3011 and the wiring locking portion 3011.

Further, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are displayed in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the harness WH1 in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 when a tension is applied to the harness WH1. It is designed to extend from the 1600 and the back box 3010, and even if the harness WH1 is pulled or the harness WH1 is pulled during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring staff Since the harness WH1 moves in the direction opposite to the tip at the stop portion 3011, the harness WH1 does not come off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and the pachinko capable of reliably exerting the above-mentioned effects and effects. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the tips of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are formed obliquely so as to move away from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 toward the tips including the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a. The harness WH1 can be easily inserted between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 and the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 from the tip side of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It can be done and workability can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, a plurality of functional holes provided at a position where the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is straddled by the main body 3061 in the back box 3010. After being inserted into the through hole of the portion 3013, in the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013 corresponding to the plurality of first mounting holes 3062 among the plurality of functional hole portions 3013 provided at the positions where the main body portion 3061 straddles. The mounting supporter 3060 can be mounted on the back box 3010 by inserting the mounting screw from the side opposite to the mounting supporter 3060 in the back box 3010 and screwing it into the first mounting hole 3062 to tighten it. In this state, the mounting supporter 3060 is non-rotatably mounted with respect to the back box 3010 because the protruding pin 3063 is inserted into the through hole of the functional hole 3013. Then, by mounting the back right effect unit 3400 on the mounting supporter 3060 using a plurality of second mounting holes 3064 provided in the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 mounted on the back box 3010, the back right effect is produced. The unit 3400 can be fixed (mounted) to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060. The mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted on the back right effect unit 3400, and then the mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted on the back box 3010. At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is inserted into the through hole, and the positioning accuracy of the back right effect unit 3400 mounted on the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060 can be improved. Therefore, the back-right effect unit 3400 can be reliably attached to a desired position, and the action and effect of the back-right effect unit 3400 can be easily exerted.

Since the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013, the mounting supporter 3060 can be attached to the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided at desired positions where the back right effect unit 3400 is to be mounted. The back right effect unit 3400 can be attached to a desired position. Therefore, when it is desired to change the position of the back right effect unit 3400 due to a design change, a model change, or the like, the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted in a plurality of functional holes 3013 provided at desired positions without recreating the back box 3010. Since the position of the back right effect unit 3400 can be easily changed only by itself, the degree of freedom in arranging the back right effect unit 3400 can be further increased, and it is possible to easily respond to a design change or a model change. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as described above, the back right effect unit 3400 can be mounted at a desired position by attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to the plurality of functional holes 3013 at the desired positions among the plurality of functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010. Since it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the back right effect unit 3400, the back right effect unit 3400 can be arranged in a more effective position, which is not seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. By attaching the back right effect unit 3400, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the mounting supporter 3060 (main body 3061) has a size straddling a plurality of functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010, a plurality of back right effect units 3400 and other production units are attached to one mounting supporter 3060. Therefore, by mounting a plurality of effect units on one mounting supporter 3060, the mounting supporter 3060 can collectively unitize the plurality of effect units. Therefore, by mounting a plurality of production units on the mounting supporter 3060 and then mounting the mounting supporter 3060 on the back box 3010, it is possible to mount the plurality of production units on the back box 3010 at once, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to simplify the labor required for assembling the machine and suppress the increase in cost.

Further, since the mounting supporter 3060 is mounted on the back box 3010 across a plurality of functional holes 3013, the back box 3010 can be reinforced by the mounting supporter 3060, and the durability of the back box 3010 is enhanced. Can be made hard to break. Further, since the back box 3010 can be reinforced by the mounting supporter 3060, the back box 3010 can be made difficult to be deformed even if a load from the back right effect unit 3400 or a vibration or inertial force due to the movable effect acts. , The back right effect unit 3400 can be fixed in a fixed position. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the back right effect unit 3400 from shaking or moving unnecessarily, the decorative effect and the effect of the back right effect unit 3400 can be surely exhibited, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, a gap having the same thickness as the main body 3061 of the attachment supporter 3060 is provided between the back right effect unit 3400 and the back box 3010. It can be formed, and heat from the back right effect unit 3400, the back box 3010, and the like can be easily released through the gap. Further, since each of the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010 has through holes, and as described above, the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3060 can be appropriately selected. Since there is a functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not mounted, heat from the back right effect unit 3400 side should be ventilated and released through the through hole of the functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not mounted. Can be done. Therefore, by configuring the back box 3010 with a plurality of functional holes 3013 and the mounting supporter 3060, it is possible to reduce the influence of heat on the back right effect unit 3400, the back box 3010, and the like, and the back right effect unit. It is possible to surely exert the decorative effect and the directing effect of 3400 and the like.

Further, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, the transmission of vibration between the back box 3010 and the back right effect unit 3400 can be reduced by the attachment supporter 3060. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back box 3010 and the back right effect unit 3400 from shaking or moving unnecessarily, so that the decoration effect and the effect of the back box 3010 and the back right effect unit 3400 can be surely exhibited. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining a player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, the back box 3010 can be remade by appropriately selecting the plurality of functional holes 3013 for mounting the mounting supporter 3060 with respect to the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010. Since the position of the back right effect unit 3400 can be easily changed, the back box 3010 can be used as the same regardless of the model, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, the back box 3010 can be prepared by preparing a plurality of mounting supporters 3060 having different sizes and shapes of the main body 3061 in advance. In addition to changing the position in the direction along the surface provided with the plurality of functional holes 3013, it is possible to easily change the position in the direction perpendicular to the surface. The degree of freedom of placement can be further increased.

Further, since the back right effect unit 3400 is provided in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, it is not necessary to provide a mounting boss for mounting the effect unit in the back box 3010 as in the conventional technique, and the mounting supporter Since through holes are provided in the plurality of functional holes 3013 for mounting the 3060, the weight of the back box 3010 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and the back box 3010 can be handled (transported) when assembling the pachinko machine 1. ) And handling can be made easy.

Further, as described above, the mounting supporter 3060 can be positioned by inserting the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013, so that the back right effect unit 3400 can be positioned via the mounting supporter 3060. Can be made difficult to move. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back right effect unit 3400 from moving or shaking unnecessarily during the movable effect, so that the player can surely show the movable effect that makes the desired movement, and the desired effect can be obtained. The effect can be surely exhibited, the player can be entertained, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has a plate-like shape that connects the plurality of block-shaped head portions 3061a provided with the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 and the plurality of head portions 3061a. The back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c are configured, and the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061b are compared with the case where the main body 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 is formed with a constant thickness over the entire length. Since the material of the portion of the side connecting piece 3061c can be reduced, the cost and weight of the mounting supporter 3060 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is one of the two through holes of the functional hole portion 3013 in the box frame-shaped back box 3010. With the first mounting hole 3052 aligned with the remaining through holes in the functional hole 3013, the mounting screw is inserted through the through hole from the rear of the back box 3010 on the opposite side of the mounting supporter 3050. (1) The mounting supporter 3050 can be mounted on the back box 3010 by screwing it into the mounting hole 3052 and tightening it. In this state, the mounting supporter 3050 is non-rotatably mounted with respect to the back box 3010 because the protruding pin 3053 is inserted into one of the two through holes. Then, by using the second mounting hole 3055 at the tip of the boss portion 3054 protruding from the main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 mounted on the back box 3010, the back rear effect unit 3500 is mounted on the mounting supporter 3050. The back-back effect unit 3500 can be fixed (mounted) to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050. The mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the back-rear effect unit 3500, and then the mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the back box 3010. At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is inserted into one of the two through holes in the functional hole 3013, and is mounted on the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050. Since the positioning accuracy of the unit 3500 can be improved, the back-back effect unit 3500 can be reliably mounted at a desired position, and the action and effect of the back-back effect unit 3500 can be easily exerted.

Since the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013, it is desired to attach the mounting supporter 3050 to the functional holes 3013 provided at a desired position to mount the back-rear effect unit 3500. The back-rear effect unit 3500 can be attached to the position. Further, in the mounting supporter 3050, since the boss portion 3054 having the second mounting hole 3055 at the tip is extended (protruded) from the main body portion 3051 in a predetermined direction (forward), the protruding boss portion 3054. By preparing a plurality of mounting supporters 3050 having different lengths in advance, the boss portion 3054 uses the mounting supporter 3050 having a desired length with respect to the surface of the back box 3010 where the functional hole portion 3013 is provided. By doing so, the back-rear effect unit 3500 can be attached to a position separated from the surface by a desired distance. For this reason, when it is desired to change the position of the back-rear effect unit 3500 due to a design change, model change, etc., the mounting supporter 3050 is provided at a desired position without having to remake the back box 3010. By simply attaching the mounting supporter 3050 of the desired length to the boss portion 3054, the back-back effect unit is installed in the direction along the surface where the functional hole portion 3013 is provided or in the direction perpendicular to the surface. Since the position of the 3500 can be easily changed, the degree of freedom in arranging the back-and-forth effect unit 3500 can be further increased, and it becomes possible to easily respond to design changes, model changes, etc. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as described above, the mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the functional hole 3013 at a desired position among the plurality of functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010, or the mounting supporter 3050 having a desired length may be attached to the boss 3054. By doing so, the back-rear effect unit 3500 can be mounted at a desired position, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear effect unit 3500 can be increased. Therefore, the back-rear effect unit 3500 should be arranged at a more effective position. By attaching the back-to-back production unit 3500 at a position that was not seen in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. be able to.

Further, as described above, the functional hole portion 3013 for mounting the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3050 having different lengths of the boss portion 3054 are appropriately selected for the plurality of functional hole portions 3013 provided in the back box 3010. By doing so, the position of the back-back effect unit 3500 can be easily changed without remaking the back box 3010, so that the back box 3010 can be diverted as the same regardless of the model, and the pachinko machine 1 Cost can be reduced.

Further, since the boss portion 3054 having the second mounting hole 3055 provided at the tip of the mounting supporter 3050 is provided between the first mounting hole 3052 and the protruding pin 3053, it is mounted in the second mounting hole 3055. The load from the back-back effect unit 3500 can be applied evenly to the back box 3010 from the first mounting hole 3052 (mounting screw) and the protruding pin 3053, and the mounting supporter 3050 can be made less likely to be damaged. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of continuously maintaining the mounting of the back-and-forth effect unit 3500 in a good state and reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the flat piece 3051a is provided on the surface of the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 opposite to the surface on which the protruding pin 3053 protrudes, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the back box 3010. When pressing the main body 3051 toward the back box 3010 side for inserting into the through hole in the functional hole 3013, pressing the one piece 3051a facilitates pressing the main body 3051 toward the back box 3010. And the protruding pin 3053 can be reliably inserted into the through hole. Further, since the one portion 3051a is flattened, it is easy to press it with a finger or the like, so that the mounting work of the mounting supporter 3050 can be facilitated, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. ..

Further, as described above, the mounting supporter 3050 can be positioned by inserting the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 into one of the two fixing holes in the functional hole 3013. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3050 can be positioned via the mounting supporter 3050. It is possible to make the back-to-back effect unit 3500 difficult to move. Therefore, even if the back-back effect unit 3500 is used as an effect device (movable decorative body) capable of performing a movable effect, it is possible to prevent the back-post effect unit 3500 from moving or shaking unnecessarily during the movable effect. , The movable effect of the desired movement can be surely shown to the player, the desired effect can be surely exhibited, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed. be able to.

Further, since the back-rear effect unit 3500 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, a gap having the same thickness as the main body 3051 of the attachment supporter 3050 is provided between the back-rear effect unit 3500 and the back box 3010. It can be formed, and heat from the back-rear effect unit 3500, the back box 3010, and the like can be easily released through the gap. Further, since each of the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010 has through holes, and as described above, the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3050 can be appropriately selected. Since there is a functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not mounted, the heat from the back-rear effect unit 3500 side is ventilated and released through the through hole of the functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not mounted. Can be done. Therefore, by configuring the back box 3010 with a plurality of functional holes 3013 and the mounting supporter 3050, it is possible to reduce the influence of heat on the back back effect unit 3500, the back box 3010, etc. It is possible to surely exert the decorative effect and the directing effect of 3500 and the like.

Further, since the back-rear effect unit 3500 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, the attachment supporter 3050 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the back box 3010 and the back-rear effect unit 3500. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back box 3010 and the back-rear effect unit 3500 from unnecessarily shaking and moving. Therefore, the decoration effect and the effect of the back box 3010 and the back-rear effect unit 3500 can be surely exhibited. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining a player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the back-back effect unit 3500 is provided in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, it is not necessary to provide a mounting boss for mounting the back-back effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 as in the conventional technique. Since through holes are provided in a plurality of functional holes 3013 for mounting the mounting supporter 3050, the weight of the back box 3010 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and the back box 3010 can be handled when assembling the pachinko machine 1. It can be easily handled (transported) and handled.

Further, since the color of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 is made different from the color of the back box 3010, when the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are mounted on the back box 3010, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3050 are mounted. Since the 3060 can be easily identified, the positions of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 can be easily understood when assembling or disassembling the pachinko machine 1, so that the work can proceed smoothly and the assembly or the like can be performed. By facilitating such labor, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) ), To support the wiring EC extending from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the wiring EC extending from the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711). Since a plurality of wiring support portions (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706) are provided, the plurality of wiring ECs can be put together by supporting the wiring ECs on the wiring support portions. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring EC from extending in the direction of each section from the door unit. At this time, since the wiring EC is tightened and supported by the wiring support portion by the binding band CT, the wiring EC is formed between the wiring support portion extending in the shape of a rod or a strip so as to have a free end and the case. It is possible to prevent the wiring EC from coming off or coming off from the wiring support portion, as compared with the case where the wiring EC is inserted and supported. Therefore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to improve workability by suppressing the wiring EC extending from the case of the door unit from interfering with the assembly or getting caught in other members. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the work and suppress the increase in cost. Further, by collecting a plurality of wiring ECs by the wiring support portion, it is possible to make it difficult for the wiring ECs extending from the case to be caught by other members, so that the wiring ECs are damaged or the wiring ECs are driven means or sensors. It is possible to prevent the product from being assembled in a state where it is disconnected from the wire EC, and it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a problem caused by the wiring EC.

Further, the wiring EC connected to the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) held in the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) and the door unit (second starting port door body 2631, And the wiring EC connected to the sensor (second start port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) that is provided near the door body 2701) of the opening / closing unit 2700 and detects the game ball B whose circulation has been changed by the door unit. Is supported by the wiring support portion (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706) together, so that when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the part where the door unit is used (for example, the first (2) Sensors of the type corresponding to the starting port 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, the V winning opening 2008, etc.) are set in advance via the wiring EC and the wiring support portion. As a result, the sensor of the type corresponding to the door unit can be reliably assembled, and it is possible to prevent the sensor of a different type from being assembled. Further, when the door unit or the sensor is removed for maintenance or the like and reassembled, the sensor can be prevented from being lost and a different type of sensor can be prevented from being attached.

Further, the wiring support portion (band holding portion 2635c and wiring locking portion 2635d) that supports the wiring EC in the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) , And the band holding portion 2706), so that the wiring EC extending from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) is supported by wiring. By supporting the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be aligned with the case, and the wiring EC can be made difficult to see from the player side to improve the appearance.

Further, a sensor (second starting port sensor 2601) provided outside the door unit by the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700). And since the movement of the ball sensor 2711) can be regulated, when the door unit is attached to a predetermined member such as a base plate (attacker base plate 2610 and base plate 2710) when assembling the pachinko machine 1, Since the movement of the sensor can be restricted by the door unit, the sensor can be attached by the door unit, the labor required for assembly can be simplified, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) regulates the movement of the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711), the door is used during maintenance or the like. The sensor can also be removed simply by removing the unit, which simplifies the time and effort required for removal and reduces the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the length of the wiring EC from the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) provided outside the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) is increased. Since the wiring support portion (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706) is supported with a margin, the sensor is relative to the door unit within the margin of the length. Can be separated. Therefore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the door unit is attached to the wiring support portion of the door unit in advance to support the wiring EC connected to the sensor. The wiring EC from the sensor is not unnecessarily pulled even if the door is attached, and the attachment work (assembly work) can be performed smoothly.

Further, the wiring EC connected to the sensor (second start port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) is connected from the sensor to the wiring support portion (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706). Since it is supported by a length longer than the shortest length, the door unit (second start port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) is removed from the predetermined members (attacker base plate 2610 and base plate 2710) due to maintenance or the like. When removing, since there is a margin in the length of the wiring EC from the sensor, it is possible to separate the door unit from the predetermined member to some extent, and maintenance etc. can be performed well, so this pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) is provided with a plurality of wiring support portions (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706), design changes and changes can be made. When the direction in which the wiring EC is routed is changed due to a model change or the like, the wiring support portion provided at the optimum position through which the wiring EC passes can be selected to support the wiring EC. Therefore, it is possible to respond to design changes, model changes, and the like without remodeling the cases (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705), and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) is provided with a plurality of wiring support portions (band holding portion 2635c, wiring locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706), the door unit is provided. After assembling, to the vacant wiring support part that does not support the wiring EC from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711). , Wiring EC from other members can be supported and bundled, and wiring EC can be easily routed in the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the wiring EC is tightened and supported by the binding band CT with respect to the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630 and opening / closing unit 2700) and the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711). When attempting to commit fraud, it is necessary to disconnect the cable tie CT, and traces of fraud are likely to remain. Therefore, it is possible to hesitate to execute fraud and provide a pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud. Can be done.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, the solenoids (starting door solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid) as driving means according to the progress of the game The game ball B passes by advancing and retreating the door bodies (second starting door body 2631, second large winning door body 2651, V winning door body 2661, and door body 2701) by 2662 and solenoid 2702). The door unit (second starting port) is equipped with sensors that detect the game ball B (second starting port sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711). It is provided outside the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the opening / closing unit 2630, the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, the V distribution unit 2660, and the opening / closing unit 2700. Therefore, since the sensor is not provided in the case, the unit having the door body (door unit) can be made relatively small as compared with the conventional technique, and the door unit can be made smaller. Therefore, since the door unit can be miniaturized, the degree of freedom in arranging the door unit can be increased. Therefore, by providing the door unit at a position different from that of the conventional pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine has an unprecedented appearance. It can be the machine 1, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, at least a part of the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) is a door unit (second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630). , Second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, opening / closing unit 2700) Since it is provided in front of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705), it is conventional. Compared with the case where the sensor is provided in the case as in the technique of the above, the dimension in the front-rear direction for detecting the game ball B can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure the space behind. .. Therefore, as described above, the door unit can be miniaturized, and the space at the rear can be easily secured. Therefore, the rear accessory or decoration can be made larger, or a new accessory or a new accessory can be rearward. By arranging or arranging the decorative body, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the accessory behind. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the door unit (second start opening opening / closing) is equipped with sensors that detect the game ball B (second starting opening sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711). Because it is provided outside the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the unit 2630, the second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, the V distribution unit 2660, and the opening / closing unit 2700). The same door unit can be used regardless of the model used, and a sufficient mass production effect can be obtained by manufacturing only the same door unit, and by using the same door unit, it is due to an assembly error. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects, simplify the labor required for assembly, and reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

More specifically, for example, in a unit having a built-in sensor in a case according to the conventional technology, the sensor is removed from the case and built in in order to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit. It is conceivable to use no unit. However, in this case, in order to obtain a mass production effect by diverting the unit to a plurality of models, both a unit in which the sensor is attached and a unit in which the sensor is removed are manufactured in the same unit. This makes it complicated to manufacture the unit, and it becomes difficult to obtain a sufficient mass production effect. In addition, if there is a unit with the sensor removed in the same unit, there is a risk of accidentally assembling a unit without a sensor when assembling the pachinko machine, which may cause a malfunction. At the same time, it is necessary to check the unit at the time of assembly, which causes a problem that the cost increases due to the time and effort required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door unit (second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, second winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening / closing unit 2700) has a sensor (the first). (2) Starting port sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) are not provided (not built in), so the positions of the sensors in multiple models Since the same door unit can be used regardless of the model used, it is sufficient to manufacture only the same door unit, and a sufficient mass production effect can be obtained. Further, since there is no same door unit having different functions, it is not necessary to check the door unit when assembling the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to an assembly error and to assemble. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 by simplifying the time and effort required for the pachinko machine 1.

Further, at least a part of the sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, second large winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) is a door unit (second starting opening opening / closing unit 2630). , Second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, opening / closing unit 2700) Since it is provided in front of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, unit case 2705), the sensor By providing a portion (detection hole) through which the game ball B passes and detects the game ball B in front of the case, the detection hole of the sensor is located in front of the case, and the detection of the game ball B by the sensor can be seen from the player side. It can be facilitated, and by visually recognizing the detection of the game ball B, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and entertain it.

In addition, the door bodies (second starting door body 2631, second large winning door body 2651, V winning door body 2661, and door body 2701) penetrate the flat plate-shaped attacker base plate 2610 and base plate 2710. Since it is designed to move forward and backward, the entrance for receiving the game ball B on the attacker base plate 2610 and the attacker front plate 2620 (second starting door 2005, second major winning door 2007, V winning door 2008, losing door). 2009, etc.) and a passage for the game ball B will be provided. Therefore, when changing the model, design, etc., the mode of the entrance and passage can be easily changed by simply changing the attacker base plate 2610 side, which is an appeal that can strongly attract the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be easily provided, and the door units (second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, second winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening / closing unit 2700) are changed. Since it can be diverted without any problem, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit) of the door unit (second starting port opening / closing unit 2630, second prize opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening / closing unit 2700). Since the case 2705) is attached after the attacker base plate 2610, the attacker base plate 2610 makes it possible to make the case difficult to see from the player side, and the case (driving means (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid). It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the solenoid 2702)), and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance.

Further, the driving means (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) and door body (second starting port door body 2631, second large winning opening door body 2651, V winning opening). The cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) holding the door body 2661 and the door body 2701) are separated into the first case portion and the second case portion (first case portion 2633). 2634, the first case 2653 and the second case 2654, the first case 2663 and the second case 2664, and the first case 2703 and the second case 2704). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts of the door unit (second start opening opening / closing unit 2630, second winning opening opening / closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening / closing unit 2700), and the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of 1.

Further, the case is divided into a first case part and a second case part (first case part 2633 and second case part 2634, first case part 2653 and second case part 2654, first case part 2663 and second case part 2664). , And the first case part 2703 and the second case part 2704), so that the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) It is possible to hold the door body (second starting door body 2631, second large winning door body 2651, V winning door body 2661, and door body 2701) so as to be sandwiched between the first case and the second case. , The labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Further, at least a part of the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601, second winning opening sensor 2602, V) provided in front of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, unit case 2705). Since the attacker front plate 2620 provided in front of the case (attacker base plate 2610, base plate 2710) is in contact with the winning opening sensor 2603, the loss opening sensor 2604, and the ball sensor 2711), it is in front of the attacker. The plate 2620 can regulate the movement of the sensor in a predetermined direction, and can enable the sensor to be positioned at a predetermined position.

Further, the outer surface of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) is in contact with the sensors (second starting port sensor 2601, V winning port sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711). Therefore, the movement of the sensor in a predetermined direction can be restricted by the case, and the sensor can be positioned at a predetermined position. Further, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the sensor can be guided by the case in contact with the pachinko machine 1, and the assembling work can be facilitated.

[11. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 203 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 214, and FIG. 216 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot game state is generated. The symbol random number to be used for determining the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determining the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display, and the initial value determination random number for the symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number, etc. It is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2005, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece, and this ordinary symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and at high speed in advance based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later, various types of RAM are stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the information as a numerical value and calculating the total is one with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when not done, the main control MPU takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM for the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number, and this is taken out. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. There is. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the ID code is converted to the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2005. It is not possible to generate a gaming state that becomes.

[11-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 214 and 215, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU (by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value) ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated.

In the determination in step S16, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, in the determination in step S16, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and is stored in the game information related to the game such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination). It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete various information including information indicating the value of the counter, and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, the main control MPU calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU determines that the power is restored from the main control built-in RAM. The work area is set (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU itself is reset, and then returned is included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power off processing described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU mainly determines when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, or in the determination in step S30. When the control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing a value of 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In the main control MPU, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch indicates RAM clear, and when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is used. When the disconnection process is not completed normally, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a game machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values in one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Create a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the symbol initial value determination random number, the small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (winning determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random numbers for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for determining initial values for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for ordinary symbol variation display patterns, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, and the like ( Step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. That is, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so that the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) from being updated, and the check sum calculation result. Is designed so that there is no fluctuation. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is in progress while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power failure process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. It is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above steps, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time measured by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time is measured again. The main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT because it cannot be started.

The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the WDT with built-in main control by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the power outage processing on the main control side. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. .. Here, first, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on includes information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. The problem in the case where the power is not set, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at the time of power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 is the first attacker solenoid 2642 or the first attacker solenoid. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007 is opened by the opening / closing member by driving the second attacker solenoid 2652, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 Is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. As a result, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven, and the first prize opening 2006 and the second prize opening 2007 are changed from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened. It will be.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the gaming state (whether or not the time is shortened, etc.) instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. .. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Based on the game state instructed by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen during the jackpot game state can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, in any round of the jackpot game state. Can't be displayed at all. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 and is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 3002 or the second big winning opening sensor 2602, and the first big winning opening 2006 or Even if the main control board 1310 sends a command to display the 1-count display of the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 2007 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control Even if the number of game balls entered in the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 can be displayed on the screen of the board 1510 in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the game state. It is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what number of rounds) the jackpot game state is.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is completed, for example, and the first major The fact that the winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 shift from the state of being opened by the opening / closing member to the state of being closed (that is, the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 of the attacker unit 2100 A big winning opening 1 closing display command instructing (start of closing between rounds) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state. Occasionally, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven to shift from the state in which the first prize opening 2006 and the second prize opening 2007 are closed by the opening / closing member to the state in which they are opened. A command to indicate the effect (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned game state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open) to the second starting port 2005. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2005 state is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control built-in RAM. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the starting port solenoid 2632 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2005 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2005 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen during the jackpot game state based on the game state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of, and can be restored, the screen surrounding the screen informing the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2005 and the game state is advantageous to the player. The control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2005 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2005 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2005). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first prize opening 2006 and the second big prize are started. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the winning opening 2007 shifts from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates that the peripheral control board 1510 is in the jackpot game state for four rounds. Although the specified screen (that is, the screen showing the number of rounds) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in the jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. A screen that tells you that the first prize opening 2006 and the second prize opening 2007 are open by the opening / closing member (for example, "Big hit. The big prize opening is open." A screen that conveys to the player the message "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening") is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine. After the power is restored, it is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is inserted into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game ball is inserted into the second start port 2005. Is in a gaming state that is acceptable to the player, and when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the starting port solenoid is used as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen telling that the drive of 2632 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2005 (for example, "the movable piece is open. The game ball is opened at the second starting port." The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that conveys a message to the player, "Please play the game so as to enter the ball." In the display area of the production display device 1600, and returns to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2005 after the electric current.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information instructing that when clearing is performed, and when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned time reduction It is composed of information indicating which of the gaming states, the state and the non-time saving state, is to be restored, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to what kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection step of the manufacturing line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[11-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 214 and 215.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 216 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2501, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first lower start opening sensor 2101, and a detection signal from the first upper start opening sensor 2524. Detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2601, detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 3002 and second big winning opening sensor 2602, detection signal from V winning opening sensor 2603, detection signal from the loss opening sensor 2604, The payout control board 633 normally receives the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys the fact is read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first lower start port sensor 2101, the first upper start port sensor 2524, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2601 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is classified. Is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first lower start port sensor 2101 or the first upper start port sensor 2524, the corresponding start port winning command is used as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2601, the start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. ..

In this embodiment, when all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing), this switch input processing is started. First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to the fourth time. Because it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port sensor 2524, the second start port. Detection signal from sensor 2601, detection signal from first prize opening sensor 3002 and second prize opening sensor 2602, detection signal from V winning opening sensor 2603, detection signal from loss opening sensor 2604, from out sensor 664 The detection signal of the above, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 633 has normally received. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the state of the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal that has been subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display that informs that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the small random number, which are updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 215. The random number for determining the initial value for the winning symbol is also updated. These symbol initial value determination random numbers and small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only each time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the initial value determination random number for the small hit symbol are the non-winning random numbers in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 215. The update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main control side, are updated respectively, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next interrupt occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the timer is generated, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the small hit A mechanism may be used in which the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and a game scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball. Since the number of balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is issued to the payout control board. When the payer ACK signal that is transmitted to 633 or that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A self-check command for confirming the connection status is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first lower starting port provided in the game board 5. Various winning openings such as 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 (hereinafter, described as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted based on the game balls entered in ()), and the prize ball schedule information of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process in step S108. The storage area is updated. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the game is not in the big hit game state, the detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 3002 or the second big winning opening sensor 2602 When is input (when a game ball enters the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007), a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created. The transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. It is judged (determines the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values is matched.

When these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port sensor 2524, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, and the judgment results (lottery results) are created. When the result) is based on the second start port sensor 2601, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is described above. The first of the function display units 1400 is determined based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the variation display pattern of the determined special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the special symbol display or the second special symbol display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2642 or the second attacker solenoid 2642 or the second to open / close the opening / closing member. The number of times (round) that the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2652 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 is changed from the closed state to the open state (round). When is twice, the output of the lighting signal to the two-round indicator lamp is set so as to turn on the two-round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. , The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the presence / absence of the time reduction occurrence in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is stored. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information memory, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. After being shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the ordinary winning. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are free areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored ordinary winning opening winning information is used as a hold ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned ordinary winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2005, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is stored as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2632 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area as information and to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. When it is in a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 that open and close the opening / closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2632 that opens and closes the movable piece, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be issued (for example, detection signals from the first prize opening sensor 3002 and the second major winning opening sensor 2602 when a game ball that has entered the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007 is detected. Large winning opening 1 count display command equivalent to the large winning opening count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization production, and general electric service production related Various commands, various commands classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display, various commands classified into test-related commands, and other various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is the game board 5). Main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in various winning openings provided in Is stored in the main prize ball number information output command, etc., which instructs the hall computer to transmit the command via the external terminal board 558. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built into the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 215. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter are classified as power-on. Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and responds to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Main control return destination command at power-on that indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process in step S118 in this routine. Can be output to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 215, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 214. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 214 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 215, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[12. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 217, and FIG. 219 is a payout control unit following FIG. 218. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 220 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not instruct to perform RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum considers the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. Judge whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is stored and updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when the communication with the CR unit is not in progress. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logical state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (display value 1 (number "1") in this embodiment) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 The value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, the port output process is performed in step S548, the port input process is performed in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[12-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 217 to 219.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 220 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 223 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 221. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 221 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to convey that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the flag SP-FLG during steady processing. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one brightness specified value can be set in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (off) to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where the player (or a clerk of a game hall, etc.) can set the brightness while the production is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a clerk of the game hall, etc.) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness By displaying a rod-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are defined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is used for a specific decorative board (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is controlled by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) adjusts the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turning off)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguished)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value is set up to the brightness designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark). The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value). The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, delay in processing time can be prevented, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main body frame by sound data output processing described later. From various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effects according to the various productions.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data is instructed to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electrical drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various production settings. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp palette setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. Whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007. And recognize which game state is currently in the game.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and so on. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric service effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, and a track number are specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the door. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become like.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as a sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds have passed since the variation pattern command was received and 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate except for (until the elapse of seconds). It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized. Is designed to be output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is used. , The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is combined with the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is set to mute. The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track with the built-in notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined. , The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has passed, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound. (Set to the volume value), the sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or pachinko When a notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of an illegal act against the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of 4, this muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound elapses for a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. It starts to flow again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data for sound generation until the time passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates a volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 222 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the regular processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 221. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 221. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary processing Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 221. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing omission this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 221 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221 to activate the 1 ms interrupt timer in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven according to the drive data to be performed, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The movable position can be grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the production sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the production operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing and back up. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas and are set in different areas and are SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 221, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 224 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, among the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the CPU is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. And, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 225, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the command being transmitted can be received by the peripheral control IC for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 221 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 226, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the first lower start port sensor 2101. On the condition that the detection signal by the first upper start port sensor 2524 is on (there is a ball entering the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004) (step S231), the first special symbol The first special random number of the above is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM, and the like is executed (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2601 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R A process of opening / closing the first big winning opening 2006 is executed according to the big hit game state. In addition, when the mode suggests "5R jackpot", the process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 is executed according to the 5R jackpot game state, and the mode suggests "2R jackpot". In addition, a process of opening / closing the first big winning opening 2006 is executed according to the 2R big hit game state.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2006 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting "5R jackpot" when ending the state, and when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. .. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 237 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 237, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the big hit executing flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S236), and the small hit executing flag is set. If is set, the small hit control process (step S236A) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit". The process of opening and closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the small hit game state, and the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603. If it is done, the transition to the 15R jackpot game state is controlled.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is executed. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the hold storage area is not "0" (step S237), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, the first lower start port sensor 2101 and the first upper start port sensor 2524 are in the ON state, and the game to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004. Assuming that it is determined that the ball has entered, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S241, first, the first special random number, the reach random number, as shown in FIG. 227. The first symbol random number and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400. The lighting state of is updated to correspond to the first hold storage number, and a command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (Special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it has a pre-determination table (not shown) and a random number acquired in step S241 described above or a random number acquired in step S251 described later, specifically, a special random number (first). Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second special random numbers), reach random numbers, and variable random numbers, and if so, the type of jackpot If the result is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the setting are set, and in the effect pre-judgment process relating to the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second start port passage process described later, The second special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the second special random number, the second hold storage number (value of the second special hold count counter), and the second special symbol pre-judgment command (step S262). ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start where the start winning is generated are generated. In addition to the number of reserved storages stored corresponding to the opening 2004 and the second starting port 2005, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, a big hit If the type of game is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is displayed in a variable manner according to the start prize. Before the start, the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

Further, the hold storage area (first hold storage area, second hold storage area) has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of hold storages, and the peripheral control IC has a pre-determined command indicated by a received pre-determination command. Judgment information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. The variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) received when the variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) for notifying the start of variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received. The pre-judgment information stored in the first storage area of the hold storage area (first hold storage area, second hold storage area) is discarded according to the first change pattern command, second change pattern command), and the Nth position. Move the pre-judgment information stored in the (N = 2-4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area (pre-determination information stored in the hold storage area). shift). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is memorized so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S233, the second start port sensor 2601 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2005, as shown in FIG. 229. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is "4" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S251. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the display device 851, or the mode type (variation) of the game effect to be executed. After executing the effect pre-determination process (step S255) for determining the pre-determination information such as the pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 0)) instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004 is set to "4", while The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2005 is set to "4". The second starting port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "4", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second starting port 2005 is reached. Even if a game ball enters the ball, it is suppressed from being in a disadvantageous state for the player, such as not being able to obtain a chance of a big hit lottery.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since only the tables and tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 231, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first starts with step S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number, (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 (A), when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). It has a big hit judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of low probability time saving state)) and a big hit judgment table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability time saving state). .. Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred for comparison with the first special random number, it is 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 2. In the case of 1/299, when the set value is 4, 1/289, when the set value is 5, 1/279, and when the set value is 6, the first special random number is won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that it has been done, matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are lost in the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit judgment table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319 and the set value are 2. 1/309 in some cases, 1/299 in case of set value 3, 1/289 in case of set value 4, 1/279 in case of set value 5, and 1/269 in case of set value 6. It matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the big hit with the big hit probability of 144/319, and is one with the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with the small hit probability of 144/319. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being judged as a small hit than the hit judgment table referred for for comparison with the first special random number. The second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2005 is compared to the case where the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004 is executed. It is considered that the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of is executed. Further, the hit determination table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the hit determination table at the time of low probability. For the set values 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities, the hall manager can change the set value by performing a predetermined setting change operation using the setting key when the power is turned on. It has become.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a reach loss as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 234, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233 (B). The type of big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the big hit game state ends. , The second special symbol) variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability change jackpot 2. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the first big prize opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened than usual.
3. 3. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2006 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If so, after the end of the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is terminated if it is not a big hit before the variable display is executed 77 times, 2R. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

If the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second symbol random number read in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233 (B). The type of jackpot is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the second special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the second special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the big hit game state ends. , The second special symbol) variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability change jackpot 2. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the first big prize opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened than usual.
3. 3. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2006 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If so, after the end of the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is terminated if it is not a big hit before the variable display is executed 77 times, 2R. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time saving jackpot, and a 2R jackpot is assigned. In the case of, 92 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 46% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time saving jackpot, and 2R. When it becomes a big hit, eight judgment values are distributed. That is, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R probability variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 15R probability variation jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. The second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2005 rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004. When the variable display is executed, the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is decided to be a 2R jackpot, it is decided to be a 2R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, when it is decided to be a 5R jackpot, it is decided to be a 5R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is decided to be a 15R jackpot, it is decided to be a jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is decided as the symbol.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. (Step S325).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second prize opening 2007 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing the second prize opening 2007 is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easy). After the game ball received in the second prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when 10 game balls have been won in the first prize opening 2006 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002, the opening / closing pattern of closing the first prize opening 2006 is repeated 14 times to allow the game ball to win the first prize opening 2006. It is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible to enter the ball (easy), and after the end of the jackpot game state, the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. The first small hit that controls the execution period to be shorter than usual and controls to a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second prize opening 2007 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing the second prize opening 2007 is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2007 (easy). After the game ball received in the second prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when 10 game balls have been won in the first prize opening 2006 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 3002, the opening / closing pattern of closing the first prize opening 2006 is repeated 14 times to allow the game ball to win the first prize opening 2006. If it is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the ball, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game state ) Is controlled to a time-saving state that ends if there is no big hit before the variable display is executed 77 times, and if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R big hit game state, the big hit game state ends. One of the two types of small hits, which is to be controlled to the normal state later, is determined.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 100% probability that the first small hit will be obtained and the second small hit will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result for a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability that the first small hit will be obtained, and a 90% probability that the second small hit will be obtained.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. ..

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an outlier symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is subjected to any one of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S328. (The mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol may be instructed)) is set to the determination result notification command according to each of the lottery results so as to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command (left / middle / right decorative symbols are variablely displayed and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is decided as a small hit symbol ("final decisive battle"), and when a 5R time saving big hit is specified, the 5R time saving big hit symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9". If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol and the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbol among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss. If it is decided to be a design) and the outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even if the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit game state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit game state.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 235. If this is done (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". To do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short for the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the time saving state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 236, first steps S371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 237, first steps S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is terminated and the non-time reduction control (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game is started. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S403). Opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2006 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the first prize opening 2006 has won 10 game balls. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected by the first big winning opening sensor 3002 is completed (opening / closing control that repeats 2, 5, or 15 times) (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). .. By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) is set according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit). As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) Two small hit start command) is set.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is a small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later. ) Ends the opening / closing control of the second big winning opening 2007 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2007 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice). Sometimes reset. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot game state based on the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S401), which waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round is started.
2. The first big prize opening 2006 is controlled based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2006 is started based on the start of the next round. After opening the first prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2006 with the above first prize opening sensor 3002. Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when detected (step S402)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state ends when all the rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the first big winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning is won. At the end of the round that controls the mouth 2006 to be closed, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Changes in notice production depending on button operation timing]
In the present embodiment, in the operation valid period in which the operation for the effect operation unit 301 can be accepted, the first half valid period corresponding to the first half, which is the period before the specific timing, and the operation valid period after the specific timing. It is divided into a latter half valid period corresponding to the latter half of the period, and a notice effect to be executed when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 is set corresponding to each valid period. There is. Then, among the operation valid periods, the advance notice effect to be executed differs depending on which timing of the first half valid period and the second half valid period the player operates the effect operation unit 301 (operation effect). ) Is running.

In this example, the above-mentioned button effect (operation effect) can be executed at the start of the variable display of the symbol. Further, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image showing the operation valid period and the specific timing. As a result, during the execution of the button effect, whether the first half valid period corresponding to the first half of the period before the specific timing is being executed, or the second half of the period after the specific timing It is possible to recognize whether the latter half of the valid period is being executed. The operation validity period is set to 3 seconds, and the first half validity period and the second half validity period are set to 1.5 seconds, respectively, and the operation validity period is evenly divided. It has become.

Further, in this example, before the start of the button effect, it is determined which of the advance notice effects belonging to the first advance notice effect group is to be executed as the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period. Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 during the execution of the first half valid period, the already determined advance notice effect is executed. Further, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 may display an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated as the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period, and the effect. There is a case where an image indicating that the advance notice effect executed during the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is unknown is displayed without displaying an image suggesting the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated. That is, when an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, the effect is produced regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period. When the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated can be grasped, but the image suggesting the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated is not displayed, the first half valid period If the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of the above, it is not possible to grasp the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

On the other hand, before the start of the button effect, as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period, any of the advance notice effects belonging to the second advance notice effect group, which is a group different from the first advance notice effect group, is executed. I have decided. Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 during the execution of the latter half valid period, the already determined advance notice effect is executed. Further, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 may display an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period, and the effect. There is a case where an image indicating that the advance notice effect executed during the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is unknown is displayed without displaying an image suggesting the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated. That is, when an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, the effect is produced regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period. When the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated can be grasped, but the image suggesting the advance notice effect executed when the operation unit 301 is operated is not displayed, the latter half valid period If the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of, it is not possible to grasp the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

In the above, the notice effect belonging to the first notice effect group which is the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period, and the notice effect belonging to the second notice effect group which is the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period. Has set different notice effects. That is, among the operation valid periods, the advance notice effect to be executed differs depending on which timing of the first half valid period and the latter half valid period the player operates the effect operation unit 301. .. As a result, during the execution of the button effect, the advance notice effect belonging to the first advance notice effect group, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period, and the second advance notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period. Of the advance notice effects belonging to the effect group, the effect operation unit 301 may be operated at the operation timing at which the player executes the desired advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect to be executed after the button effect can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, as described above, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 does not display an image suggesting the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period. An image indicating that the advance notice effect is unknown may be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 does not display an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period, and the advance notice effect is displayed. An image indicating that it is unknown may be displayed. In this way, when an image indicating that the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, what kind of advance notice effect is to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may execute the desired advance notice effect without knowing it, and the player can participate in the button effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 with expectation. In particular, when one of the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the advance notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period is clear and the other advance notice effect is unknown. , It is possible to give a choice of whether to select and execute a notice effect that is obvious, or to select and execute a notice effect that the player wants, although it is unknown. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of the button effect execution process. First, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not it is the start of the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol) (step S2101). Then, when it is determined that it is the start of the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol), it is determined whether or not to execute the button effect (step S2102). Further, when executing the button effect, the mode of the button in the instruction image instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is also determined.

FIG. 240 (A) is a table showing an example of the button effect determination pattern. Button effect determination patterns 0 to 2 are set in the button effect determination pattern table. In step S2102 described above, a random number for determining the button effect is used based on whether the result of the variation display of the symbol is a hit or a miss, and the button effect determination pattern 0 to set in the button effect determination pattern table is used. Of 2, one of the button effect determination patterns is determined.

The button effect determination pattern 0 is a pattern in which the button effect is not executed. Further, the button effect determination pattern 1 is a pattern that executes the button effect and displays the mode of the button in the instruction image instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in a normal mode. Further, the button effect determination pattern 2 is a pattern in which the button effect is executed and the mode of the button in the instruction image instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in a red mode different from the normal mode.

In this example, when determining the button effect determination pattern, it is determined that the button effect determination patterns 1 and 2 have a higher expectation for hitting than the button effect determination pattern 0. That is, when the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation for hitting is higher than when the button effect is not executed, and the button effect can be participated with expectation. Further, among the button effect determination patterns 1 and 2, it is determined that the button effect determination pattern 2 has a higher expectation for hitting than the button effect determination pattern 1. That is, when the button effect is executed, when the button mode appears in the red mode, the expectation for hitting is higher than when the button mode appears in the normal mode. You can participate in the button production with expectation.

Next, in the button effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the determination to execute the button effect has been made in the execution determination of whether or not to execute the button effect (step S2103). Then, when it is determined that the button effect is to be executed, the content of the button effect is determined (step S2104). As the effect content of the button effect, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period capable of accepting the operation for the effect operation unit 301 is divided into the first half valid period and the second half valid period, and the operation valid period is divided into the first half. When it is divided into a valid period and a latter half valid period, a notice effect corresponding to each valid period (a notice effect executed when the production operation unit 301 is operated) and an image suggesting those notice effects are displayed. Also decide whether or not to do so.

FIG. 240 (B) is a table showing an example of the button effect execution pattern. Button effect determination patterns 1 to 10 are set in the button effect execution pattern table. In step S2104 described above, when the mode of the button is displayed in the normal mode, a random number for executing the button effect is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the symbol is a hit or a miss, and the button effect is used. Of the button effect execution patterns 1 to 10 set in the execution pattern table, one of the button effect execution patterns is determined. In addition, when the mode of the button is displayed in the red mode, a random number for executing the button effect is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the symbol is a hit or a miss, and a button effect execution pattern table is used. Of the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 set in, one of the button effect execution patterns is determined.

The button effect execution pattern 1 is a pattern in which the operation valid period capable of accepting an operation on the effect operation unit 301 is not divided into the first half valid period and the second half valid period, but is a collective valid period. Further, in the button effect execution pattern 1, the advance notice effect A is set as the advance notice effect (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated) corresponding to the operation valid period, and the effect display device 1600 operates. As an image suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the valid period is the notice effect A, the pattern is such that "notice A" is displayed.

The button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 are patterns in which the operation valid period capable of receiving an operation on the effect operation unit 301 is divided into a first half valid period and a second half valid period. Further, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 are the first advance notice effect group as the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period). A notice production A, which is a notice production belonging to, is set. Of these, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 6 are "notice ??" as an image (an image that does not suggest the notice effect A) indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is unknown in the effect display device 1600. The pattern is to display "?". On the other hand, the button effect execution patterns 7 to 10 are patterns in which "notice A" is displayed as an image suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is the notice effect A in the effect display device 1600.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4 are the second advance notice effect group as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period). The notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to the above, are set respectively. Then, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4 are images indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown in the effect display device 1600 (images that do not suggest the advance notice effect B, the advance notice effect C, and the advance notice effect D). ), The pattern is to display "notice ???". That is, with respect to the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, it is assumed that either the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period or the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period is displayed so as to be unknown. There is.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 are the second advance notice effect group as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period). The notice effect C and the notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to, are set respectively. Then, the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 are "notice C" and "notice" as images suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is the notice effect C and the notice effect D in the effect display device 1600. The pattern is to display "D". That is, with respect to the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is unknown among the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period. However, it is supposed to be displayed so that the notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period becomes clear.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 are the second advance notice effect groups as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period). The notice effect C and the notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to, are set respectively. Then, the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 are "images indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown (an image that does not suggest the advance notice effect C and the advance notice effect D) in the effect display device 1600. The pattern is to display "Notice ???". That is, with respect to the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8, the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is clarified among the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period. However, it is supposed to be displayed so that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10 are the second advance notice effect groups as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period). The notice effect C and the notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to, are set respectively. Then, the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10 are "notice C" and "notice" as images suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is the notice effect C and the notice effect D in the effect display device 1600. The pattern is to display "D". That is, with respect to the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10, both the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period are displayed so as to be clear. There is.

In this example, when determining the button effect execution pattern, if the button mode is displayed in the normal mode, one of the button effect execution patterns 1 to 10 is determined, whereas the button mode is red. When it is displayed in the above mode, the button effect execution pattern 1 is not determined, but any of the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 is determined. As described in detail above, when the button effect appears in the red mode, the expectation for hitting is higher than when the button mode appears in the normal mode. I am doing it. From this, when the button effect is executed, if the operation valid period is divided into the first half valid period and the second half valid period (button effect execution pattern 2 to 10), the operation valid period is the first half. The expectation for hitting is higher than when the valid period and the latter half valid period are not divided (button effect execution pattern 1), and the button effect can be participated with expectation.

Further, in this example, when determining the button effect execution pattern, the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, button effect execution patterns 5 to 8, and button effect execution patterns 9 and 10. Has been decided. That is, since it is determined that the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 have a higher expectation for hitting than the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, the effect display device 1600 has a notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period. When the image suggesting is displayed, the image suggesting the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is not displayed (the image indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is unknown is displayed. The expectation for hitting is higher than in the case of. Similarly, since it is determined that the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 have a higher expectation for hitting than the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, the effect display device 1600 gives a notice corresponding to the latter half valid period. When the image suggesting the effect is displayed, the image suggesting the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is not displayed (the image indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown is displayed. The expectation for hitting is higher than when it is done). From this, when executing the button effect, the more obvious the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the second half valid period, the higher the expectation for hitting. You can know that it is expensive, and you can participate in the button production with expectation.

Next, in the button effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the button effect based on the effect content of the button effect determined in step S2102 or step S2104 (step S2105). Then, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the operation valid period after the start of the button effect (step S2106), the operation valid period (the operation valid period is divided) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. If so, the advance notice effect corresponding to either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) is executed (step S2107).

In this example, when the operation valid period is divided into the first half valid period and the second half valid period (button effect execution patterns 2 to 10), the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is executed, and when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period, the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period is executed. .. Further, if the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of either the first half valid period or the second half valid period, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the latter half valid period I try not to execute any of the notice effects corresponding to.

In the button effect execution pattern 2, the advance notice effect B is set as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period). However, after the advance notice effect B is executed, a specific effect is executed. That is, the notice effect B is executed as an effect suggesting that a specific effect is executed. Further, the specific effect is an effect set in the variation pattern, and the button effect execution pattern 2 in which the notice effect B is set is determined only when the variation pattern in which the specific effect is set is executed. It is possible. Further, since the specific effect is an effect set in a variable pattern, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period when executing the button effect based on the button effect execution pattern 2. However, if the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of the latter half valid period, the advance notice effect B is not executed, while the advance notice effect B is executed to execute a specific effect. It is designed to perform a specific effect.

FIG. 241 is a specific example of the effect when the button effect is executed. Here, the case of executing the button effect based on the button effect execution pattern 5 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 241 (A), when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, the button effect is started immediately after that (FIG. 241 (B)). During the execution of the button effect, an instruction image instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed near the center of the effect display device 1600, and the operation on the effect operation unit 301 is slightly below the center of the effect display device 1600. The validity period bar, which is an image showing the validity period of the operation that can accept the above, is displayed. Also, inside the validity period bar, a dividing line indicating the specific timing for dividing the operation validity period into the first half validity period and the second half validity period is displayed, and the left side of the dividing line inside the validity period bar is displayed. Indicates the first half validity period, and the right side of the dividing line inside the validity period bar indicates the second half validity period.

Further, in each of the area showing the first half valid period and the area showing the latter half valid period inside the valid period bar, the effect operation unit is located on the front side of the filled area showing the remaining period of the operation valid period. An image showing the advance notice effect executed at the time of the operation of 301 is displayed. Specifically, in the area inside the validity period bar indicating the first half validity period, a notice effect corresponding to the first half validity period (a notice executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half validity period). "Notice ???" is displayed as an image indicating that the effect) is unknown (an image that does not suggest the advance notice effect A), and the latter half is valid in the area indicating the latter half valid period inside the validity period bar. "Notice C" is displayed as an image suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the period (the notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period) is the notice effect C. .. Then, as time elapses after the start of the button effect, the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period inside the valid period bar decreases from the left side to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 241 (C), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period, the notice effect A is determined as the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period, and the notice effect A is determined. By executing the above, it is possible to know that the unknown advance notice effect is the advance notice effect A (FIG. 241 (D)). Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (E), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period, the advance notice effect C is determined as the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period, and the advance notice is given. The effect C is executed (FIG. 241 (F)). Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (G), the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of either the first half valid period or the second half valid period until the operation valid period elapses. In such a case, neither the notice effect A as the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period and the notice effect C as the notice effect corresponding to the second half valid period are executed.

In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period, or when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period, the button effect being executed is terminated. Immediately after that, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation valid period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is executed. However, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period, or if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half valid period, the operation valid period of the button effect elapses. After waiting, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation valid period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated may be executed. In addition, during the variable display of the symbol on which the button effect is executed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation valid period (either the first half valid period or the latter half valid period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is executed. Anything may be used. For example, the operation is effective at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect operation unit 301 was operated during the execution of the first half valid period or the second half valid period. The notice effect corresponding to the period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) may be executed.

Further, in this example, 3 seconds is set as the operation valid period, and 1.5 seconds is set as the first half valid period and the second half valid period, respectively, and the operation valid period is evenly divided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of the first half valid period and the second half valid period in the operation valid period may be made uneven, and the first half valid period and the second half valid period may be divided so as to be different. For example, the first half valid period is shorter than the second half valid period in the operation valid period, and the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period (notice executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period). As the effect), a notice effect with a high expectation for hit may be set. In such a case, although it is difficult to operate the effect operation unit 301 during the execution of the first half valid period. , It is possible to motivate the effect operation unit 301 to operate during the execution of the first half valid period.

Further, in this example, as the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the image showing the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is inside the valid period bar and the remaining period of the operation valid period. It is configured to be displayed on the front side of the filled area indicating the above, so that it can always be visually recognized regardless of whether or not the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is reduced. On the other hand, the image showing the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed inside the validity period bar and on the rear side of the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period. When the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is not reduced, it cannot be visually recognized in the blindfolded state, and it is gradually visually recognized in the process of decreasing the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period. It may be configured so that it can be obtained. Depending on such a configuration, as time elapses after the start of the button effect, the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period inside the valid period bar decreases, and is executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. Since the image showing the notice effect is gradually revealed, it is possible to pay attention to what kind of notice effect the image will be revealed with expectation. Further, before the image showing the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated becomes clear, the image showing the advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated or the effect operation unit 301 is operated. After it becomes clear, it is possible to give an option of operating the production operation unit 301 or to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

[Execution of madness and muffling effects triggered by pending prizes]
In the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005, the special random number acquired in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process. Based on the reach random number, the symbol random number, and the variable random number, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 The reach effect is executed as the game effect to be executed, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is determined before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize, and the main A command related to the pre-judgment information is transmitted from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the pre-judgment information.

In this example, when the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect specified by the pre-judgment information is a specific reach effect, the player receives a ball corresponding to the pre-determination information. It is possible to perform a mad production as a production to give a surprise. In the madness production, a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed, and a screaming sound of the character "Cha" is output in a situation where the production sound such as BGM output as the production progresses is muted. ing. That is, in the madness production, the production sounds other than the screaming sound of the character are muted. In this way, when there is a ball that will execute a specific reach effect, a crazy effect is suddenly executed separately from the effect being executed, which can surprise the player. It is possible to make the player who is paying close attention to the effect during execution notice that such a ball has been entered.

Further, in this example, after the execution of the madness effect, the image displayed as the effect progresses remains as usual, and all the effect sounds such as BGM output as the effect progresses are included. As for the production sound of, a muffling effect is executed. In this way, when there is a ball that will execute a specific reach effect, the mad effect is executed first to surprise the player, and the muffling effect that is executed after that becomes conspicuous. , Can give the player a sense of tension and anticipation. In addition, even if you do not notice that there was a ball entering that will execute a specific reach effect at the time of executing the madness effect, such a ball entering will be caused by the muffling effect executed after that. You can make them aware that it was there.

Further, in this example, it is possible to continue the muffling effect after the execution of the madness effect until the variable display of the symbol according to the entry of the ball, which is to execute the specific reach effect, is started. There is. In other words, if there is already a hold (memory of a special random number) at a certain point in time when a specific reach effect is to be executed, a specific reach is executed after executing the variable display of the symbol according to the hold. Since the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold) that will execute the effect is started, the muffling effect after the execution of the mad effect should be continued over multiple times of the variable display of the symbol. Is possible. In this way, by making it possible to continue the muffling effect across multiple times of the variable display of the symbol, the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold) that will execute a specific reach effect. It is possible to maintain the tension and anticipation given to the player toward the start of the game.

Conventionally, as a pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on pre-judgment information, a hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 by winning a start during execution of a variable display of a symbol is used to win the start-up prize. Before executing the variable display of the corresponding symbol and erasing the hold display, a hold change effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a hit is executed by changing the mode of the hold display, and such a pre-judgment effect is performed. The player's expectation is raised by executing a number of combinations. In this regard, in this example, as the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the pre-judgment information, the madness effect and the madness are performed without performing a combined and lively effect as in the conventional pre-judgment effect. By executing the muffling effect after executing the effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the madness effect execution process at the time of entering the ball. First, when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005, the pre-determination information is related from the main control board 1310 toward the peripheral control board 1510. Although the command is transmitted, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the command related to the pre-determination information (step S2201), the mode type (variation pattern) of the game effect specified by the pre-determination information is used. It is determined whether or not the type) is a specific reach effect (step S2202). Then, when it is determined that the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect specified by the pre-judgment information is a specific reach effect, the variation display of the symbol being executed is normally varied (the symbol that does not become reach). It is determined whether or not the pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on the pre-determination information prior to the pre-determination information is being executed (step S2203). The specific reach effect corresponds to a reach effect having a high expectation for a hit (for example, a super reach effect) among a plurality of types of reach effects having different expectations for a hit.

In step S2203, when there is a ball that will execute a specific reach effect, the variation display of the symbol being executed is normal variation (variation display of the symbol that does not reach), and the pre-determination information. If it is determined that the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the prior determination information is not being executed, the madness effect and the mute effect are executed after the madness effect is executed (step S2204). That is, in a situation where the variation display of the symbol being executed is a normal variation (variation display of a symbol that does not reach) and the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the pre-judgment information is not being executed, a specific reach Only when there is a ball entering the ball to execute the effect, the mad effect and the mute effect are executed after the mad effect is executed. Here, in the madness production, a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed for a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), and the production sound such as BGM output as the production progresses is muted. In this situation, the character's "Cha" scream is output. That is, in the madness production, the production sounds other than the screaming sound of the character are muted. In addition, in the muffling effect after the execution of the mad effect, all the effects including the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses while keeping the image displayed as the effect progresses as usual. The sound is muted.

In this example, as a condition for executing the madness effect and the muffling effect after the execution of the madness effect, the variation display of the symbol being executed usually fluctuates when there is a ball that will execute a specific reach effect. (Variable display of symbols that do not reach) is a condition. For example, the variation display of the symbol being executed is the reach variation (variation display of the symbol to be the reach), and when the reach effect is executed, there is a ball entering that will execute a specific reach effect, and it goes mad. When the effect or mute effect is executed, the attention to the reach effect is hindered. In this respect, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by providing that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a normal variation (variable display of a symbol that does not reach).

Further, in this example, as a condition for executing the madness effect and the muffling effect after the execution of the madness effect, when there is a ball entering the ball to execute a specific reach effect, the pre-judgment information is prior to It is a condition that the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the pre-determination information is not being executed. As the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect), in addition to the madness effect and the mute effect, the start display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by winning a start during the execution of the variable display of the symbol. It is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a hit by changing the mode of the hold display until the change display of the symbol according to the winning is executed and the hold display is erased. For this reason, for example, when a hold change effect is executed as a pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect), there is a ball entering that causes a specific reach effect to be executed, and when the madness effect or mute effect is executed, A situation will occur in which attention to the pending change effect is hindered. In this regard, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by providing that the pre-judgment effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on the pre-judgment information prior to the pre-judgment information is not being executed. it can.

Further, in this example, as a madness effect, a cut-in image which is an image in which the character goes mad is displayed, and the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is muted. However, as for the screaming sound of the character, the screaming sound corresponding to the character appearing in the cut-in image is output. In addition, a plurality of types of characters are prepared as characters that can appear in the cut-in image, and for the cut-in image, the character corresponding to the stage being executed is displayed. In addition, as a stage, a stage corresponding to each of a plurality of types of characters is prepared, and the stage is switched every time a number fluctuation to several tens of fluctuations are executed. For example, a background image or the like in which the character is involved is displayed. I try to switch. In this way, in the madness effect, a unified effect can be executed by displaying a cut-in image and outputting a scream sound using a character corresponding to the stage being executed.

Next, in the ball entry madness effect execution process, after the sound deadening effect is executed, it is at the start of the variable display of the symbol according to the ball entry (hold), which is to execute the specific reach effect, or the specific reach. If it is the time when the predetermined muffling period has elapsed since the ball was entered (held) on which the effect is to be executed, or the earlier timing (step S2105), the process is being executed. The muffling effect is finished, and the effect sound such as BGM, which is output as the effect progresses, is output as usual (step S2106). This point will be described in detail later.

FIG. 243 is a time chart showing an example at the time of executing the madness effect and the mute effect. Here, a case will be described in which there are already three holds (memory of special random numbers) at a certain point in time when a specific reach effect is to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 243 (A), the variation display of the symbol being executed is a normal variation (variation display of a symbol that does not reach the reach), and the execution of the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the pre-determination information. When there is a ball that will execute a specific reach effect in a situation that is not inside, the madness effect is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), and a cut-in image that is an image in which the character goes mad is displayed. In addition to displaying, a screaming sound of the character "Cha" is output in a situation where the production sound such as BGM, which is output as the production progresses, is muted. That is, in the madness production, the production sounds other than the screaming sound of the character are muted. Further, the cut-in image is on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and on the rear side of the hold display being displayed by using almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. In this way, the cut-in image is displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed by using almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the mad effect is executed. It can be easily noticed.

In addition, after the execution of the madness effect, the muffling effect is executed, and the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is included while keeping the image displayed as the effect progresses as usual. All production sounds are muted. Then, after the start of the muffling effect, the specific reach effect is executed before the predetermined muffling period elapses after the ball is entered (held) to execute the specific reach effect. When it is time to start the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold), the sound deadening effect being executed is ended, and the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is played as usual. I am trying to output to.

In this example, since there are already three holds (memory of special random numbers) at the time when the ball enters the ball to execute a specific reach effect, the variable display of the symbol according to the three holds is executed. Later, the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold), which will execute a specific reach effect, will be started. That is, the muffling effect after the execution of the mad effect can be continued over the three times of variable display of the symbol, which is the number of pending effects. In this way, by making it possible to continue the muffling effect over the three times of the variable display of the symbol, the variable display of the symbol according to the entry (hold) in which the specific reach effect is executed. It is possible to maintain the tension and anticipation given to the player toward the start of the game. In addition, at the start of the variable display of the symbol according to the entry (hold) that will execute a specific reach effect, the mute effect is ended, and the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is usually output. Since the output is on the street, the tension given to the player can be released. Further, as a specific reach effect, among a plurality of types of reach effects having different expectations for hits, a reach effect having a high expectation for hits (for example, a super reach effect) is executed, and the specific reach effect Since there is a high possibility that the result will be a hit, the expectation given to the player can be particularly high during the execution of the madness effect or the muffling effect.

Further, as the pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect), in addition to the madness effect and the mute effect, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned hold change effect, etc., but during the period when the mute effect is executed, , Other pre-judgment effects (so-called look-ahead effects) such as hold change effects are restricted from being executed. As a result, while the muffling effect is being executed, the tension given to the player is maintained, but by not executing other pre-judgment effect (so-called look-ahead effect) such as the hold change effect. It is possible to prevent such tension from being interrupted.

FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting state of the door frame at the time of executing the madness effect and the mute effect. The door frame 3 includes a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a door. It is equipped with a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, and each of them can emit light in a predetermined color. I have to. Then, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), during the execution of the madness effect, the light emitting portion is emitted from the lower side to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, and further toward the door frame top unit 450. Moves to control the light emission as if light gathered on the door frame top unit 450, and during the execution of the muffling effect after the execution of the madness effect, the door frame top unit 450 continues until the muffling effect is completed. The lighting state is maintained (FIG. 244 (B)). For this reason as well, during the execution of the muffling effect, the player feels a sense of tension toward the start of the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold) that will execute a specific reach effect. And expectation can be sustained.

In the above, the door frame top unit 450 is maintained in a lit state while the muffling effect is being executed, but during the period when such a muffling effect is being executed, an effect not related to the muffling effect (design). As an effect related to the variable display of the above), it is restricted that at least another light emitting effect using the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top unit 450 is executed. As a result, the tension given to the player is maintained during the execution of the muffling effect, but such tension is interrupted by not executing other light emitting effects not related to the muffling effect. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 243 (B), after the start of the muffling effect, before the start of the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold), which is to execute the specific reach effect, the specific If a predetermined muffling period elapses after the ball is entered (held) to execute the reach effect, the ongoing mute effect is terminated and the BGM is output as the effect progresses. The production sound such as is output as usual. That is, after the start of the muffling effect, if a predetermined muffling period elapses after the ball is entered (held) to execute the specific reach effect, the specific reach effect is executed. Until the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold) is started, the production sound such as BGM that is output as the production progresses is output as usual.

Regarding the above-mentioned muffling period, after the muffling effect is started, a maximum of three times is required until the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold), which is to execute a specific reach effect, is started. It is set on the assumption that the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed by the normal fluctuation (variation display of the symbol that does not reach the reach). That is, the normal fluctuation time is set to about 10 seconds, and the muffling period is set to about 30 seconds. As a result, after the start of the muffling effect, the variation display of the symbol is normally varied (reach) until the variation display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold) for executing the specific reach effect is started. When the reach effect (for example, 30 to 360 seconds) is executed by the reach variation (variation display of the symbol that becomes the reach) instead of the variation display of the symbol that does not become, for example, the mute period is set in the middle of the reach effect. As the sound elapses, the muffling effect being executed ends, and the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is output as usual. Therefore, the expectation of the effect sound of the reach effect is as usual. Can be enjoyed by. In addition, if it is not set whether or not the muffling period has passed, if the muffling effect is executed for a long period of time, there may be anxiety that the speaker may be broken, but the muffling period has passed. By ending the muffling effect at that point, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In this example, after the start of the muffling effect, the specific reach effect is executed before the variable display of the symbol according to the incoming ball (hold), which is to execute the specific reach effect, is started. When a predetermined muffling period elapses after the ball is entered (held), the muffling effect being executed is ended, and the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is normally output. I try to output as it is. On the other hand, during the execution of the muffling effect, the door frame top unit 450 is kept lit, but even when the muffling period has passed, the door frame top unit 450 is lit. The door frame top unit 450 is kept lit until the variable display of the symbol according to the entry (hold), which is to execute a specific reach effect, is started without ending. I am trying to do it. In this way, the state in which the door frame top unit 450 is lit is maintained regardless of whether or not the muffling period has elapsed, so even if the muffling period elapses and the muffling effect ends, a specific reach is achieved. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the symbol according to the entry (hold) on which the effect is to be executed has not been executed.

The plate unit 200 of this example is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player. With respect to the sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume level output from various speakers in the order of 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and operate the volume control button 227 upward. The larger the stage, the higher the volume output from the various speakers, and the volume control button 227 is operated downward to reduce the volume, the lower the volume output from the various speakers. In this example, the volume of the lowest stage (1) is zero, and all the production sounds are inaudible. Further, the volume of the sound output from various speakers can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the symbol. In such a configuration, while the mute effect is being executed, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the volume can be adjusted internally, but the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses. For all the production sounds including, the mute is maintained.

On the other hand, during the execution of the muffling effect, it may be configured to limit the internal adjustment of the volume when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. According to such a configuration, even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, it is possible to notice that the muffling effect is being executed because the volume is not adjusted internally.

In this example, during the execution of the muffling effect, all the effect sounds including the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses are muted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the effects are not limited to this. Only the sound may be muted. For example, during the execution of the muffling effect, the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is muted, whereas the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005 are muted. The incoming ball sound that is output when the ball enters the ball may be configured to be output without being muted. According to such a configuration, even during the execution of the muffling effect, it is indicated that the ball has entered the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the like. It can be confirmed by sound. Further, the operation sound output when the operation unit such as the volume control button 227 is operated may be configured to be output without being muted. According to such a configuration, during the execution of the muffling effect, the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is not output, and even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound is produced. Does not change, but it can be confirmed by the operation sound that the volume control button 227 has been operated.

[Implementation of suggestion effect when entering a ball using a light emitting member]
In the present embodiment, depending on the type of hit, the execution period of the variable display is usually set until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big hit game state. It is possible to control to a shorter time state (advantageous gaming state), which is shorter than that. In such a time saving state, the normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate 2002 is more likely to be a "normal hit" than in the normal state (non-time saving state), and the normal lottery becomes a "normal hit". This makes it easier for a large number of game balls B to enter the second starting port 2005. As a result, in the time saving state, the second starting port 2005 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004, so that the second starting port 2005 is used. The driving operation (so-called "right-handed") of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 is performed so that the game ball B is accepted.

In this example, around the second starting port 2005 of the attacker unit 2600, a second starting port decorative substrate 2671 is provided on which a plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the second starting port 2005 are mounted on the upper surface. .. That is, by lighting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the second starting port decorative substrate 2671, the periphery of the second starting port 2005 can be light-emitting and decorated. The plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, in a normal state (non-time saving state), interlock with the LEDs of other decorative substrates provided in the game area 5a to play a game. It enables an integral light emitting decoration in the entire region 5a.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005, the special obtained in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process. Based on random numbers, reach random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable random numbers, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit. The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is determined before the variation display according to the start winning prize is started. A command related to the pre-judgment information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the pre-judgment information.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are used. , A suggestion effect suggesting whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed. Such "variation display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005" includes the variation display of the symbol executed at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. Fluctuation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 and unexecuted symbols that will be stored as hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 Variable display and includes. Whether or not the fluctuation display of the symbol executed at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 is a hit is determined based on the winning command or the fluctuation pattern command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. It can be grasped by the information, and the fluctuation display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 or is stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. Whether or not the variation display of the unexecuted symbol will be a hit can be grasped by the pre-judgment information based on the command related to the pre-judgment information transmitted at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. .. In this way, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, a suggestion effect using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage the possibility that the result of the variation display of the symbol shown after entering the second starting port 2005 will be a hit. In particular, when there is a variation display of an unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 after that, the area around the second starting port 2005 By executing the suggestion effect using a plurality of LEDs provided in, the fluctuation of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold is changed without waiting for the display to be executed. It is possible to grasp the possibility that one of the displays will be a hit at an early stage.

Regarding the above, if the maximum number of holds has not been reached, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, it is stored as a hold and is provided around the second start port 2005. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect using a plurality of LEDs, and it is expected that the variation display of the symbol, which will show the result after entering the second starting port 2005, includes a hit. It is supposed to suggest the degree. That is, when the upper limit of the number of holds has not been reached, the player can continue to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, thereby enabling the execution of the suggestion effect. It is possible to grasp at an early stage the possibility that any of the variable display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold will be a hit. Here, in the time saving state, it is easy to enter the second starting port 2005 and the hold is likely to reach the upper limit number, and when the hold is close to the upper limit number, the upper limit number of hold is not exceeded. (2) It is becoming more common to stop driving the game ball B that is intended to enter the starting port 2005. In this respect, in this example, even when the hold is close to the upper limit number, the player enters the second starting port 2005 by continuing the operation of the player with respect to the handle 195 to enable the execution of the suggestion effect. It is possible to continue driving the game ball B to be made to be driven, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, when the hold has reached the upper limit, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, it is not stored as a hold but is provided around the second start port 2005. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect using multiple LEDs, and the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005. It is supposed to suggest. That is, when the upper limit of the number of holds has been reached, the player can continue to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, thereby enabling the execution of the suggestion effect. It is possible to grasp at an early stage the possibility that any of the variable display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold will be a hit. Here, in the time saving state, it is easy to enter the second starting port 2005 and the hold easily reaches the upper limit number, and when the hold reaches the upper limit number, the second starting port 2005 is further reached. Even if the game ball B is entered, the movement of the symbol due to the entry is not executed, so that the driving of the game ball B to be entered into the second starting port 2005 is often stopped. It has become. In this regard, in this example, even when the upper limit of the number of holds has been reached, the suggestion effect can be executed by continuing the operation of the player with respect to the handle 195, thereby moving to the second starting port 2005. It is possible to continue driving the game ball B to be entered, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are used. , The suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed, but this is not limited to this. However, in the suggestion effect, it is configured to suggest only the degree of expectation of whether or not the variation display of the unexecuted symbol already stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 is a hit. May be good. Even with this, if there is a variation display of an unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold, the player continues to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 after that. By doing so, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect, and one of the variable display of the unexecuted symbol becomes a hit without waiting for the variable display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold to be executed. The possibility can be grasped at an early stage.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are used. , The suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed, but this is not limited to this. Instead, when it is determined that the player's operation on the handle 195 is being continued (detection of the handle touch sensor 192 or the handle rotation detection sensor 189), the suggestion effect may be executed. Even with this, if it is determined that the player's operation on the handle 195 is being continued when there is a variation display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold, the ball enters the second starting port 2005. Since there is an intention to make it, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect, and the variable display of the unexecuted symbol can be displayed without waiting for the variable display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold to be executed. It is possible to grasp the possibility that one of them will be a hit at an early stage.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 is used. , A suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed, but this is not limited to this. Instead, when the ball enters the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the first lower start is started according to the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. It is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the mouth 2003 or the first upper starting mouth 2004. You may. Even with this, if there is a variation display of an unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold, then the game ball B has entered the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004. Sometimes, by enabling the execution of the suggestion effect, one of the variable displays of the unexecuted symbols, which is already stored as a hold, does not have to wait for the variable display of the unexecuted symbols to be executed. It is possible to grasp the possibility of winning at an early stage. Further, in the normal state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to enter the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 as compared with the ball entering the second starting port 2005 in the time saving state. However, since it is possible to execute the suggestion effect by entering the ball into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, let's enter the ball into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004. It is possible to motivate the player to do so, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in this example, when the upper limit of the number of holds has not been reached and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the hold is stored as a hold and the hold reaches the upper limit. When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, it is not stored as a hold, or in both cases, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. Depending on the light emitting mode of, the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed. Not limited to this, when the upper limit of the number of holds has not been reached and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect only when it is stored as a hold. It may be configured to do so. As a result, only when the upper limit of the number of holds has not been reached, the player can continue to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, so that the suggestion effect can be executed. It is possible to grasp at an early stage the possibility that any of the variable display of the unexecuted symbol stored as a hold will be a hit. Further, in this example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the period for executing the suggestion effect, but in the case of the above configuration, the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005. Each time the ball is memorized as a new hold, it may be configured to enable execution of a new suggestion effect.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the second starting port 2005 depends on the light emitting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. A suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the ball is executed, but it is not always necessary to execute the suggestion effect. , When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, there may be a case where the suggestion effect is executed and a case where the suggestion effect is not executed. In such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is executed, the result is shown in the variable display of the symbol after entering the second starting port 2005, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is not executed. It will be configured so that the degree of expectation as to whether or not is included is high.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are used. , The suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is executed, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a specific hold will be a hit among the fluctuation displays of unexecuted symbols that have already been stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. It may be configured as follows. In such a configuration, for example, the effect display device 1600 is set to display the hold display corresponding to each hold, and which hold is a specific hold, that is, the suggestion effect is executed for which hold. It is preferable that the hold display corresponding to a specific hold is displayed in a manner different from that of other hold displays so that it can be determined whether or not the hold display is present. As a result, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, a suggestion effect is executed for a specific hold that is already stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. In that case, it is possible to grasp the possibility that the specific hold will be a hit at an early stage without waiting for the variable display of the symbol according to the specific hold already stored as the hold to be executed. It is possible to wait with expectation until the variable display of the symbol according to a specific hold is executed.

Further, in the above, when there is a game ball B entering the second starting port 2005 in a situation where there is a specific hold, a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit. Is possible, but the following modification may be used. Specifically, after the specific hold is stored, each time the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect for the specific hold. , The number of continuations of the suggestion effect that can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not a specific hold is a hit. For example, the higher the number of continuations of the suggestion effect that can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold, the higher the expectation of whether or not a specific hold will be won. In addition, when the number of continuations of the suggestion effect that can be executed each time it is stored as a new hold reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the degree of expectation of whether or not a specific hold is a hit is raised. It may be configured to be high. According to this, after a specific hold is stored, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect for the specific hold by entering the ball into the second starting port 2005, and it is expected whether or not the specific hold will be a hit. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the degree is high, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the second starting port 2005, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game. Further, after the specific hold is stored, each time the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, the execution of the suggestion effect for the specific hold is continued (suggestion effect). It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect is repeated, and it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the suggestion effect with expectation until the variable display of the symbol according to the specific hold is executed.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect execution process at the time of entering the ball. First, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2005 when the game state is the time saving state (step S2301) (step S2302). Then, if it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the result will be shown after the ball has entered the second starting port 2005. Based on whether or not the display includes a hit, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are determined (step S2303). As described above, the "variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005" is the symbol executed at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. The fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005, and the fluctuation display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 will be stored as a hold. Includes variable display of unexecuted symbols. Then, whether or not the variation display of the symbol executed at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 is a hit is determined based on the winning command or the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the variation display of the symbol. It can be grasped by the information, and the fluctuation display of the unexecuted symbol that has already been stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 or is stored as a hold at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. Whether or not the variation display of the unexecuted symbol will be a hit can be grasped by the pre-judgment information based on the command related to the pre-judgment information transmitted at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. ..

In this example, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. Then, when determining the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, the result is obtained after entering the second starting port 2005 in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. It is decided that the degree of expectation that a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol to be shown is high. The rainbow color is a light emitting mode that can be determined only when a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005. From this, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation that a hit is included in the variable display of the symbol whose result will be shown after entering the second starting port 2005 when the suggestion effect is executed. It can be known that the more the plurality of LEDs are lit in the mode, the higher the possibility that the result of the variation display of the symbol shown after entering the second starting port 2005 will be a hit, and the variation display of the symbol is expected. You can pay attention to the result.

Next, in the ball entry suggestion effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC blinks a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 at high speed in the light emitting mode determined in step S2303. The suggestion effect is executed, and the high-speed blinking in the light emitting mode is continued until a predetermined period elapses (step S2304). In this example, when the suggestion effect is executed, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are blinked at high speed, so that it is easy to notice that the suggestion effect is being executed. Further, during the execution of the suggestion effect, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the suggestion effect is not newly executed. That is, only when the suggestion effect is not being executed, it is possible to newly execute the suggestion effect when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005.

In this example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the period for executing the suggestion effect. It is preferable that the period for executing such a suggestion effect is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol during the control of the time saving state. According to this, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to execute more suggestive effects than the result of the variation display of the symbol is shown, and therefore, a plurality of suggestive effects provided around the second starting port 2005 are provided. Depending on the light emitting mode of the LED, the chance of suggesting that the result of the variation display of the symbol shown after entering the second starting port 2005 is likely to be a hit increases, and attention is paid to the execution of the suggestion effect with expectation. be able to.

Further, in this example, during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the effect is produced from the start winning during the execution of the symbol variation display to the execution of the symbol variation display according to the start winning. While the display device 1600 displays the hold display so that the number of holds can be seen, during the control of the time saving state, the start prize is given during the execution of the change display of the symbol, and then the change display of the symbol according to the start prize. The hold display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the above is executed. That is, during the control of the time saving state, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, the hold display is not displayed and the hold number is unknown, so that the hold number reaches the upper limit. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B is continuously driven so that a large number of game balls B enter the second starting port 2005 regardless of whether or not the number of holdings has reached the upper limit. be able to.

Further, in this example, during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), as a pre-determination effect (so-called look-ahead effect), it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by starting and winning a prize during execution of the symbol variation display. While the hold display is used to execute the variable display of the symbol according to the start winning prize and erase the hold display, a hold change effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a hit is executed by changing the mode of the hold display. It is possible to do. In addition, in the hold change effect, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the hold display modes, and the final hold display mode is blue, green, red, and rainbow colors in that order, and expectations for hits are expected. It is supposed to be executed so that the degree is high. In addition, in the hold change effect, there is a high degree of expectation for a hit as a mode of hold display from the start winning to the execution of the change display of the symbol according to the start prize during the execution of the change display of the symbol. It is possible to change to a mode that suggests. That is, at the time when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by winning the start prize during the execution of the variable display of the symbol, the mode of the hold display may change thereafter, and the symbol corresponding to the start prize may be changed. At the time of executing the variable display, it is necessary to wait until the final mode of the hold display is determined, whether or not a mode suggesting that the expectation for the hit is high appears.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, the effect display device 1600 displays the hold display from the start winning during the execution of the symbol variation display to the execution of the symbol variation display according to the start winning. Since it is not displayed, the above-mentioned pending change effect is not executed either. As a result, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to pay attention to the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, which is the execution target of the suggestion effect. Further, in the suggestion effect, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, and blink at high speed until a predetermined period elapses. However, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs does not change until a predetermined period elapses. From this, it is not necessary to keep paying attention to the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 after the start of the suggestion effect, and the ball enters the second starting port 2005. Without waiting for the variable display of the symbol to be executed, it is possible to grasp at an early stage the possibility that the result of the variable display of the symbol displayed after entering the second starting port 2005 will be a hit.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting portion on the game area when the suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 246, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 for a predetermined period of time. Is performing a suggestion effect so that is blinking at high speed. Further, as the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors is used to blink at high speed. In this way, during the control of the time saving state, the suggestion effect is executed by using the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 in which the game ball B should be inserted, so that the second starting port is used. Even players who are paying attention to whether or not to enter the ball in 2005 will naturally notice that the suggestion effect is being executed.

Further, when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, etc. during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the area of the lower left of the effect display device 1600. In addition to displaying the hold display, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned hold change effect until the hold display is erased by executing the change display of the symbol according to the start winning prize. Further, as the mode of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed in any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

Further, when the suggestion effect is executed when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the second start port 2005 is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect. Not only are the plurality of LEDs provided in the periphery blinking at high speed, but also a predetermined light emitting unit 2590 provided in the upper left portion of the game area 5a is lit or blinking. As a result, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, the suggestion effect is executed even for the player who does not pay attention to the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. It's easier to notice what you're doing. Similarly, when the hold change effect is executed when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003 or the like during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the hold change effect is performed. Not only is the mode of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 changed during the execution of the above, but also the common light emitting unit 2590 is turned on or blinks. As a result, even for the player who is not paying attention to the effect display device 1600 when entering the first lower start port 2003 or the like during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the hold change effect is executed. It's easier to notice that you are there. As for the common light emitting unit 2590, the distance from the second starting port 2005 that should be entered during the control of the time saving state and the first lower start that should be entered during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state). It is provided at a position where the distance from the mouth 2003 is substantially the same. As a result, the positions of the starting ports (first lower starting port 2003, second starting port 2005) to be entered differ depending on whether the ball is controlled in the time saving state or the normal state (non-time saving state). To determine whether or not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a hit (suggestion effect, pending change effect) is being executed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from each start port. Even if the starting port (first lower starting port 2003, second starting port 2005) to be entered is changed, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook that such an effect is being executed.

In the above, when the suggestion effect is executed, not only the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 blink at high speed, but also the common light emitting unit 2590 is lit or blinking. As a common light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 2590, it is lit or blinked in a light emitting color different from the light emitting color (blue, green, red, rainbow color in this example) used in the suggestion effect. For example, as a common light emitting unit 2590 light emitting mode, it is lit or blinked in yellow, purple, orange, or the like. According to this, even if the common light emitting unit 2590 lights up or blinks when the suggestion effect is executed, it is difficult to misunderstand that the light emitting mode itself suggests the degree of expectation for hitting, which is common. After confirming that the light emitting unit 2590 is lit or blinking, it is clearly recognized that the degree of expectation for hit should be confirmed by the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. be able to.

In this example, the emission color used in the suggestion effect at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 is blue, green, red, or rainbow color, whereas the entering ball of the first lower starting port 2003 The emission color used in the hold change effect at the time is one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, and the same emission color is set, but different emission colors may be set. .. Further, as a common light emitting unit 2590 light emitting mode, not only is it configured to light or blink in a light emitting color different from the light emitting color used in the suggestion effect, but also a light emitting color different from the light emitting color used in the hold change effect. It may be configured to light up or blink with. According to this, even if the common light emitting unit 2590 lights up or blinks when the hold change effect is executed, it is difficult to misunderstand that the light emitting mode itself suggests the degree of expectation for hitting, which is common. After confirming that the light emitting unit 2590 of the above is lit or blinking, it is possible to clearly recognize that the degree of expectation for hit should be confirmed by the mode of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, it is suggested by using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. Although the production is being executed, when the game ball B enters the first lower start port 2003 during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the first lower start port 2003 is also executed. It may be possible to execute the suggestion effect by using a plurality of LEDs provided in the periphery. Even in such a case, not only are the plurality of LEDs provided around the first lower start port 2003 blinking at high speed during the execution of the suggestion effect during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), but also. The common light emitting unit 2590 is set to light up or blink. That is, regarding the common light emitting unit 2590, the distance from the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 used when executing the suggestion effect during the control of the time saving state and the normal state (non-time saving state). ) Is provided at a position where the distances from the plurality of LEDs provided around the first lower starting port 2003 used when executing the suggestion effect are substantially the same. .. As a result, although the part where the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on whether the time is controlled to the time saving state or the normal state (non-time saving state), the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the hit (suggestion effect) is executed. As for whether or not the suggestion effect is performed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the part where the suggestion effect is executed, and even if the part where the suggestion effect is executed changes, that It can be hard to overlook that such an effect is being executed.

Further, in this example, the common light emitting unit 2590 should be entered during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state) and the distance from the second starting port 2005 which should be entered during the control of the time saving state. The distance from the first lower start port 2003 is approximately the same as the distance from the first lower start port 2003, but the distance is not limited to this, and the common light emitting unit 2590 is the second start used when executing the suggestion effect. The distance from the plurality of LEDs provided around the mouth 2005 and the distance from the hold display displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 used when executing the hold change effect are substantially the same distance. It may be configured to be provided at such a position. As a result, although the part where the effect (suggestion effect, pending change effect) is executed differs depending on whether it is controlled in the time saving state or the normal state (non-time saving state), it suggests the degree of expectation for hitting. To determine whether or not the effects (suggestion effects, pending change effects) are being executed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting unit 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the part where each effect is executed. Even if the part where the pending change effect is executed changes, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook that such an effect is executed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is a combination of a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game ball B and game machines called managed game machines.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 2551 of the binding pedestal 2550 and the main body portion 2561 of the binding pedestal 2560 are shown as flat plates or blocks, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion of the binding pedestal is used. , It may be a unit case of an opening / closing unit having an advancing / retreating door body for opening / closing the winning opening or distributing the game ball B, or a unit base of the production unit.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3600 Back rear production unit 3601 Unit base (fixed base)
3602 Guide shaft 3604 Rotating slit 3700 Back rear lower decorative body (movable decorative body)
3710 First rotating decorative body 3713 First rotating decorative body decorative substrate (electronic component)
3720 Second rotating decorative body 3723 Second rotating decorative body Decorative board (electronic parts)
3730 Third Rotating Decorative 3733 Third Rotating Decorative Board (Electronic Components)
3740 Fourth Rotating Decorative Body 3743 Fourth Rotating Decorative Body Decorative Substrate (Electronic Components)
3750 Rear decoration body 3753 Rear decoration body Decorative board (electronic parts)
3760 Left unit 3780 Right unit 3781 Right slide base (movable base)
3787 Gear cover (movable base)
3787a Wiring locking part 3787b Wiring locking part (harness support part)
3787c Wiring locking part 3788 Unit arm (arm)
EC wiring CT binding band CTa band part CTb lock part WH3 harness

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of starting conditions and gives profits based on the results of the lottery.
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
An operation valid period generating means for generating an operation valid period capable of accepting an operation on the operation unit, and an operation valid period generating means.
Based on the result of the lottery, when the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period, it is provided with an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of effects.
A gaming machine characterized in that one of a plurality of types of specific effects is executed according to the operation timing within the operation valid period.

Images